HomeMy WebLinkAboutSP201800001 Approval - Water System Expansion 2019-04-11 KESWICK HALL
WATER SYSTEM EXPANSION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
.ter
... 0,
„,
4•
4044_ . .-- ,: ,.,,,,,, ........,&. , . ,
' ,t..:.. ___,-**.,_,.... ,..; „ _ _.,- iiiwgiip--- - : i •i; .1.-74,.-1-
jithAll
i ',,,. , :-. ,.
Keswick, Virginia
I,
TIMMONS GROUP p BRUCE W.
u STRICKLAND JR. y
YOUR VISION ACHIEVED THROUGH OURS.
Lic. No. 056612
Site Development I Residential I Infrastructure I Technology . �78/79 4
www.timmons.com N�
January 18, 2019 /� SIONAL '0` -
Project Number 40241
KESWICK HALL
WATER SYSTEM EXPANSION
Technical Specifications
Engineer:
Timmons Group
1001 Boulders Parkway, Suite 300
Richmond, VA 23225
Contact: Bruce Strickland, P.E.
Phone: 804-200-6389
Fax: 804-560-1438
APPROVED
Date
by the Albemarle County
COrtlmunsly De . t Department
Fite
�l�S�o00
January 18, 2019
Project Number 40241
.11111111
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGES
These technical specifications are supplemental to the Drawings and the Albemarle County Service
Authority (ACSAI General Water and Sewer Construction Specifications. Where requirements
overlap or conflict,the more stringent requirements shall apply.
DIVISION 1
01 1100 Summary of Work 4
013100 Coordination 2
01 3119 Project Meetings 1
013300 Submittals 5
01 4000 Testing and Inspection 4
01 4333 Manufacturer's Services 3
01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Environmental Protection 3
01 6000 Materials and Equipment 6
01 7000 Closeout Procedures 4
01 7823 Operating and Maintenance Data 2
01 7836 Startup Warranties and Guarantees 2
DIVISION 2
02 0000 Site Conditions 1
DIVISION 3
03 1500 Adhesive Anchors 2
03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 19
03 6000 Grout 8
DIVISION 9
09 9100 Painting 6
09 9713 Steel Tank Coatings 4
DIVISION 22
22 1123.13 Domestic-Water Packaged Booster Pumps 14
22 1219 Steel Potable Water Storage Non-Pressure Tank 4
DIVISION 25
25 9000 Sequence of Operation 3
DIVISION 26
26 0526 Selective Demolition for Electrical 2
26 0519 Electrical Power and Control Conductors and Cables 8
26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 6
26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 5
26 0533.13 Conduit 8
26 0533.16 Boxes 5
26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems 7
26 0573 Power System Studies 7
26 2416 Panelboards 6
26 2726 Wiring Devices 4
TOC/ 1of2
26 2813 Fuses 2
26 2816.16 Enclosed Switches 4
26 2923 Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers 4
26'3600 Transfer Switches - 5
. 26 5100 Interior Lighting 3
DIVISION 33
33 0523 Horizontal Directional Drilling 5
33 1000 Water Utilities 15
33 2000 Wells 4
DIVISION 40
40 7521 Chlorine Analyzer 5
40 7522 Chlorine Analyzer Controller 7
40 4200 Process Piping Insulation 6
DIVISION 43
43 4221 Welded Steel Pressure Tank 3
DIVISION 46
46 3000 Chemical Feed Equipment 5
APPENDICES
Appendix A Well#5 Completion Report
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
•
TOC/2of2
.11111
SECTION 01 1100 SUMMARY
OF WORK
1. GENERAL •
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes requirements of a general nature applicable to the Contract.
B. The Work includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Install new well pump,piping, and appurtenances in existing wells#4 and#5; construct water
main from existing well#5 to existing Water Plant;install new water meter assemblies,
chemical feed pumps, static mixer, chlorine analyzer, 22,000 gallon atmospheric storage tank,
booster pumps, 6,000 gallon hydropneumatic tank, and associated fittings,appurtenances,
controls and connections to the existing distribution system at the existing Water Plant.
1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
A. Applicable Codes, Specifications, and Standards:
1. All references to codes,specifications, and standards referred to in the Contract Documents
shall be the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such reference standard in effect as
of the date of Notice to Proceed for this Contract.
2. These Codes, Specifications and Standards are by reference incorporated into these contract
documents.In the event of a conflict,the more stringent as determined by the Engineer shall
prevail.
B. Documents on the Site:
1. The Contractor shall maintain,on the site, copies of all appropriate documents including
codes, specifications,permits, and reference standards referred to for this project.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
1. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
2. ACI American Concrete Institute
3. ACSA Albemarle County Service Authority
4. ANSI American National Standards Institute
5. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
6. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
7. NHI National Hydraulics Institute
8. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
9. AWWA American Water Works Association
10. BOCA Building Officials Code Administration, Inc.
11. NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
12. NEC National Electrical Code
13. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
14. VAUSBC Virginia Statewide Unified Building Code
15. VDOT Virginia Department of Transportation
16. VSWCC Virginia Soil and Water Conservation Board
011100/ lof4
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The Contractor shall,at his own expense, obtain any and all permits and surety required and shall
be responsible for all submittals necessary to obtain said permits required in the Contract
Documents.
B. Use of Premises and Off-Site Work
1. Facility Property—The Contractor may use the areas shown on the plans, if any,for the
staging and storage of materials and equipment. The Contractor may access the other areas of
the site for the purpose of construction and installation. The Contractor is required to
coordinate the use of areas with the Owner in accordance with Section 01 31 00 Coordination.
2. Lands by Contractor-Any land and access thereto not furnished by the Owner that the
Contractor deems necessary for the work,temporary construction facilities,access and egress,
or for storage of materials shall be provided by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The
Contractor shall confine his apparatus and storage to such additional areas as he may provide
at his expense. The Contractor shall obtain permits and written approvals from the
appropriate jurisdictional agency and or property owner for use of the premises not furnished
as described above, and all off-site areas which include but are not limited to off-site borrow
pits and waste areas. Such permits and approvals must specify treatment of said areas during
and at the completion of construction. Copies of all permits and approvals shall be furnished
to the Engineer before utilization of the areas.
3. Private and Public Property-The Contractor shall not enter upon private property for any
purpose without obtaining written permission from the property owner. Letters of permission
from property owners shall be filed with the Engineer prior to entering private property.
C. The Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded with weights
that could endanger the structure,nor shall he subject any part of the work to stresses or
pressures that could endanger it.
D. Public Convenience
1. The Contractor shall,at all times,so conduct his work as to ensure the least possible
obstruction to traffic and inconvenience to the Owner,the general public, and the businesses
and residences in the vicinity of the work, and to ensure the protection of persons and
property.Fire hydrants on and adjacent to the work shall be kept accessible to fire fighting
equipment at all times. Temporary provisions shall be made by the Contractor to insure the
use of sidewalks and the proper functioning of all gutters, stormwater systems, drainage
ditches, and culverts, etc. such that they shall not be obstructed.
E. Measurements
1. All dimensions shown on existing work and all dimensions required for work that is to connect
to existing work shall be verified by the Contractor by actual measurement of the existing
work.Any discrepancies between the Contract Documents and the existing conditions shall be
referred to the Engineer before any work affected thereby has been completed.
F. Coordination
1. Phases of the construction of the project which involve the temporary interruption of essential
services (water, electricity, etc.)shall be scheduled in consultation with the Engineer, Owner,
and Operator, and shall be not of longer duration than essential to accomplish thepurpose for
such interruptions. Liaison with the Engineer in this matter shall be a salient feature of this
Contract.
2. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the Owner not less than 48 hours in
011100/2of4
•
advance of commencing work. The Owner shall be given no'less than 48 hours
notice in advance of the time and date of making any connections and will advise the
Contractor as to a suitable time and date. Portions of work may need to occur outside
of normal business hours (at night)to avoid service disruptions.
G. The Contractor, at his own expense,shall retain the services of a registered Land
Surveyor to establish the necessary horizontal and vertical control in order to construct
the proposed work in the proper location. Cut sheets performed by a registered Land
Surveyor shall be delivered to the Engineer 48 hours prior to installation of anywork.
H. Contractor Checklist: This checklist is intended to be a guide and to assist the Contractor
in determining what items need to be submitted to the Owner/Engineer or what services
need to be performed by the Contractor. The checklist is not intended to be an all-
inclusive list of services to be performed by the Contractor,and does not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibilities stipulated within these specifications.
Contractor Checklist for Major Items to be Performed and/or Submitted
Required as Check Once
Part of This Description of Submittal Item or Service to be Performed Item is
Contract Completed
Yes Diagram of location of fuel storage areas on plans
Yes Diagram of location of temporary sanitary Facilities on plans
No Statement of payment of taxes
Yes Affidavit of payment of debts and claims
Yes Affidavit of release of liens
Yes Construction schedule of work prior to the commencement of any work
Yes Updates of the construction schedule if work does not follow the original
schedule
Yes Schedule of values (shows the value of each kind of work)prior to first
application for payment
Yes Schedule of shop drawing submittals
No Schedule of estimated monthly payments (within 30 days after contract
date
Yes Material and products schedule(include in construction schedule)
Yes List of product substitutions(for a period of 30 days after contract date)
Yes All required permits(e.g.,building permit, land disturbance permit,etc.)
No Field office located at project site with the following equipment:
1) Telephone
2) Message recording unit
3) Water and sanitary facilities
Temporary field office for use by the Engineer that is
approximately 150 square feet and includes:
1) One stick file
2) One drawing table
3) One stool
4) One non-folding desk chair
5) One desk
6) One four-drawer lockable filing cabinet
011100/3of4
Required as Check Once
Part of This Description of Submittal Item or Service to be Performed Item is
Contract Completed
Yes Shop drawings and product data
Yes Samples
Yes Layout data/schedule for pipe joining and special connections
Yes Copies of survey cut sheets
No Diary or log book recording significant construction activities,meetings,
weather conditions, etc.
Yes Progress reports submitted with each application for payment
Yes Test results (e.g., concrete cylinder tests, compaction tests,etc.)
Yes One signed original and 3 copies of inspections or approvals of work
required to be inspected by local code or law
No Project photographs (a minimum of 10 photos per month during contract)
that include two glossy color prints (8 in.x 10 in.)and each negative
Yes Product guarantees, certificates,and warranties
Yes Contractor's one-year standard warranty for all work
Yes Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Yes Spare parts and maintenance materials
Yes One complete set of contract drawings and one project manual recording
all changes to the work to indicate actual installation
Yes Application and Certificate for Payment in appropriate format
Yes Monthly progress meetings
No Preliminary inspection and testing(a demonstration that individual
components of equipment/work have been completed) scheduled a
Minimum of 20 days before the pre-final inspection is scheduled.
Yes Pre-final inspection(a demonstration that all individual project components
function and are coordinated with other systems)scheduled a minimum of
20 days before the fmal inspection.
Yes Final inspection(a demonstration that all elements of the project are ready
to be placed in operation and all work has been substantially completed)
scheduled a minimum of 20 days before completion date.
Yes Calibration test results performed by competent experienced test engineers
Yes Nameplates on all devices
Yes Brass tags on each field mounted device
Yes List of manufacturers, suppliers,and subcontractors who participated in the
construction of the project
2. PRODUCTS—NOT USED
3. EXECUTION—NOT USED
END OF SECTION
011100/4of4
SECTION 013100
COORDINATION
1. GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Informational
1. Statement of Qualifications (SOQ)for Land Surveyor or Civil Engineer.
2. Sequence of Construction. ` •
3. Temporary Water Storage and Bypass Pumping Plan.
1.2 UTILITY NOTIFICATION AND COORDINATION •
A. The Contractor will coordinate the Work with various utilities within the Project limits.
The Contractor will notify applicable utilities prior to commencing work and if damage
occurs,or if conflicts, or emergencies arise during execution of the Work.
1.3 FACILITY OPERATIONS
A. Continuous operation of the Owner's facilities is of critical importance. The
Contractor shall schedule and conduct activities to enable existing facilities to operate
continuously,unless otherwise specified.
B. The Contractor shall perform the Work continuously during critical connections and
changeovers, and as required to prevent interruption of the Owner's operations. All
planned service interruptions shall require approval of the Owner and Engineer and
shall occur between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 2:00 a.m.
C. When necessary the Contractor shall plan, design,and provide various temporary services,
utilities, connections,temporary piping and heating,access, and similar items to maintain
continuous operation of the Owner's facility.
D. The Contractor shall not close lines, open or close valves,or take other actions which
would affect the operations of the existing systems, except as specifically required by the
Contract Documents and after authorization by the Owner,Engineer, and Operator. Such
authorization will be considered within 48 hours after receipt of the Contractor's written
request. •
E. Contractor shall not proceed with work affecting the facility's operation without
obtaining Owner's,Engineer's, and Operator's advanced approval.
1.4 REFERENCE POINTS AND SURVEYS
A. Contractor's Responsibilities: •
1. Check and establish exact location of existing facilities prior to construction ofnew
facilities and any connections thereto.
•
2. In the event of a discrepancy in data the Contractor shall request
clarification before proceeding with the Work.
3. The Contractor shall retain the services of a Professional Land surveyor or Civil
Engineer registered in the State of Virginia,who shall perform or supervise the
engineering and surveying necessary for the construction staking and layout.
4. The Contractor shall maintain a complete and accurate log of the survey Work as it
progresses as a Record Document.
5. On request of the Engineer,the Contractor shall submit documentation.
•
013100/ 1of2
6. The Contractor shall provide competent employee(s),tools, stakes, and other
equipment and materials as the Engineer may require to:
a) Establish control points, lines,and easement boundaries.
b) Check layout, survey and measurement Work performed by others.
c) Measure quantities for payment purposes.
2.PRODUCTS—NOT USED
•
3.EXECUTION ,
3.1 CUTTING FITTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, fit,adjust, or patch Work and work by others, including excavation and backfill as
required,to make the Work complete.
B. Obtain prior written authorization from the Engineer before commencing the Work to cut
or otherwise alter:
1. Structural reinforcing steel, structural column or beam, elevated slab,trusses, or other
structural member.
2. Weather—or moisture-resistant elements.
3. Efficiency,maintenance, or safety element.
C. Work of others.
1. Refinish surfaces to provide an even fmish.
2. Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection.
3. Refinish entire assemblies.
4. Finish restored surfaces to such planes, shapes, and textures that no transition
between existing work and new Work is evident in finished surfaces. -
5. Restore existing work,underground facilities, and surfaces that are to remain in
completed Work including concrete-embedded piping, conduit, and other utilities as
specified and as shown.
6. Make restorations with new materials and appropriate methods as specified for new
Work of similar nature; if not specified, use recommended practice of manufacturer or
appropriate trade association.
7. Fit Work airtight pipes,sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through
surfaces and fill voids.
8. Remove specimens of installed Work for testing when requested by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION
013100/2of2
, SECTION 013119
PROJECT MEETINGS
1. GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Contractor participation in preconstruction conferences.
B. Contractor participation in progress meetings and pre-installation conferences.
1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES
A. Engineer will administer preconstruction conference for execution of Owner-Contractor
Agreement and exchange of preliminary submittals.
B. Attendance: Owner,Engineer, Contractor,major Subcontractors,representatives of Quality
Control firm(s).
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Engineer shall schedule and administer project meetings throughout progress of the work at
maximum monthly intervals, as well as administer called meetings,and pre-installation
conferences.
B. Engineer shall make physical arrangements for meetings,prepare agenda with copies for
participants,preside at meetings,record minutes,and distribute copies within seven(7)
days to Contractor,participants, and those affected by decisions made at meetings.
C. Attendance: Contractor's Superintendent, Contractor's Project Manager,major
Subcontractors and Suppliers; Owner and Engineer as appropriate to agenda topics for each
meeting.
D. Suggested Agenda: Review of Work progress, status of progress schedule and adjustments
thereto, delivery schedules, submittals,maintenance of quality standards,pending changes
and substitutions, and other items affecting progress of Work.
1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. When required in individual specification Section, Contractor shall convene a pre-
' installation conference prior to commencing work of that Section.
B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by,work of the Section.
C. Review conditions of installation,preparation and installation procedures, and coordination
with related work.
2. PRODUCTS—NOT USED
3. EXECUTION—NOT USED
END OF SECTION
01 3119/Page 1 of
SECTION 013300
SUBMITTALS
1. GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Procedures
B. Schedule of Submittals
C. Construction Progress Schedules
D. Schedule of Values
E. Shop Drawings
F. Product Data
G. Manufacturer's Instructions
H. Operation&Maintenance Manuals
1.2 PROCEDURES
A. Contractor is required to provide submittals for all materials and equipment furnished and
installed under this contract.
B. Contractor shall deliver submittals to Engineer.
C. Transmit each item with Submittal cover attached.
1. Number submittals by specification section and revision number(e.g. 013000-1 for
initial submission of schedule of submittals.)
2. . Submit only one item per cover. Highlight all deviations from the Contract
Documents, and provide explanation/justification for deviation.
3. Complete all portions of the form above the Contractor's signature line. Incomplete
submittals or submittals with unhighlighted deviations will be returned unreviewed.
D. Submit initial progress schedules, schedule of values, and schedule of submittals in
duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. After review by
Engineer,revise and resubmit as required. Submit revised schedules with each Application
for Payment,reflecting changes since previous submittal.
E. Comply with progress schedule for shop drawings,product data, and manufacturer's
instructions related to Work progress, and coordinate submittal of related items.
F. Allow a minimum of two weeks'review time.
G. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to appropriate parties. Instruct recipients to
promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor to provide'to Engineer a Schedule of Submittals for all products used during
construction 2 weeks prior to the start of work.
B. Submit the number of copies required by the Contractor,plus three for the Engineer to
retain.
•
1.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
01 3300/Page 1 of 5 •
A. Submit horizontal bar chart with separate bar for each major trade or operation,identifying
first work day of each week. Show relationships between critical path items and indicate
lead times for equipment and materials delivery, etc.
B. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying work of separate stages
and other logically grouped activities. Show projected percentage of completion for each
item of Work as of time of each Application for Progress Payment.
C. Construction schedule shall consider the following typical number of weather days, (i.e.>
0.10" of precipitation) as well as days following during which site conditions may impede
progress of the work. The Contractor will not be allowed a time extension due to inclement
weather conditions if the total number of inclement weather days for the duration of the
project is less than the total inclement weather days indicated below.
JFMAMJJASOND
6 6 7 6 6 6 8 6 5 5 5 6
D. Submit the number of copies required by the Contractor,plus three for the Engineer to
retain.
E. Determination of actual rain days will be based on data published by NOAA for the
gauging station nearest the project site,which will be identified at the pre-construction
meeting.
F. At each monthly progress meeting,prepare a Monthly Project Summary Report(form
included with this section) and attach to the revised project schedule.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit the number of copies required by the Contractor,plus three for the Engineer to
retain.
1.6 PRODUCT DATA
A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products,models, options, and other data;
supplement manufacturer's standard data to provide information unique to the Work.
B. Submit the number of copies required by the Contractor,plus three for the Engineer to
retain. •
1.7 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation
adjusting,and finishing.
B. Submit the number of copies required by the Contractor,plus three for the Engineer to
retain.
•
2. PRODUCTS—NOT USED
01 3300/Page 2 of 5
3. EXECUTION
3.1 SHOPDRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall keep a copy of all shop drawings and submittals on the project site for the
duration of the contract
END OF SECTION
(See Monthly Project Summary Report which follows)
(See Submittal Cover which follows)
01 3300/Page 3 of 5
MONTHLY PROJECT SUMMARY REPORT
MEETING DATE:
Is the project on Schedule? Yes No
Number of weeks AHEAD of Schedule
Number of weeks BEHIND Schedule
List items from Schedule which are AHEAD OF SCHEDULE:
List items from Schedule which are RIGHT ON SCHEDULE:
List items from Schedule which are BEHIND SCHEDULE:
If behind,what is the Contractor doing to get back on schedule?
When does the Contractor anticipate the Project to be back on Schedule? Date:
Are there any outstanding change order items? _ Yes No
If so, list them:
Adverse Weather Summary
JFMAMJ J AS OND
Scheduled
Actual
Balance
SUBMITTED: DATE:
SIGNED: TITLE:
01 3300/Page 4 of 5
Submittal Cover
No. -
Project: Project#:
To: Timmons Group From:
Attn:
1001 Boulders Parkway, Suite 300
Richmond, Virginia 23225
Date Submitted: Review Requested Not Later Than:
Submittal Information and Contractor's Representation
Subject:
Pursuant to Specification Section(s): Drawing No(s).
Submitted as: ❑ Specified Item 0 "Equal" Item ❑ Substitution ❑
Items Submitted:
The Contractor's submittal of items for the Engineer's review and approval constitutes a representation
that the items proposed have been reviewed thoroughly by the Contractor and found to be in
conformance with the requirements of the Contract Drawings and Specifications. All deviations have
been clearly listed in the submittal package and an explanation provided for the deviation.
Contractor's Reviewer(sign): Date:
Review Information
Timmons Group:
Received on: Forwarded for review to:
Reviewer:
Received On: Reviewed by:
Review is for general compliance with the Contract Documents. Nothing in this review shall be
taken as permitting variation from the Contract Documents, unless specifically stated by the
reviewer in writing. Sole responsibility for correctness of dimensions, options, details, quantities,
and safety during fabrication and erection shall remain with the Contractor. EVALUATION OF
INSTALLATION FOR FINAL ACCEPTANCE WILL BE BASED ON THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS,
NOT THE SUBMITTALS, EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY APPROVED OTHERWISE IN WRITING.
❑ No Exceptions Taken ❑ Rejected ❑ Resubmission Not Required
❑ Revise and Resubmit ❑ Submit Specified Item ❑
Comments:
Returned to Timmons Group: Returned to Contractor:
01 3300/Page 5 of 5
SECTION 014000
TESTING AND INSPECTION
1. GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. Concrete Testing and Inspection
B. Masonry Testing and Inspection
C. Reinforcing Steel Inspection
D. Testing and Inspection of Piping Systems
E. Equipment and Systems Testing and Inspection
1.2 INSPECTION SERVICES
A. The Owner, at their discretion, shall retain the services and be responsible for paynient
for anindependent inspection firm or firms (Inspection Firm)to provide onsite
inspection.
1.3 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED TESTING SERVICES
A. At the time of the Preconstruction Conference,the Contractor shall provide to the Engineer
and Owner the identity of the concrete testing firm and laboratory(QC Firm)proposed to
perform the field quality control measure. The Contactor shall be responsible for the costs
of the field quality control measures at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. The QC firms shall not be authorized to:
1. Release,revoke, alter, or expand on the requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Perform any duties of the Contractor.
C. In coordination with the QC firms,the Contractor shall:
1. Cooperate with testing personnel,to provide access to the work and to the
Manufacturer's operations where applicable.
2. Secure and deliver to the QC firm(s) adequate quantities of representational samples
of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.
3. Provide to the QC firm the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete,
and other materials mixes which require control.
4. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:
a) To provide access to the Work to be tested.
b) To obtain and handle samples at the project site or at the source of the product to
be tested.
c) To facilitate inspections and tests.
d) For storage and curing of test samples.
5. Notify the QC firm sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for firmassignment
of personnel and scheduling of tests.
D. Copies of test results and product test reports shall be transmitted in quantities required
• by the Engineer directly from the QC firm, and shall not be handled or received by the
Contractor prior to being received by the Engineer.
E. Testing services other than those called for in these Contract Documents may be called for
by the Owner to check compliance with the specification requirements. When these
01 4000/Page 1 of 4
additional tests indicate compliance with specifications, the testing service charges shall be
borne by the Owner,but when non-compliance with specifications is indicated,the testing
service charges shall be the Contractor's responsibility and be deducted from the Contract
sum.
1.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Equipment Installation
1. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's installation
instructions. The 0&M Manual for the specific equipment shall be on hand during
the inspection phases for confirmation of correct installation. Contractor shall have on
site a copy of the 0 &M Manual with the installation instructions for review by the
Inspection Agency and Engineer.
B. Inspection
1. The Inspection Firm has the right to inspect all material and equipment at all stages of
development or fabrication,and shall be allowed access to the site and to the
Contractor's and Supplier's shops to conduct such inspections. Inspection by the
Inspection Firth shall not release the Contractor from responsibility or liabilitywith
respect to material or equipment.
2. When specified inspections or tests are required by the Contract Documents, the Work
involved shall not proceed beyond that point until such inspections or tests have been
completed and approved by the Inspection Firm. The Contractor shall inform the
Inspection Firm of the progress of the Work,and shall give the Inspection Firm a
minimum of three working days written notice of appropriate times for specified
inspections and tests. The Contractor shall insure that the portion of Work to be
inspected is safe, accessible, dry,ventilated and well lit.
3. When local codes or laws require approval and inspection of the Work by other
agencies or organizations before installation or operation,the Contractor shall obtain
such approval and submit one signed original and three copies of the approval to the
Inspection Firm.
4: That portion of the Work subject to the provisions of the Virginia Uniform Statewide
Building Code shall be constructed in accordance with the latest version.
5. The Work shall be subjected to continuous inspection by the Inspection Firm and a
formal inspection by the Engineer:All required labor,materials, equipment,
instruments, lubricants and incidentals necessary to perform these inspections shall be
furnished by the Contractor. This includes providing competent and experienced
personnel,who are authorized representatives of the Manufacturers of the equipment
furnished,to assist the Contractor in the installation, testing and adjustments of the
equipment to perform in accordance with the Contract Documents. Before proceeding
to the next inspection, all discrepancies and deficiencies observed during each
inspection shall be noted and corrected and, if directed by the Engineer,the inspection
shall be rescheduled and re-performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
6. Pre-final Inspection: The Contractor shall schedule in accordance with his construction
schedule and with the approval of the Engineer a Pre-final Inspection to take place a
minimum of 10 days before the Contractor's date of substantial completion. The Pre-
final Inspection shall fully demonstrate to the Engineer or Inspecting Firm that all
individual project components function as required by the Contract Documents and that
all systems are internally coordinated, as well as coordinated with other systems.
01 4000/Page 2 of 4
Equipment shall be operated and required system tests performed. In addition,the
Contractor shall demonstrate that all major site work has been brought to final
configurations and restorationinitiated.All items of deficiency noted for correction
shall be completed before the Final Inspection is scheduled. The Engineer will prepare
a punch list of items to be accomplished prior to Final Acceptance.
7. Final Inspection :After the Contractor has shown that all systems and project work are
completed and deficiencies noted in the Pre-final Inspection are corrected, a Final
Inspection of the project including a test and demonstration of all equipment and
systems shall be scheduled. This Inspection shall take place a minimum of 20 days
before the Contractor's scheduled Final Completion date. Correction of the deficiencies
noted in the Pre-final Inspection shall be accomplished before the Engineer will
approve the scheduling of the Final Inspection. This Inspection shall demonstrate that
all elements of the project are ready to be placed in operation and all work has been
fully completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. Equipment Testing: Test procedures as specified in the Contract Documents or as
otherwise required shall be coordinated and demonstrated during the Pre-final and Final
Inspections. Each test shall be scheduled and performed by the Contractor in the presence
of the Engineer or Inspection Firm. All required labor,materials, equipment,instruments,
lubricants and incidentals to perform the tests shall be furnished by the Contractor. This
shall include providing competent and experienced personnel,who are authorized
-- representatives of the Manufacturers of the equipment furnished,to assist the Contractor in
the installation,testing and adjustments of the equipment to perform in accordance with the
' Contract Documents. Before proceeding to the next test, all discrepancies and deficiencies
observed during each test shall be noted and corrected and, if directed by the Engineer,the
test rescheduled and re-performed at no additional cost to the Owner.
1. Pre-final Test: During the Pre-fmal Inspection, equipment shall be operated and tested
to fully demonstrate to the Engineer that it works as a unit and a part of the entire
system in accordance with the Contract Documents and that all systems are internally
coordinated as well as coordinated with other systems.All items of deficiencies'and
required adjustments noted during this Test shall be corrected before the Final
Inspection is scheduled.
2. Final Test: After all equipment and systems have passed the Pre-final Inspection and
are completely installed with controls,instrumentation,safety devices and all items of
Work completed including correction of deficiencies, and adjustments,the Final
Inspection and Test shall be scheduled. This Test shall consist of continuously
operating the equipment and systems without interruption under actual operating
conditions for a period of 14 days to demonstrate that all are fully operative and ready
to be permanently placed in operation.The Contractor shall be responsible for
operation during the Final(14 day)Test,including provision of and payment for all
materials and operation costs necessary for the Tests. Should there be any disruption
during the 14 day period,the Contractor shall make necessary adjustments and
reschedule the Test from its beginning.
D. Acceptance: The Engineer shall recommend to the Owner that the Work be accepted upon
_ the Contractor's completion and to the satisfaction of the Owner, all of the Work required
by the Contract Documents and all items identified on the punchlist prepared by the
Engineer and Contractor, if any, at the time of the Final Inspection. The Contractor is
required to coordinate with the Engineer reinspections of Work listed on the punchlist. The
Engineer may require the Contractor to have groups of punchlist items completed prior to
reinspecting the Work. The Owner shall accept the Work upon the recommendation by the
i . 01 4000,/Page 3 of 4
Engineer and completion of all of the Work required by the Contract Documents and all
punchlist items; all Operation and Maintenance Manuals,"as-built"drawings, Certificates
and Written Warranties having been submitted and approved by the Engineer.
2. PRODUCTS—NOT USED
3. EXECUTION—NOT USED
END OF SECTION
•
•
01 4000/Page 4 of 4
SECTION 014333
MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Person-Day: One person for 8 hours within regular Contractor working hours.
1.2 SCOPE
A. Work under this section defines the minimum scope of services to be provided by the
Contractor using factory representatives of the Manufacturers of the equipment to be
installed during installation, start-up, and operator training.
B. Equipment Manufacturers assigned unit responsibility for systems comprised ofseveral
components shall provide the service of a factory representative for each component
Manufacturer to perform the duties required under these Specifications. The equipment
Manufacturer assigned unit responsibility shall be responsible for coordinating the
activities of the system component Manufacturers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Training Schedule: Submit not less than 21 days prior to equipment installation and
revise as necessary for acceptance.
B. Training Materials:
1. Final training materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to equipment startup
and training.
, 2. Furnish complete outlines of proposed training session, operation and maintenance
data for each trainee in attendance.
C. Quality Control Submittals:As required in the individual Specifications,submit:
1. The qualifications of Manufacturer's Representative performing specified services.
2. The Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance.
3. The Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation.
4. The Manufacturer's Written Warranty
1.4 QUALIFICATION
A. Qualification of the representatives for installation, startup, and operator training purposes
shall mean an authorized representative of the Manufacturer, factory trained, and
experienced in the technical applications,installation, operation and maintenance of the
equipment being installed and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.No
substitutions of approved representatives will be allowed without the prior written
approval of the Engineer.
B. References in various equipment sections of the terms"factory representative" or"field
representative"shall mean an employee or contractor of the equipment Manufacturer who
is trained, articulate,capable of coordinating and expediting training, and familiar
with operation and maintenance manual information specified in Section 01 7823,
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 72 hours prior to any impending visit by factory
representatives so that the Engineer may be present.
014333 / 1 of 3
B. The Engineer may approve the services of a Manufacturer's representative for more than
one system during the same site visit.
C. The Contractor shall perform the necessary inspections to ensure that all conditions
necessary for successful training and/or startup services have been met prior to
scheduling the Manufacturer's onsite services.
1.6 MINIMUM MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES REQUIREMENTS
A. Qualified factory representatives shall furnish Manufacturer's services as specified in the
Contract Documents.
B. Where time is specified in the Contract Documents for Manufacturer's services,the
specified time shall be considered a minimum time and any time in excess of the specified
time stated in the specifications to perform the required Manufacturer's services shall be
considered incidental work. Days of service, approved by the Engineer,will be credited to
fulfill the specified minimum Manufacturer's services.
C. The Contractor's training and startup schedule shall coordinate the Manufacturer's
services to avoid conflicting with other onsite testing or other Manufacturer's services.
D. The Manufacturer's services will include the following,as applicable to the specific
system or equipment items:
I. Installation assistance including observation,guidance, instruction of the
Contractor's assembly, erection,installation or applications.
2. Inspection, checking, and adjustment as required for product(system, subsystem,or
component)to function as warranted by the Manufacturer and necessary to furnish
written approval of installation.
3. Additional site visits as necessary to address problems and until installation and
operation are acceptable to the Engineer.
4. Perform,coordinate, and assist during functional and performance testing and startup
demonstration, and until product acceptance by the Engineer.
5. Training of the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance ofrespective
product as required.
6. Completion of the Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation with applicable
certificates for proper installation and initial, interim, and final test orservice.
1.7 SCHEDULE
A. List specified equipment and systems with respective Manufacturers that require training
services of Manufacturers'representatives and show:
1. Estimated dates for installation completion.
2. Estimated training dates to allow for multiple sessions when several shifts are
involved.
B. Adjust training schedule to ensure training of appropriate personnel as deemed necessary
by the Owner, and to allow full participation by the Manufacturers'representatives. Adjust
schedule for interruptions in operability of equipment.
1.8 TRAINING PLAN
A. Training Plan: Submit for each proposed course:
01 4333/2 of 3
1. Title and objectives
2. Schedule of training courses including dates, durations, and locations of each class
3. Recommended types of attendees(e.g.,managers, engineers, operators,maintenance)
4. Course description and outline of course content
5. Duration
6. Instruction materials and equipment requirements
7. Detailed course schedule for each day showing time allocated to each topic
1.9 TRAINING OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prestartup Training:
1. Coordinate training sessions with operating personnel and the Manufacturers'
representatives, and with submission of operation and maintenance manuals in
accordance with Section 01 7823, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA.
2. Complete at least 14 days prior to actual startup.
B. Post-Startup Training: If required in Specifications, furnish and coordinate training of the
Owner's operating personnel by respective Manufacturer's representatives.
2. PRODUCTS—NOT USED
3. EXECUTION—NOT USED
END OF SECTION
•
01 4333/3 of 3
SECTION 01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
it
1. GENERAL
1.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. General:
I. Temporary facilities and protective devices include, but are not limited to,the
following items: temporary barricades, fences,bridges,guards,temporary utilities,
steel plates over trenches,maintenance of.traffic and project identification signs.
2. All materials used in construction of the above mentioned items of work shall be of
such size, shape and strength as to be suitable for the use intended.
3. The Contractor shall conduct construction operations in such a manner as to cause as
•
little inconvenience as possible to the general public and the Owner.Wherever
required,the Contractor shall erect and maintain signs, fences,barricades, and
pedestrian bridges and provide guards and flagmen for the protection of the public.
4. The Contractor shall take positive measures to prevent at all times, entry to the site of
the work and storage areas by children,animals, and unauthorized adults.
B. Furnish and construct temporary fencing as needed to fence off excavation, storage, and
operating areas. All temporary fences erected by the Contractor shall be substantially
constructed,and neat in appearance.
1. Barricade or close all openings in roadways,floors,walls, or other parts ofstructures
or walkways while the openings are not in regular use. Barricades shall be substantial
and neat in appearance.'
C. Unless otherwise specified,the existing water system shall remain in service during the
entire construction period for the project. The Contractor shall provide temporary pumps,
tanks,pre-assembled flushing mechanisms and compressors as necessary to produce the
required flow and pressure to maintain operation of the system. The Contractor shall
provide water at no cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall assure the availability of
drinking water for his work force.
D. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements and provide all temporary electrical
service and lighting required during the entire construction period. The cost of electricity
used shall be borne by the Contractor. The electrical service shall be sufficient capacity
and characteristics to supply the proper current for the various types of construction tools,
motors,welding machines, lights,heating plant,pumps, and other work required. All
necessary temporary wiring,panel boards, outlets,switches,lamps, fuses, controls, and
accessories shall be provided.
E. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an adequate number of temporary toilets with
proper enclosures as necessary for use of workmen during construction. The Contractor
shall keep toilets clean and comply with local and State health requirements and sanitary
regulations. Toilet facilities shall be the prefabricated chemical type unless otherwise
permitted.
F. The Contractor shall be responsible for provisions of temporary heating, including all
costs of equipment and installation,fuel and attendance,whenever and for such periods as
such heating may be required, either because of general weather conditions to prevent
freezing,to provide suitable working conditions,or to assure progress of the operation
within the established scheduled time for curing of concrete.
01 5000/ 1 of 3
•
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining a normal through traffic flow in'
accordance with County and VDOT requirements. .
B. The Contractor shall provide temporary facilities as required for pedestrian andvehicular
access to properties adjacent to or contiguous to the project. Should it be necessary to
temporarily interrupt access, the Contractor shall so notify the Engineer, and after securing
the Engineer's approval, the Contractor shall notify all affected parties of the time, extent,
and duration of the interruption. • -
C. The Contractor shall not obstruct any driveway longer than two (2)hours without
providing an alternate temporary access to the property.
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all necessary items for fulfilling the
Work described herein for Environmental Protection including prevention and control of
erosion and sedimentation that results directly or indirectly from the project. The
' Contactor shall also be responsible for compliance with the Erosion and Sediment Control
Plan shown on the approved contract drawings.
B. Prevention of Water Pollution:
1. The Contractor shall take all such precautions in the conduct of his operations as may
be necessary to avoid contaminating the water in adjacent watercourses or water
storage areas.
2. All earthwork, moving of equipment, and other operations likely to create silting,
shall be conducted so as to minimize pollution of water courses and water storage
areas.
3. Water used during the work which has become harmful and contaminated with oil,
bitumins,or objectionable chemicals, sewage or other pollutants,shall be disposed of
so as to avoid affecting all nearby waters and lands. Under no circumstances shall the
Contractor discharge pollutants into any watercourse or water storage area. The
• Contractor shall not allow water used in aggregate processing,concrete curing,
foundation, and concrete lift cleanup, or any other waste;to enter a stream. When
water from adjacent natural sources is used in the Work, intake methods shall be such
' to avoid contaminating the source of supply or becoming a source of erosion.
C. Noise and Air Pollution Control
1. The Contractor shall conduct his operations so as not to violate any applicable
ordinances,regulations,rules, and laws.in effect in the area pertaining to noise and .
air pollution:.
D. Preservation of Natural Resources
1. All construction operations, cleanup, and the condition of the adjacent terrain upon
completion of the work shall fully comply with all applicable regulations and laws
concerning the preservation of natural resources.
E. Dust Control
1. Throughout the entire construction period,maintain dustcontrol by use of water
sprinklers or chemical dust control binder as may be approved by the Engineer and
VDOT.
•
01 5000/2 of 3
1.4 CONFINED SPACE REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all practices and procedures, either singularly or in
combination,required for entry into a confined space area as defined by the Virginia
Occupational Safety and Health Codes Board. Such practices include,but are not limited
to:
1. Preparation
2. Atmospheric Testing
3. Attendants and Rescue Teams
4. Permit Systems
5. Training
6. Special Equipment and Tools
7. Tripods, Safety Harnesses,Retrieval Lines,and Respiratory Protection
B. The Contractor shall be required to conform to requirements stipulated in the
Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations.
1.5 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish;periodically dispose of off-site.
B. Clean areas prior to start of finish work; maintain areas free of dust and other
contaminants during finishing operations.
C. It is imperative that a wash rack shall be installed as shown on the drawings to
eliminate sediment and objectionable material transport by vehicular tracking
onto paved surfaces.Where sediment and objectionable material is transported
onto a paved road surface,the road surface shall be thoroughly cleaned
immediately to the satisfaction of the owner.
2. PRODUCTS—NOT USED
3. EXECUTION—NOT USED
END OF SECTION
01 5000/3 of 3
SECTION 01 6000
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
1. GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Products:
•
1. New items for incorporation in the Work whether purchased by Contractor or Owner
for the Project, or taken from previously purchased stock and may also include
existing materials or components required for reuse.
2. Includes the terms material, equipment,machinery, components, subsystem, system,
hardware,software, and terms of similar intent and is not intended to change meaning
of such other terms used in Contract Documents, as those terms are self-explanatory
and have well recognized meanings in construction industry.
3. Items identified by Manufacturer's product name,including make or model
designation, indicated in Manufacturer's published product literature,that is current
as of the date of the Contract Documents.
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Where Contractor design is specified, design of installation,systems, equipment, and
components, including supports and anchorage, shall be in accordance with provisions of
latest edition of Virginia Statewide Uniform Building Code.
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Altitude: Provide materials and equipment suitable for installation and operation under
rated conditions at elevations shown on theDrawings.
B. Provide equipment and devices installed outdoors or in unheated enclosures capable of
continuous operation within an ambient temperature range of 0 °F to 104°F.
1.4 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT
A. When practical,have the factory assemble products,mark or tag separate parts and
' assemblies to facilitate field assembly. Cover machined and unpainted parts that maybe
damaged by the elements with strippable protective coating.
B. Package products to facilitate handling and protect from damage during shipping,
handling, and storage.Mark or tag outside of each package or crate to indicate its
purchase order number,bill of lading number, contents by name,name of Project and
Contractor, equipment number, and approximate weight. Include complete packing list
and bill of materials with each shipment.
C. Extra Materials, Special Tools,Test Equipment, and Expendables:
1. Furnish as Required by Individual Specifications.
D. Schedule:
1. Ensure that shipment and delivery occur concurrently with shipment of associated
equipment.
2. Transfer to the Owner shall occur immediately subsequent to the Contractor's
acceptance of equipment from Supplier and any required inspections,testing, and
O&M Manuals have been delivered to and approved by the Engineer.
01 6000/ 1 of 6
•
•
E. Packaging and Shipment:
1. Package and ship extra materials and special tools to avoid damage during long term
storage in original cartons insofar as possible, or in appropriately sized,hinged-cover,
wood,plastic, or metal box.
F. Prominently Displayed on Each Package,the Following:
1. Manufacturer's part nomenclature and number, consistent with the Operation and
Maintenance Manual identification system.
2.' Applicable equipment description.
3. Quantity of parts in package.
4. Equipment Manufacturer.
G. Delivery of Materials: • •
1. Notify the Engineer upon arrival for transfer of materials.Replace extra materials and
special tools found to be damaged or otherwise inoperable'at time of transfer to the
Owner.
2. Request a minimum 7-day advance notice of shipment from the Manufacturer.Upon
receipt of the Manufacturer's advance notice of shipment,promptly notify the
Engineer of anticipated date of equipment arrival.
3. •Factory Test Results:Reviewed and accepted by the Engineer before product
shipment as required in individual Specification Sections.
1.5 , DELIVERY AND INSPECTION
A. Deliver products in accordance withaccepted current Progress Schedule and coordinate
to avoid conflict with the Work and conditions at the Site.Deliver anchor bolts and
templates sufficiently early to permit setting prior to placement of structural concrete.
B. Deliver products in undamaged condition,in the Manufacturer's original container or
packaging,with identifying labels intact and legible.Include on label, date of
manufacture and shelf life,where applicable.
C. Unload products in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions for unloading or as
specified, and record receipt of products at•Site. Promptly inspect for completeness and
evidence of damage during shipment. ,
D. Remove damaged products from the Site, and expedite delivery of identical new
undamaged products, and remedy incomplete or lost products to provide that specified, so
as not to delay progress of the Work.
1.6 HANDLING, STORAGE,AND PROTECTION
A. Handle and store products in accordance with the Manufacturer's written instructions and
in'a'manner to prevent damage. Store in approved storage yards or sheds provided in
accordance with Section 01 50 00,'TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION.
B. Provide the Manufacturer's recommended maintenance during storage,installation,and
until products are accepted for use by the Owner.
01 6000/2 of 6
C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic
inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified
conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. Keep running account of products in.
storage to facilitate inspection and to estimate progress payments for products delivered,
but not installed in the Work.
D. Store electrical,instrumentation, and control products, and equipment with bearings in
weather-tight structures maintained above 60°F.Protect electrical, instrumentation, and
control products, and insulation against moisture,water,and dust damage. Connect and
operate continuously all space heaters furnished in electrical equipment.
E. Store fabricated products above ground on blocking or skids,prevent soiling or staining,
and store loose granular materials in well-drained area on solid surface to prevent mixing
with foreign matter. Cover products that are subject to deterioration with impervious
sheet coverings;provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.
F. Store finished products that are ready for installation in dry and well-ventilated areas.Do
not subject to extreme changes in temperature or humidity.
G. After installation,provide coverings to protect products from damage due to traffic and
construction operations. Remove coverings when no longer needed.
H. Hazardous Materials:Prevent contamination of personnel, storage building, and Site.
Meet requirements of product specification,codes,and Manufacturer's instructions.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide the Manufacturer's standard materials suitable for service conditions unless
otherwise specified in the individual Specifications.
B. Where product specifications include a named Manufacturer,with or without model
number,and also include performance requirements,named Manufacturer's products
must meet the performance specifications.
C. Like items of products furnished and installed in the Work shall be end products of one
Manufacturer and of the same series or family of models to achieve standardization for
appearance, operation and maintenance, spare parts and replacement,Manufacturer's
services, and implement same or similar process instrumentation and control functions in
same or similar manner.
D. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as
specifically permitted by the Contract Documents.
E. Provide interchangeable components of the same Manufacturer,for similar
components,unless otherwise specified.
F. Equipment, Components, Systems, Sub-systems: Design and manufacture with due
regard for health and safety of operation,maintenance,and accessibility,durability of
parts,and shall comply with applicable OSHA, State, and local health and safety
regulations.
01 6000/3 of 6
G. Regulatory Requirement: Coating materials shall meet Federal, State, and Local
requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic compounds and for worker
exposure.
H. Safety Guards:Provide for all belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, or other moving
or rotary parts. Cover rotating part on all sides. Design for easy installation and removal.
Use 16-gauge or heavier; galvanized steel, aluminum coated steel,or galvanized or
aluminum coated''/2"mesh expanded steel. Provide galvanized steel accessories and
supports, including bolts. For outdoors application,prevent entrance of rain and dripping
water.
I. Authority Having Jurisdiction(AHJ):
1. Provide the Work in accordance with AHJ's adopted edition of the Virginia
Uniform Statewide Building Code. Where required by the VUSBC,material and
equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or
other organization acceptable to the VUSBC in order to provide a basis for
approval under NEC.
2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an
applied UL listing mark.
J. Equipment Finish:
1. Provide the Manufacturer's standard finish and color, except where specific color is
indicated.
2. If the Manufacturer has no standard color,provide equipment with gray finish as
approved by the Engineer.
K. Special Tools and Accessories: Furnish to the Owner,upon acceptance of equipment, all
accessories required to place each item of equipment in full operation. These accessory
• items include,but are not limited to,adequate oil and grease(as required for first
lubrication of equipment after field testing), light bulbs, fuses,hydrant wrenches,valve
keys,hand wheels, chain operators, special tools,and other spare parts as required for
maintenance.
L. Lubricant: Provide initial lubricant recommended by the equipment Manufacturer in
sufficient quantity to fill lubricant reservoirs and to replace consumption during testing,
•
startup, and operation until fmal acceptance by the Owner.
2.2 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
A. General:
1. Manufacture parts to U.S.A. standard sizes and gauges.
2. Two or more items of the same type shall be identical,by the same Manufacturer,
and interchangeable.
3. Design structural members for anticipated shock and vibratory loads.
4. Use 1/4"minimum thickness for steel that will be submerged,wholly or partially,
during normal operation.
5. Modify standard products as necessary to meet performance Specifications.
01 6000/4 of 6
[ ,
B. Lubrication System:
1. Require no more than weekly attention during continuous operation.
2. Convenient and accessible Oil drains with bronze or stainless steel valves and fill-
plugs easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform are required.
3. Locate drains to allow convenient collection of oil during oil changes without
removing equipment from its installed position.
4. Provide constant-level oilers or oil level indicators for oil lubrication systems.
5. For grease type bearings,which are not easily accessible,provide and install stainless
steel tubing;protect and extend tubing to convenient location with suitable grease
fitting.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Where Specifications call for factory testing to be witnessed by the Engineer,notify the
Engineer not less than 14 days prior to scheduled test date,unless otherwise specified.
B. Calibration Instruments: Bear the seal of a reputable laboratory certifying instrument has
been calibrated within the previous 12 months to a standard endorsed by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology(NIST).
a, C. Factory Tests:Perform in accordance with accepted test procedures,document
successful completion, and submit results to the Engineer.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect materials and equipment for signs of pitting,rust decay, or other deleterious
effects of storage.Do not install material or equipment showing such effects. Remove
damaged material or equipment from the Site and expedite delivery of identical new
material or equipment.Delays to the Work resulting from material or equipment damage
that necessitates procurement of new products will be considered delays within
Contractor's control.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices,and raceway,unless
specifically dimensioned.
B. No shimming between machined surfaces is allowed.
C. Install the Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation,unless otherwise
specified.
D. Repaint painted surfaces that are damaged prior to equipment acceptance.
E. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval
of Engineer.
F. Handle,install,connect,clean, condition,and adjust products in accordance with the
Manufacturer's instructions, and as may be specified. Retain a copy of the
Manufacturer's instruction at the Site, available for review at all times.
01 6000/5 of 6
G. For material and equipment specifically indicated or specified to be reused in the Work:
1. Use special care in removal,handling, storage,and reinstallation to assure proper
function in the completed Work. i
2. Arrange for transportation, storage, and handling of products that require offsite
storage,restoration,or renovation.Include costs for such Work in the Contract Price.
3.3 LUBRICANTS
A. Fill lubricant reservoirs and replace consumption during testing, startup, and operation
prior to acceptance of equipment by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
•
01 6000/6 of 6
I SECTION 01 7000
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
1. GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including but not limited to the following:
1. Inspection procedures
2. Warranties
3. Final cleaning
B. See Section 01 78 23 "Operating and Maintenance Data" for Operation and
Maintenance Manual requirements.
C. See Section 01 43 33 "Manufacturer's Services" for requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel.
D. See Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in the request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected(punch list),the value of items
on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise the Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties,workmanship bonds,maintenance service agreements,
final certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and
access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits,operating certificates,and
similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit the Project Record Documents, Operation and Maintenance
Manuals, final completion construction photographs and photographic negatives if
available, damage or settlement surveys,property surveys, and similar final record
information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designatedby
Owner.Label with the Manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to the Owner.Advise the
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from the Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools,and similar elements.
11. Advise the Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to the Owner's occupancy,use, operation,and
maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements,including touchup painting.
01 7000/ 1 of 4
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate
visual defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for'Substantial Completion. On
receipt of request, the Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify the
Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.The Engineer will prepare the Certificate of
Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify the Contractor of items, either on
the Contractor's list or additional items identified by the Engineer,that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection:Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements forFinal
Completion.
1.3 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit three copies of the list.Include name and identification of each space
and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing
correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by the Contractor that are outside the
limits of construction.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element,including categories for
individual walls, and equipment, and building systems.
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting the fmal inspection for determining date of
Final Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to the General
Conditions.
2. Submit a certified copy of Engineer's Substantial Completion inspection list of items
to be completed or corrected(punch list), endorsed and dated by the Engineer. The
certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise
resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of fmal, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
4. Instruct the Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training materials.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for Final Inspection for acceptance. On receipt of
request,the Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify the Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. The Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after
inspection or will notify the Contractor of construction that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
01 7000/2 of 4
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by the Manufacturer
or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces
3. EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to'
comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal, State and Local environmental and
antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Clean each surface or unit to condition equal to original plant condition.
Comply with the Manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for
certification of Final Completion for entire Project or for a portion ofProject:
a) Clean Project site,yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction
activities, of rubbish,waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b) Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c) Remove tools,construction equipment,machinery, and surplus material from the
Project site.
d) Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt free condition,
free of stains,films, and similar foreign substances.Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces.Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
e) Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts,trenches, equipment vaults,manholes,attics, and similar spaces.
f) Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
g) Remove labels that are not permanent.
h) Touch up and otherwise repair and restore maned, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
i. Do not paint over"UL" and similar labels,including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
i) Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication,paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
j) Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
k) Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers,registers,and grills.
1) Clean light fixtures, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace
burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective
and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with
requirements for new fixtures.
m) Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury
debris or excess materials on the Owner's property.Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or
01 7000/3 of 4
dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the Project site
and dispose of lawfully.
3.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner and Engineer that each unit process functions
and performs in accordance with the plans,specifications, and the Manufacture's design
criteria.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate the date, time, and duration of the performance testing
and demonstration with the Owner and Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall correct deficiencies identified by the Owner or Engineer during
performance demonstration prior to rescheduling a subsequent performance
demonstration.
D. Once the Contractor has demonstrated that each unit process functions and performs as
required,the Engineer shall advise the Contractor in writing as to the date of Substantial
Completion.
E. The punch list of items to be corrected before the date of the final completion will be
attached to the notification of substantial completion.
3.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and Engineer confirmation that each item
appearing on the punch list has been corrected.
B. Once all punch list items have been corrected,the Engineer shall issue the Certificate of
Final Completion.
END OF SECTION
01 7000/4 of 4
' ! SECTION 01 7823
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1. GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals are required for all materials and equipment
provided and installed in the Project.
B. Information included in the 0 &M Manual shall be specific to the equipment or item
installed. Data sheets that include information not pertinent to the specific equipment or
product should be omitted.Where data sheets have multiple information,all non-
pertinent information shall be edited out and the pertinent information shall be highlighted
to make it clear which information applies.
C. Drawings shall be provided which clearly indicate the item and the installation.These
should include plan views, elevation views and section views as required. Drawings
should be scaled and dimensioned. Drawings from the approved submittals should be
included and corrected if required to indicate the"as-built"condition.
D. Information shall include name plate data,serial numbers,order numbers, dates,contact
information and other pertinent information that are required to trace a piece of equipment
back to the Manufacturer.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall contain complete operation and maintenance
instructions including but not limited to the following:
1. Equipment warranties
2. Operating and maintenance data
3. Troubleshooting information and procedures
4. Lubrication information and schedules
5. Nameplate data(model numbers and serial numbers for all equipment and motors)
6. Wiring diagrams
7. Assembly drawings with part numbers
8. Approved shop drawings (plan elevation and section drawings showing all details as
equipment has been installed)
9. All appurtenances provided with equipment including(pipe,valves, fittings, supports
and brackets)
10. All electrical components, control panels, switches, floats, electronic components,
relays, sensors, starters, contactors and enclosures
11. Names,telephone numbers,and addresses of applicable subcontractors,equipment
and service suppliers and manufacturers
12. Adequate information to satisfy State regulatory agency requirements
13. Any other information concerning operation or maintenance of equipment readily
available to the Contractor and as required to repair and order parts
F. At a minimum, operating and maintenance data shall be supplied for the following
equipment:
1. Control systems
01 7823 / 1 of 2
2. Process equipment and devices
3. Pumps
4. Electrical Devices
5. Control Valves
6. Mechanical gates
7. Pipe valves and fittings
8. Instrumentation
9. Pressure measuring devices
10. Sensors
11. Unit Heaters -
12. Lighting
13. Air Handling Equipment
2. PRODUCTS—NOT USED
3. EXECUTION
3.1. Two preliminary copies of each manual shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the date of
shipment of the equipment. After review and approval by the Engineer, four final copies of each
Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be prepared and delivered to the Engineer not later
than 30 days prior to placing the equipment in operation. Copies supplied to the Engineer are in
addition to those required by the Contractor.Preliminary and final manuals, and all other parts
lists and information, shall be bound in a loose-leaf type manual,properly indexed and bound in
hard back, three-ring binder(s)with covers and spines bearing suitable identification. A table of
contents and index tabs shall be furnished for all volumes containing data for three or more items
of equipment.All material shall be marked with the Manuals.
END OF SECTION
•
01 7823 /2 of 2
SECTION 01 7836
STARTUP WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
1. GENERAL
1.1 STARTUP SERVICES
A. The Contractor shall provide startup services for all equipment and systems as required to
provide startup for a complete operating system. Starting up individual pieces of equipment
separately does not constitute startup of the system. The Contractor shall demonstrate
running of all systems and equipment together as a unit.The Contractor shall provide all
labor and materials,Manufacturers' representatives, field service technicians and
coordination between all parties as required. This 'shall include coordination between
suppliers of different equipment. All startup services shall be coordinated with the Owner,
Operator, and the Engineer and a representative of each shall be present.
B. The Contractor shall supply all expendables including but not limited to electric power,
fuel,water, lubricating oils,grease, filters and chemicals to provide all start up services.
Any expendables supplied by the Owner shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to
the Owner.
1.2 TIE-INS AND OPERATION OF OWNER'S EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall not make any tie-ins to existing systems whether in service or not
without pre-approval from the Owner and without an Owner's representative present.
B. The Contractor shall not operate any valves and/or equipment belonging to the Owner
without pre-approval from the Owner and without an Owner's representative present.
1.3 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES
A. The Contractor shall provide Warranties and Guarantees on all materials, equipment,
workmanship, installations,labor and operation items provided and/or installed by the
Contractor or any of its Subcontractors and/or suppliers.
B. Warranties and Guarantees shall be for a minimum period of one year after:
1. Being placed in service by the Owner before substantial completion of the Project.
2. Date of substantial completion of the Project.
3. Being installed after substantial completion of the Project.
C. Equipment installed does not constitute being"in service".
D. Warranties specifically stated in individual specification sections that are longer in
duration than stated above shall apply.
E. The Contractor is required to submit the Manufacturer's Written Warranty on all
equipment, devices and materials used to construct and assemble the Project.
1.4 STORAGE
A. The Contractor shall store all materials and equipment in accordance with all
manufacturers' recommendations. Contractor shall include in his submittal package the
Manufacturers' recommended long term and short term storage procedures. Storage
procedures shall extend to equipment installed but not put into service and shall continue
until project completion.
2. PRODUCTS-NOT USED
01 7836/ 1 of 2
3. EXECUTION
3.1 The Contractor shall provide a written document from the Manufacturer of all
equipment installed and/or provided by the Contractor that their equipment has been
installed correctly and all warranties and guarantees are in effect.
3.2 Startup shall be performed under typical service operating conditions.
3.3 Written documentation shall contain various check-off items as recommended by the
Manufacturer and include but not be limited to:
A. Ampere readings on all electrical motors
B. Correct lubrication
•
C. Correct operating temperatures and pressures
D. Correct vibration.levels
E. Coupling alignment
F. Correct supports
G. Correct flange loadings (equipment piping or attachments shall be disconnected from
equipment and affirmed that the piping is supported independent from equipment)
3.4 In the event one or more components fail to perform as specified or is proven defective in
service during the warranty period,the Contractor shall provide replacement parts and
labor to make all repairs without cost to the Owner.
3.5 The Warranty shall not cover any item that has been subjected to external damage,
disassembled and/or repaired by unauthorized persons, flooded or otherwise mistreated.
Items normally consumed in service such as grease, oil,v-belts,fuses,filters, seals, etc.,
shall not be warranted.
END OF SECTION
•
017836/2of2
SECTION 02 0000
SITE CONDITIONS
1. GENERAL,
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Existing utility facilities and structures are shown in accordance with the best available
information. The Engineer and/or the Owner shall not be responsible for the
completeness or accuracy thereof nor for any deductions, interpretations, or conclusions
drawn there from.Forty-eight hours in advance of work in the vicinity of existing
facilities,the Contractor shall notify"Miss Utility"by calling 800-552-7001. The
Contractor shall verify to his own satisfaction,the actual locations of existing facilities
prior to construction in their vicinity.
1. Should the Contractor,in the course of his operations, encounter any underground
utilities,the presence of which was not previously known or of a different type than
shown,he shall immediately notify the Engineer and take all precautions necessary to
support and protect the utility and maintain continuous service until said utilities can be
adjusted by the appropriate owners or other corrective measures taken.
2. Relocations by others arranged by and for the convenience of the Contractor shall be
at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for filing all requests with public utility
corporations,jurisdictional agencies, or other owners to make all adjustments to
public utility fixtures and appurtenances within or adjacent to the limits of
construction. Furnish copies of all such requests and replies to the Engineer. The
Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating his activities with said body.
Additional costs resulting from a lack of coordination between the utilities and
Contractor shall be at no additional cost to the Owner, and extension of time,
( ' therefore,will not be granted.
4. Damage caused to utilities either directly or indirectly by the Contractor shall be
repaired and the facilities restored to their original condition to the satisfaction ofthe
Engineer and the utility owner, at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Work in Vicinity of Existing Utilities
1. At least 48 hours prior to starting work in the vicinity of utility structures and
appurtenances,the Contractor shall notify"Miss Utility" as stated hereinbefore.The
Contractor, at his own expense, shall support and protect all utility structures and
appurtenances in accordance with the Contract Documents and/or the Owner's
requirements and shall take any other steps necessary to protect the structures from
disturbance and damage.
C. Access to Utilities Facilities
1. The Contractor shall at all times permit free and clear access to the various affected
facilities by personnel of the utility for the purpose of inspection,maintenance,
providing additional service requirements and the construction of new facilities.
When personnel of the utility are working within the limits of work to beperformed
by the Contractor,the Contractor will not be relieved of his responsibility for the
maintenance and protection of such facilities.
D. When local codes or laws require notification of work to agencies or departments,the
Contractor shall be responsible for providing such notification.
2. PRODUCTS—NOT USED
3. EXECUTION—NOT USED
END OF SECTION
02 0000/ 1 of 1
SECTION 03 1500
ADHESIVE ANCHORS
1. GENERAL
•
1.1 SCOPE
A. All anchor bolts embedded in concrete shall be of the epoxy adhesive type whether
specifically called out on the drawings or not,unless otherwise required by the equipment
Manufacturer.No expansion type, "red head" or any type of insert will be allowed without
approval of the Engineer. '
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 CAPSULE ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEM
A. Capsule adhesive anchor system shall consist of an all-thread rod,nut,washer and
adhesive capsule.
B. Anchor rod shall be provided with a 45-degree chisel or cut point to provide proper mixing
of the adhesive components. Anchor rods shall be manufactured to meet the following
requirements of AISI 304 or AISI 316 stainless steel meeting the mechanical requirements
of ASTM F 593. Washers of nuts shall meet the same requirements as the rods.Rods,
washers and nuts shall be furnished by the system Manufacturer for compatibility with the
system.
C. The adhesive capsules shall consist of a dual chamber foil capsule.The resin material
shall be vinyl urethane methacrylate.
D. System shall be Hilti HVA Capsule Adhesive Anchoring System or approved equal.
2.2 INJECTABLE ADHESIVE ANCHORING SYSTEM
A. Injectable adhesive anchoring system shall consist of an all-thread rod,nut,washer and a
two component epoxy adhesive.
B. Anchor rods shall be furnished with chamfered ends so that either end will accept a nut
and washer. Alternatively, anchor rods shall be furnished with a 45-degree chisel point on
one end to allow for easy insertion into the adhesive filled hole.Anchor rods shall be
manufactured to meet the following requirements of AISI 304 or AISI 316 stainless steel
meeting the mechanical requirements of ASTM F 593.Washers of nuts shall meet the
same requirements as the rods. Rods,washers and nuts shall be furnished by the system
manufacturer for compatibility with the system.
C. Injection adhesive is a hybrid adhesive consisting of a methacrylate resin,hardener, cement
and water.The system consists of adhesive refill packs, a mixing nozzle and, a dispenser.
D. Injection adhesive shall be Hilti HIT-HY 150 or HIT-ICE.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Capsule Adhesive Anchoring System
1. Adhesive anchors shall be installed in holes drilled using the specified diameter car-
bide tipped drill bit or matched tolerance diamond core bit.
2. Hole depth shall be as indicated in the manufacturer's instructions
3. Hole must be cleaned to remove dust, debris,water, oil, chemicals and any other
03 1500/ 1 of 2
foreign matter or contaminants.
4. Place the capsule or capsules in hole. Ensure the capsule is inserted in the direction
indicated on the capsule.
5. Using the setting tool on the rotary hammer drill, drive the rod in to the prescribed
depth, Stop the drill immediately after the prescribed depth is reached. Do not disturb
the anchor until the adhesive has fully cured.
6. After the adhesive has cured the anchor may be put in service. Do not over torque
the rod.
B. Injectable Adhesive Anchoring System
1. Anchor holes shall be drilled with a carbide bit. Contact the Manufacturer for drilling
holes with a diamond bit.
_ 2. Hole must be cleaned to remove dust,debris,water,oil, chemicals and any other
foreign matter or contaminants.
3. Using the dispenser with static mixer inject adhesive into hole.
4. Install rod and allow adhesive to cure.
5. After the adhesive has cured the anchor may be put in service. Do not over torque
the rod.
C. All anchors shall be installed in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions
' D. Minimum Embedment depths shall be: _
Anchor Bolt Dia. Embedment Depth
3/8" 3-1/2"
1/2" 4-1/4"
5/8" 5"
3/4" 6-5/8"
7/8" 7-1/2"
1" 8-1/4"
END OF SECTION
03 1500/2 of 2
SECTION 03 3000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1. GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork,reinforcement, concrete
materials,mixture design,placement procedures,and finishes, for Building and
Environmental Structures as follows:
1. Footings.
2. Foundation walls.
3. Slabs-on-grade.
4. Suspended slabs.
5. Concrete toppings.
6. Building frame members.
7. Building walls. •
B. Minimum compressive strengths listed in this specification shall be adhered to unless
otherwise specified on the Drawings.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement,fly ash, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica
fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials,Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication,bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths,material,grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing,bent bar
diagrams,bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections,tie spacing,hoop
spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer detailing fabrication, assembly,and support of formwork.
1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork,
shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring.
E. Samples:
1. Waterstops.
F. Welding certificates.
•
G. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating
compliance with requirements:
033000/ 1of19
1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of
concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
H. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Waterstops.
6. Curing compounds.
7. Floor and slab treatments.
8. Bonding agents.
9. Adhesives.
10. Vapor retarders.
11. Repair materials.'
I. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities
and equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand
from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source,and obtain admixtures
through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding
Code--Reinforcing Steel."
D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
I. ACI 301-99, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
F. Preinstallation Conference: conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
in Division I.
1. Before submitting design mixtures,review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a) Contractor's superintendent.
b) Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
03 3000/2 of 19
c) Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d) Concrete subcontractor.
2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
control, concrete finishes and finishing,cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures,
curing procedures,construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips,
semirigid joint fillers,forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring
procedures,vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation
tolerances, steel reinforcement installation,floor and slab flatness and levelness
measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver,store,and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and
other contaminants.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
' A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous,true,
and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints.
4 ' 1. Plywood,metal, or other approved panel materials.
2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,
and as follows:
a) High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.
b) Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better;mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.
c) Structural 1,B-B or better;mill oiled and edge sealed.
d) B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better;mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber,metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic
concrete loads without detrimental defonnation.
D. Chamfer Strips: Wood,metal,PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4-by-3/4 inch,minimum.
E. Rustication Strips: Wood,metal,PVC, or rubber strips,kerfed for ease of form removal.
F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain,or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
. G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated,removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling
of concrete on removal.
03 3000/3 of 19
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of
exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that,when removed,will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in
concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofmg
or waterproofing.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed when welding is
indicated.
C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.
D. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185,plain,fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M,Grade 60,plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length
with ends square and free of burrs.
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters,chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports
from steel wire,plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard
Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms,use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand,
and source,throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I/II, gray. Supplement with the following:
a) Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C.
b) Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 120.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal except as otherwise limited by
ACI 318-99,paragraph 3.3.2.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260:
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing more
than 0.1%chloride ions.
03 3000/4 of 19
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type D.
4. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type F.
5. High-Range,Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
C. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated,non-set-
accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a
protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
2.7 WATERSTOPS
A. Chemically Resistant Flexible Waterstops: Thermoplastic elastomer rubber waterstops for
embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints;resistant to oils,solvents,
and chemicals. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
1. Products:
a) JP Specialties,Inc.;Earth Shield TPE-Rubber.
b) Vinylex Corp.;PetroStop.
c) WESTEC Barrier Technologies, Inc.; 600 Series TPE-R.
2. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb.
3. Dimensions: 4 inches by 3/16 inch thick;nontapered.
2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic'Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C,or polyethylene sheet,ASTM D 4397,not
less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive
joint tape.
2.9 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS
A. Unpigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Factory-packaged dry combination of
portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, and plasticizing admixture when indicated..
B. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive,waterborne solution of
inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless;colorless; that
penetrates,hardens, and densities concrete surfaces when indicated.
2.10 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne,monomolecular film forming,manufactured for
application to fresh concrete.
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2,burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd.when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171,polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
D. Water: Potable.
03 3000/.5 of 19
E. Clear,Waterborne,Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,Type 1, Class B,
nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of
floor covering.
2.11 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059,Type II,non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881,two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid
curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of
grade to suit requirements, and as follows: '
1. Types IV and V, load bearing,for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete. -
C. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch-thick, galvanized+steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to,prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
D. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet,not less than 0.0336 inch thick,with
bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of
concrete or debris.
2.12 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based,polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent
floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C-150,portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined in ASTM C 219. '
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate,conditions,
and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded,washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by underlayment manufacturer. •
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C'109/C 109M. '
B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based;polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent
floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150,portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded,washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES,GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete,proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
033000/6of19
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage,by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.
2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of
cement.
D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing,admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,low
humidity,or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures when indicated.'
E. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written
instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.
2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR NON-ENVIRONMENTAL BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Slump Limit: 4 inches; 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before
adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture,plus or minus 1
inch.
3. Air Content: 6 percent,plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.
B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Slump Limit: 4 inches; 8 inches for,concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before
adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture,plus or minus I
inch.
3. Air Content: 6 percent,plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.
C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Slump Limit: 4 inches,plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
4. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended
rate,but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd.
D. Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
I. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Slump Limit: 4 inches,plus or minus 1 inch.
03 3000/7 of 19
3. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled fmished floors to exceed 3 percent.
4. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended
rate,but not less than 1'.5lb/cu.yd.
E. Concrete Toppings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at28 days.
2. Slump Limit: 4 inches,plus or minus 1 inch.
3. Air Content: Do not allow air content bf troweled finished toppings to exceed 3 percent. -
4. Synthetic,Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended
rate,but not less than 1.5 lb/cu.yd.
2.15 CONCRETE MIXES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL;AND LIQUID RETAINING
STRUCTURES
A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Slump Limit: 4 inches; 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before
adding high range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture,plus or minus 1 inch.
• 3. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery.
B. All other concrete: Proportion normal weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum compressive strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio: 0.45.
3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 540 lbs/cu.yd.
4. Slump Limit: 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch.
5. Air Content: 6 percent plus or'minus 1.5 percent at paint of delivery. Do not allow air
content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent
2.16 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
' 2.17 CONCRETE MIXING •
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure,batch,mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C'94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F,reduce mixing and delivery time from
1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes;when air temperature is above 90 deg F,reduce mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes. .
•
3. EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK .
A. Design, erect, shore,brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301,to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,until
structure can support such loads.
033000/'8of19
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities,designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as .
follows:. ,
1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
D. Construct forms right enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces.
,_. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways,reglets,recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
•
F. Set edge forms,bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support
screed strips;use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely
braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at •
inconspicuous locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I. Form openings, chases, offsets,sinkages,keyways,reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
J., Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips,wood,sawdust, dirt,
and other debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required,to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions,before placing reinforcement.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,templates,
diagrams, instructions,and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor rods,accurately located,to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges."
2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
of concrete frame at exterior walls,where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
other conditions.
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.
03 3000/9 of 19
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams,walls,columns,and similar parts of the Work that
does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less
than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits,joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 75 percent of its 28-day
design compressive strength.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
•
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split,frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces,remove fins and laitance,and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Engineer.
3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and
reshoring.
1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to
distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will
induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete: Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place,protect, and repair vapor retarders according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack
weld crossing reinforcing bars.
1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4,where indicated.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
03 3000/ 10of19
E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps. Lace overlaps with wire.
3.7 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints,unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Fonn keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs,joists,and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors,slabs,beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork,install bond break strips at
slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,foundation walls, grade
beams,and other locations,as indicated.
1. Extend bond break strips full width and depth of joint,terminating flush with finished
concrete surface,unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width bond break strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below
finished concrete surface where joint sealants,specified in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install bond break strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
D. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.
Lubricate or,asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of
joint.
3.8 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a
continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed
waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
03 3000/ 11 of 19
B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations
indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding,mechanically
fastening, andfrmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete,verify that installation of formwork,reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Notify Soils Engineer to permit inspection of sub-base a minimum of 24 hours prior to
placement of reinforcing steel and concrete. Soils Engineer shall inspect and approve all
foundation subgrades prior to placing concrete(See Division 2).
C. Notify Inspection service to permit inspection of reinforcing steel a minimum of 24 hours
prior to concrete placement. Notify Owner 24 hours prior to any scheduled concrete pour.
D. Before placing concrete,water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI
301.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix.
E. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no
new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes
of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously,provide construction joints as
indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that
have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion,limit duration of vibration to time
necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation,within limits
of construction joints,until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or
low temperatures.
03 3000/ 12 of 19
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three
successive days,maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature
range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt; or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
H. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg Fat time of placement. Chilled mixing
water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,provided water equivalent of
ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete
•
is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water,soft spots,or dry areas.
3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Forms used for formed concrete shall produce a smooth formed finish.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged
in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes
and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-
surface irregularities.
• 1. Apply to concrete surfaces to receive a rubbed finish and to be covered with a coating or
covering material applied directly to concrete.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
indicated:
1. . Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to one and one-
half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens,
rub surface with clean burlap andkeep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
2. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to view or permanently exposed to process liquids.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls,horizontal offsets,and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces,unless otherwise indicated.
3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding,restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic,texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-
floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes,brooms,or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4
inch in 1 direction.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive: concrete floor toppings; to
receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.
03 3000/ 13of19
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish and to be covered with
fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing,built-up or membrane roofing,or sand-bed terra77o.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free
of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects
that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated exposed to view or to be covered with resilient
flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane,paint, or another
thin-film-finish coating system.
2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot-long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed
anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8.inch
E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated. .
1. Immediately after trowel finishing,slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Engineer before application.
F. Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake floor hardener to
surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Uniformly apply dry-shake floor hardener at a rate of 100 lb/100 sq.ft.unless greater
amount is recommended by manufacturer.
2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake floor hardener over surface
by hand-or with mechanical spreader,and embed by power floating. Follow power
floating with a second dry-shake floor hardener application,uniformly distributing
remainder of material, and embed by power floating.
3. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound
recommended by dry-shake floor hardener manufacturer and apply immediately after
- final finishing.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS •
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures,unless otherwise indicated,
after work of other trades is in place. Mix,place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend
with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required
to complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard,dense finish with corners,intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations
as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and
equipment.
03 3000/ 14of19
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads,landings, and associated
items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-
finish concrete surfaces.
3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-
weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry,
or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft.x h before and during
finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing,
screeding,and bull floating or darbying concrete,but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period,moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
• surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308,by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a) Water.
b) Continuous water-fog spray.
c) Absorptive cover,water saturated,and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete,placed in widest practicable width,with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than
seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape.
a) Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
b) Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project..
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair
damage during curing period.
a) After curing period has elapsed,remove curing compound without damaging
concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless
manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor
covering used on Project.
3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor
treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.
03 3000/ 15 of 19
1. Remove curing compounds, sealers,oil, dirt, laitance, and'other contaminants and
complete surface repairs.
2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days'old.
3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms;rewet;
and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water;remove excess material until
surface is thy. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.
B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to
hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to
two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve,using only enough water for
handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles,honeycombs,rock pockets,fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs,rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete,but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make
edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-
coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before
bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured
in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that,when dry,patching mortar will match surrounding •
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Engineer.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs,for finish
and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test
surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness;use.a sloped template.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls,popouts,
honeycombs,rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare,mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
03 3000/ 16 of 19
•
written instructions to produce a smooth;uniform,plane,and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent;floor
elevations. Prepare,mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth,uniform,plane, and level
surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,
by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,
square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without
coarse aggregate. Place, compact,and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in same manner as'adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.
Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval,using epoxy adhesive
' and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified,above may be used, subject to Engineer's
approval.
3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
•
A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and
inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Testing
Agency shall provide certification of field and laboratory technicians for qualifications
required in ACI 318-08, Section 5.6.1.
B. Inspections:
1. Steel reinforcement placement.
2. Steel reinforcement welding. •
3. Headed bolts and studs.
4. Verification of use of required design mixture.
5. Concrete placement,including conveying and depositing.
6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172, as modified in these specifications, shall be performed according to the
following requirements:
_ 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu.yd.,but less than 25 cu.yd.,plus one set for each additional 50
cu.yd. or fraction thereof.
03 3000/ 17 of 19
a) When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for
each concrete mixture,testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected
batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at.point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231,pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for
each composite sample,but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite
sample.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. Samples shall be taken from
concrete pump discharge hose when concrete is transported by concrete pump.
a) Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two 6 x 12 cylinder specimens or two sets of
three 4 x 8 cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Test specimen size shall
be agreed upon by A/E and testing agency before construction.
b) Cast and field cure two sets of cylinder specimens for each composite sample for
formed elevated slab or beam elements.
6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39-05.
a) 6 x 12 Specimens: Test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one
set of two specimens at 28 days.
b) 4 x 8 Specimens: Test one set of three laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one
set of three specimens at 28 days.
c) A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi.
9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement,name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests.
10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump,air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Engineer. Testing and inspecting agency
03 3000/ 18of19
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Engineer.
12. Additional testing and inspecting will be at Contractor's expense.
13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply
with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
03 3000/ 19 of 19
SECTION 03 6000
GROUT
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. Provide all labor,materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required
to furnish and install grout.
2. The types of grout include the following:
a) Non-Shrink Grout: This type of grout is to be used wherever grout is shown in the
Contract Documents,unless another type is specifically referenced. Two classes of
non-shrink grout(Class I and II)and areas of application are specified herein.
b) Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout(Class III).
c) Grout Fill,Topping Grout.
d) Construction Joint Grout.
B. Application: The following is a listing of typical applications and the corresponding type of
grout,which is to be used. Unless otherwise indicated,grouts shall be provided as listed
below whether called for on the Drawings or not.
Application Type of Grout
Beam and column(1 or 2 story)base plates and Non-shrink Class II.
precast concrete bearing less than 16-inches in the
least dimension.
Column base plates and precast concrete bearing Non-shrink Class I.
(greater than 2 story or larger than 16-inches in the
least dimension).
Base plates for storage tanks and other non- Non-shrink Class I.
motorized equipment and machinery less than 30
horsepower.
Application Type of Grout
Machinery over 30 horsepower and equipment Non-shrink Class III.
under 30 horsepower but subject to severe shock
loads and high vibration.
Filling block out spaces for embedded items such Non-shrink Class II (Class I
as railing posts, gate guide frames, etc. where placement time exceeds 15
minutes).
Toppings and concrete fill less than 4-inches thick. Grout Fill,Topping Grout.
Toppings and concrete fill greater than 4-inches Class "A" Concrete in accordance
thick. with Section 03 3000, Cast-In-
Place Concrete.
03 6000/ 1 of 8
All anchor bolts and reinforcing steel set in grout. Refer to Section 03 1500,
Adhesive Anchors.
Any application not listed above,where grout is Non-shrink Class I,unless noted
called for on the Drawings. otherwise.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below:
1. American Concrete Institute, (ACI).
a) ACI 211.1,Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete.
b) ACI 301, Specification for Structural Concrete(Includes ASTM Standards referred to
herein).
2. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM).
a) ASTM C 33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates.
b) ASTM C 109,Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(using 2 in. or 50 mm. Cube Specimens).
c) ASTM C 150, Specification for Portland Cement.
d) ASTM C 230, Specification for Flow Table for use in Tests of Hydraulic Cement.
e) ASTM C 531,Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings.
f) ASTM C 579,Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant
Mortars, Grouts,Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes.
g) ASTM C 827,Test Method for Early Volume Change of Cementations Mixtures.
h) ASTM C 882,Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with
Concrete.
i) ASTM C 937, Specification for Grout Fluidifier for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete.
j) ASTM C 939,Text Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete
(Flow Cone Method).
k) ASTM C 1107, Specification for Packaged Dry,Hydraulic-Cement Grout(Non-
shrink).
1) ASTM C 1181, Test Method for Compressive Creep of Chemical-Resistant Polymer
Machinery Grouts.
m) ASTM D 696,Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Tests:
1. Compression test specimens will be taken during construction from the first placement of
each type of grout, and at intervals thereafter as selected by the ENGINEER to ensure
continued compliance with these Specifications. The specimens will be made by the
ENGINEER or its representative.
2. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for non-shrink grout will be performed as
specified in ASTM C 109 at intervals during construction as selected by the ENGINEER.
A set of three specimens will be made for testing at seven days, 28 days,and each
additional time period as appropriate.
3. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for epoxy grout will be performed as
specified in ASTM C 579,Method B, at intervals during construction as selected by the
036000/2of8
ENGINEER. A set of three specimens will be made for testing at seven days, and each
earlier time period as appropriate.
4. The cost of all laboratory tests on grout will be borne by the OWNER,but
CONTRACTOR shall assist the ENGINEER in obtaining specimens for testing.
However,CONTRACTOR shall be charged for the cost of any additional tests and
investigation on Work performed which does not conform to the requirements of the
Specifications. CONTRACTOR shall supply all materials necessary for fabricating the
test specimens.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following:
1. For Grout Fill, copies of grout design mix and laboratory test reports for grout strength
tests.
B. Reports and Certificates, submit for approval the following:
1. For proprietary materials, submit copies of manufacturer's certification of compliance
with the specified properties for Class I,II,and III grouts.
2. Submit certified testing lab reports for ASTM C 1107, Grade B and Grade C (as revised
herein)requirements for Class I and II grouts tested at a fluid consistency for
temperatures of 45,73.4,90°F with a pot life of 30 minutes at fluid consistency.
3. Submit certification that materials conform to the Specifications requirements for
nonproprietary m
4. Submit certificationsaterials.that all grouts used on the project are free of chlorides or other
chemicals causing corrosion.
5. Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for all proprietary materials.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials: Grout materials from manufacturers shall be delivered in unopened
containers and shall bear intact manufacturer's labels.
B. Storage of Materials: Grout materials shall be stored in a dry shelter and shall be protected
from moisture.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUTS
A. General: Non-shrink grout shall be a prepackaged,inorganic,flow able,non-gas-liberating,
non-metallic, cement-based grout requiring only the addition of water. Manufacturer's
instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container in which the materials are
packaged. The specific formulation for each class of non-shrink grout specified herein shall
be,that recommended by the manufacturer for the application.
B. Class I,Non-Shrink Grout:
1. Class I,non-shrink grouts shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7,000
psi. This grout is for precision grouting and where water-tightness and non-shrink
reliability in both plastic and hardened states are critical. Refer to areas of application as
specified herein.
03 6000/3 of 8
2. Shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107 Grade C and B (as modified below)when
tested using the amount of water required to achieve the following properties:
a) Fluid consistency(20 to 30 seconds) in accordance with ASTM C 939.
b) At temperatures of 45, 73.4, and 95°F.
3. The length change from placement to time of final set shall not have a shrinkage greater
than the amount of expansion measured at 3 or 14 days. The expansion at 3 or 14 days
shall not exceed the 28-day expansion.
4. The non-shrink property is not based on a chemically generated gas or gypsum
expansion.
5. Fluid grout shall pass through the flow cone,with a continuous flow, one hour after
mixing.
6. Products and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a) Masterflow 928, as manufactured by Master Builders,Inc.
b) Five Star Grout, as manufactured by Five Star Products, Inc.
c) Hi-Flow Grout, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company.
d) Or equal.
C. Class II Non-Shrink Grout:
1. Class II,non-shrink grouts shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7,000
psi. This grout is for general purpose grouting applications as specified herein.
2. Shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107 and the following requirements when
tested using the amount of water required to achieve the following properties:
a) Flowable consistency(140 percent flow on ASTM C 230, five drops in 30 seconds).
b) Fluid working time of at least 15 minutes.
c) Flowable for at least 30 minutes.
3. The grout when tested shall not bleed at maximum allowed water.
4. The non-shrink property is not based on a chemically generated gas or gypsum
expansion.
5. Products and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a) Set Grout, as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc.
b) NBEC Grout, as manufactured by Five Star Products,Inc.
c) NS Grout, as manufactured by the Euclid Chemical Company.
d) Or equal.
D. Class III Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout:
1. Epoxy grout shall be a pourable,non-shrink, 100 percent solids system. The epoxy grout
system shall have three components:resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate, all
premeasured and prepackaged. The resin component shall not contain any non-reactive
diluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether(BGE) or other highly volatile and
hazardous reactive diluents are not acceptable. Variation of component ratios is not
permitted,unless specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's
instructions shall be printed on each container in which the materials are packaged. The
following properties shall be attained with the minimum quantity of aggregate allowed by
the manufacturer.
2. Products and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a) Euco High Strength Grout,as manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company.
b) Sikadur 42 Grout Pak,as manufactured by Sika Corporation.
03 6000/4 of 8
c) Five Star Epoxy Grout,as manufactured by Five Star Products,Incorporated.
d) Or equal.
3. The vertical volume change at all times before hardening shall be between 0.0 percent
shrinkage and 4.0 percent expansion when measured according to ASTM C 827
(modified for epoxy grouts by using an indicator ball with a specific gravity between 0.9
and 1.1). Alternately,epoxy grouts which maintain an effective bearing area of not less
than 95 percent are acceptable.
4. The length change after hardening shall be negligible(less than 0.0006 in/in) and the
coefficient of thermal expansion shall be less than 0.00003 in/in/F when tested in
accordance to the requirements of ASTM C 531.
5. The compressive creep at one year shall be negligible(less than .001 in/in)when tested
under a 400-psi constant load at 140°F in accordance to the requirements of ASTM C
1181.
6. The seven-day compressive strength shall be a minimum of 14,000 psi when tested in
accordance to the requirements of ASTM C 579.
7. The grout shall be capable of maintaining at least a flow able consistency for a minimum
of 30 minutes at 70°F.
8. The shear bond strength to Portland cement concrete shall be greater than the shear
strength of the concrete when tested in accordance to the requirements of ASTM C 882.
9. The effective bearing area shall be a minimum of 95 percent.
E. Grout Fill,Topping Grout:
1. Grout for topping of slabs and concrete fill for built up surfaces of tank, channel,and
basin bottoms shall be composed of cement,fine aggregate, coarse aggregate,water, and
admixtures proportioned and mixed as specified herein.
2. Topping grout and concrete fill shall contain a minimum of 564 pounds of cement per
cubic yard with a maximum water cement ratio of 0.45. Where concrete fill is thicker
than 4-inches, Class "A" concrete may be used when accepted by the ENGINEER.
3. Coarse aggregate shall be graded as follows:
U.S. STANDARD PERCENT BY
SIEVE SIZE WEIGHT PASSING •
1/2-inch 100
3/8-inch 90 to 100 •
No. 4 20 to 55
No. 8 5 to 30
No. 16 0•to 10
No. 30 0
4. Final mix design shall be as determined by trial mix design under supervision of the
approved testing laboratory.
5. Strength: Minimum compressive strength of grout fill at the end of 28 days shall be 4000
psi.
F. Construction Joint Grout:
03 6000/5 of 8
1. Construction Joint Grout approximates Class "A" concrete,with aggregate coarser than
I/2-inch removed. The mix shall be designed as flow able with a high mortar content. It
is intended to be placed over construction joints and mixed with Class "A" concrete. The
mix requirements are as follows:
a) Compressive Strength: 4,500-psi minimum at 28 days.
b) Maximum Water Cement Ratio: 0.45 by weight.
c) Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33,No. 8 size.
d) Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, approximately 60 percent by weight of total aggregate.
e) Air Content: 8±1 percent.
f) Minimum Cement Content: 752 pounds per cubic yard.
G. Requirements for Grout Fill and Construction Joint Grout:
1. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods,using
materials to be employed on the Project for grout required. Comply with ACI 211.1 and
report to ENGINEER the following data:
• a) Complete identification of aggregate source of supply.
b) Tests of aggregates for compliance with specified requirements.
c) Scale weight of each aggregate.
d) Absorbed water in each aggregate.
e) Brand,type and composition of cement.
t) Brand,type and amount of each admixture.
g) Amounts of water used in trial mixes.
h) Proportions of each material per cubic yard.
i) Gross weight and yield per cubic yard of trial mixtures.
j) Measured slump.
k) Measured air content.
i. Compressive strength developed at seven days and 28 days,from not less than
three test specimens cast for each seven day and 28-day test, and for each design
mix.
2. Submit written reports to ENGINEER of proposed mix of grout at least 30 days prior to
start of the Work. Do not begin grout production until mixes have been approved by
ENGINEER.
3. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select grout
proportions,prepare test specimens and conduct strength tests as specified in ACI 301,
Section 4 Proportioning. However,mixes need not be designed for greater than 125
percent of the specified strength,regardless of the standard deviation of the production
facility.
4. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select grout
proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301, Section 4.
5. Admixtures: Use air-entraining admixture in all grout. Use amounts of admixtures as
recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of
placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality
control. Do not use admixtures which have not been incorporated and tested in the
accepted design mix,unless otherwise authorized in writing by ENGINEER.
2.2 CURING MATERIALS
A. Curing materials shall conform to the requirements by the manufacturer of prepackaged
grouts.
03 6000/6 of 8
2.3 CONSISTENCY
A. The consistency of grouts shall be that necessary to completely fill the space to be grouted for
the particular application. Dry pack consistency is such that the grout is plastic and moldable,
but will not flow. Where "dry pack" is called for in the Contract Documents, it shall mean a
grout of that consistency;the type of grout to be used shall be as specified herein for the
particular application.
B. The slump for topping grout and grout fill shall be adjusted to match placement and finishing
conditions,but shall not exceed 4-inches.
C. The slump for Construction Joint Grout shall be 7± 1-inches
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION •
A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the substrate and conditions under which grout is to be placed
and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the
Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
ENGINEER.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: •
1. Place grout as shown and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If
manufacturer's instructions conflict with these Specifications, do not proceed until
ENGINEER provides clarification.
2. Manufacturers of proprietary products shall make available upon 72 hours'notification
the services of a qualified,full time employee to aid in assuring proper use of the product
under job conditions.
3. Placing grout shall conform to temperature and weather limitations required by the
manufacturer.
4. Grout shall be cured following manufacturer's instructions for prepackaged grout and the
requirements for grout fill and topping grout.
B. Columns,Beams and Equipment Bases:
1. Epoxy grout: After shimming equipment to proper grade, securely tighten anchor bolts.
Properly form around the base plates, allowing sufficient room around the edges for
placing the grout. Adequate depth between the bottom of the base plate and the top of
concrete base must be provided to assure that the void is completely filled with the epoxy
grout.
2. Non-shrink,non-metallic grout: After shimming columns,beams and equipment to
proper grade,securely tighten anchor bolts. Properly form around the base plates
allowing sufficient room around the edges for placing the grout. Adequate depth between
the bottom of the base plate and the top of concrete base must be provided to assure that
the void is completely filled with the non-shrink,non-metallic grout.
C. Handrails and Railings:
1. After posts have been properly inserted into the holes or sleeves, fill the annular space
between posts and sleeve with the non-shrink,non-metallic grout. Bevel grout at
juncture with post so that moisture flows away from post.
036000/7of8
D. Construction Joints:
1. Place a 6-inch minimum thick layer of Construction Joint Grout over the contact surface
of the old concrete at the interface of horizontal construction joints.
E. Topping Grout:
1. All mechanical, electrical, and finish work shall be completed prior to placement of
topping grout. The base slab shall be given a roughened textured surface by sandblasting
or hydroblasting exposing the aggregates to ensure bonding to the base slab.
2. The minimum thickness of grout topping shall be 1-inch.
3. The base slab shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted prior to placing topping and fill.
No topping concrete shall be placed until the slab is complete free from standing pools or
ponds of water. A.thin coat of neat Type II cement slurry shall be broomed into the
surface of the slab and topping or fill concrete shall be placed while the slurry is still wet.
The topping and fill shall be compacted by rolling or tamping,brought to established
grade, and floated. Grouted fill for tank and basin bottoms where scraping mechanisms
are to be installed shall be screeded by blades attached to the revolving mechanism of the
equipment in accordance with the procedures as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer after the grout is brought to the established grade.
4. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the
slab to the top,for the full width of the placement.
5. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to detect high and low spots which shall
be immediately eliminated. When the topping has hardened sufficiently,it shall be steel
troweled to a smooth surface free from pinholes and other imperfections. An approved
type of mechanical trowel may be used as an assist in this operation,but the last pass over
the surface shall be by hand troweling. During finishing,no water, dry cement or mixture
of dry cement and sand shall be applied to the surface.
6. Cure and protect the grout topping as specified by the manufacturer.
F. Grout Fill:
1. All mechanical, electrical, and finish work shall be completed prior to placement of grout
fill.
2. The minimum thickness of grout fill shall be 1-inch. Where the finished surface of grout
fill is to form an intersecting angle of less than 45 degrees with the concrete surface it is
to be placed against, a key shall be formed in the concrete surface at the intersection
point. The key shall be a minimum of 3 1/2-inches wide by 1 1/2-inches deep.
3. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to verify that the surface slopes uniformly
to drain and to detect high and low spots which shall be immediately eliminated. When
the grout fill has hardened sufficiently, it shall be steel troweled to a smooth surface free
from pinholes and other imperfections. During finishing, no water, dry cement, or
mixture of dry cement and sand shall be applied to the surface.
END OF SECTION
•
•
036000/8of8
SECTION 09 9100
PAINTING
1. GENERAL
— , 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope
1. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals required
to provide a protective coating system listed herein and not otherwise excluded.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and
surfaces such as pipe,valves, fittings, equipment,miscellaneous metals, ceilings,walls,
floors, doors,frames,transoms,roof fans, and all other work required to be painted unless
otherwise specified herein or on the drawings. The omission of minor items in the
schedule of Work shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligation to include such items
where they come within the general intent of the specification as stated herein.
B. The following items will not be painted:
1. Any code requiring labels, such as Underwriters'Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or
any equipment identification,performance rating,name or nomenclature plates.
2. Any moving parts of operating units,mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve
and damper operators,linkages,sensing devices,motor and fan shafts,unless other-
- wise indicated.
3. Aluminum handrails,walkways,windows,louvers,and grating unless otherwise
specified herein.
4. Signs and nameplates.
5. Finish hardware.
• 6. Galvanized angles,tubes,piping,pipe supports and appurtenances.
7. Stainless steel angles tubes,piping,pipe supports and appurtenances.
8. Products with polished chrome, aluminum,nickel, or stainless steel finish.
9. Plastic switch plates and receptacle plates
10. Flexible couplings,lubricated bearing surfaces,insulation,and metal and plastic pipe
interior.
11. Aluminum items (Aluminum embedded items shall be coated where embedded in
concrete for corrosion protection).
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NSF 61
B. ANSI/AWWA D102
C. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council.
D. Metal Ladder Manufacturer's Association - Specification for Ladders and Scaffolds.
•
E. UL Requirement for Ladders and Scaffolds.
F. ICRI-International Concrete Repair Institute, Sterling,Virginia.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
I 099100/ 1of6
•
A. Product Data
1. The Contractor shall submit complete product data and information regarding all
coatings proposed for use in accordance with this specification.The Contractor's
submittal must include a certification that the submitted material describes exactly the
materials to be provided or a list of deviations from the specifications with an ex-
planation of each deviation..
B. Samples:
1. Samples of each finish and color shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
before any work is started.
2. Such samples when approved in writing shall constitute a standard, as to color and
finish only,for acceptance or rejection of the finish work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: -
1. Manufacturers regularly engaged in the Manufacture of the coatings as specified
herein and who can demonstrate coatings of the specified product in actual service
for a period of not less than 10 years will be considered as acceptable Manufacturers.
B. Workmanship shall be performed by skilled workmen thoroughly trained in necessary
crafts and completely familiar with specific requirements and methods specified herein.
C. All materials shall be produced by a single Manufacturer. Total paint system shall be
from one Manufacturer and no cross coating allowed between primers and finish coats.
D. Component Compatibility
1. Contractor and coating Manufacturer shall ensure compatibility of top coats with the
Manufacturer's primers and top-coats and existing coating systems.
E. VOC Requirements
1. Submit the Manufacturer's certification that paints and coatings comply with Federal,
State, and Local,whichever is more stringent,requirements for VOC (Volatile Or-
ganic Compounds).
1.6 WARRANTY
A. All equipment and workmanship furnished under this contract shall be guaranteed to be
free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one(1)year from substan-
tial completion.Any such defects,which occur within the stipulated guaranty period,
shall be repaired,replaced, or made good at no cost to the Owner.
1.7 DELIVERY,HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all material to site in original, new, unopened containers, labeled and bearing the
Manufacturer's name and stock number, product and brand name, contents by volume for
major constituents, instructions for mixing and reducing, and application instruction.
B. Provide adequate storage facilities designed exclusively for the purpose of paint storage
and mixing. Facility area shall be located away from open flames,be well ventilated, and
be capable of maintaining ambient storage temperature of no less than 45 degrees F.
C. Paint,coatings,reducing agents, and other solvents must be stored in original containers
until opened;if not resealable,then must be transferred to UL approved safety containers. -
Provide proper ventilation,personal protection, and fire protection for storage and use of
099100/2of6
same.
D. Comply with requirements set forth by Occupational Safety and Health Act, OSHA,for
storage and use of painting materials and equipment.
1.8 EXTRA STOCK
A. Upon completion of work,the Contractor will provide the Owner with at least one gallon
of each type and color of product used.
B. Containers shall be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. General: Paint products/systems specified are not intended to limit competition,but to es-
tablish a standard of quality desired. Equivalent systems from other Manufacturers may be
used upon approval by the Engineer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All materials specified herein are manufactured by the Sherwin Williams Company or the
Tnemec Company,Inc.
B. Equivalent materials of other Manufacturers may be substituted on approval of the
Engineer. Request for substitution shall include the Manufacturer's literature for each
product giving name, generic type, descriptive information,performance and test data, and
evidence of satisfactory past performance.No request for substitution shall be considered
that would decrease film thickness and/or number of coats or.offer a change in the generic
type of coating specified.
2.3 Coating Schedule for Shop Primed Surfaces
A. Interior and Exterior Moderate Service
1. Surface Preparation:
Remove all oil and grease from surface by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP-1.
Hand tool clean per SSPC-SP-2 or power tool clean per SP-3 where shop prime coat
has been damaged.
2. Primer: B50WZ0001 -Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer, dry film thickness-3-4
mils. For touch up of shop primed surfaces.
3. Second Coat: B54W00101 Industrial Enamel, dry film thickness—2-4 mils
4. Third Coat: B54W00101 Industrial Enamel, dry film thickness—2-4 mils
B. Interior and Exterior Harsh Service
1. Surface Preparation:
Remove all oil and grease from surface by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP-1.
Hand tool clean per SSPC-SP-2 or power tool clean per SP-3 where shop prime coat
has been damaged.
2. Primer: B5OWZ0001 -Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer, dry film thickness-3-4
mils. For touch up of shop primed surfaces.
3. Second Coat:Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure epoxy dry film thickness—4-6 mils
4. Third Coat: Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure epoxy thy film thickness—4-6 mils
09.9100/3 of 6
2.4 Coating Schedule for Bare Steel and Ductile Iron Surfaces
A. Surface Preparation:
Remove all oil and grease from surface by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP-1.
hand tool clean per SSPC-SP-2,power tool clean per SP-3 or sand blast per SP-6.
B. Primer: B50WZ0001 -Kern Kromik Universal Metal Primer, thy film thickness- 3-4
mils.
C. Second and Third coats shall be as per above for shop primed surfaces.
2.5 Coating Schedule for Concrete Floor
A. Surface Preparation:
SSPC-SP13,ICRI CSP5.
•
B. First Coat: Series 280 Tneme-Glaze, dry film thickness- 8 mils.
C. Second Coat: Series 280 Tneme-Glaze, dry film thickness—8 mils.
2.6 Coating Schedule for Interior Wallboard and Ceiling
A. Surface Preparation:
' Surface must be clean and thy.
B. First Coat: Series 151 Elasto-Grip, dry film thickness- 1 mils.
C. Second Coat: Series 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat, dry film thickness—4 mils.
D. Third Coat: Series 113 H.B. Tnenie-Tufcoat, dry film thickness—4 mils.
2.7 Coating Schedule for High Heat Coating
A. Surface Preparation:
SSPC-SPIO near-white blast cleaning. '
B. First Coat: Series 39-1261 Silicone Aluminum, dry film thickness— 1.0-1.5 mils.
C. Second Coat: Series 39-1261 Silicone Aluminum, dry film thickness— 1.0-1.5 mils.
•
•
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Thoroughly examine surface scheduled to be painted prior to commencing work. Report in
writing to the Owner's Representative any condition that may affect proper application and
overall performance of coating system. Do not proceed With work until such conditions
•
have been corrected. Commencing with work indicates acceptance of existing conditions
and for responsibility for performance of applied coating.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Extreme diligence shall be taken to ensure that vehicles, equipment,hardware, fixtures,
materials,etc., are protected against paint spillage, overspray, etc. Such damages shall be
corrected at no expense to the Owner.
B. Surfaces not to be coated shall be masked,removed, or otherwise covered to protect
against cleaning and coating application procedures and weather.Drop cloths shall be
used to protect floor,walls,machinery, equipment, and previously coated surfaces.
C. Exercise care in erecting,bracing,handling,and dismantling staging and scaffolding,to
099100/4of6
avoid scratching or damaging walls,floors, equipment,etc.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with theManufacturer's
instructions for each substrate condition.
B. Surface preparation for field touch up,of ferrous metals shop primed shall be as follows:
1. Immersion Remove all oil, grease,dirt,dust, and foreign matter from the surface.
Weld slag,weld spatter,rough edges, and sharp corners of weld seams shall be ground
smooth. All rusted, abraded, and unpainted areas shall be blast cleaned to a Near White
Finish as outlined in Steel Structures Painting Council's Specification SP 10.
2. Non-Immersion Remove all oil,grease,dirt,dust,and foreign matter from the surface.
Follow cleaning with Steel Structures Painting Council's Specification SP 3 Power Tool
cleaning.
C. Galvanized metals requiring paint(only as directed by Owner's Representative) shall be
cleaned by removing all oil, grease, dirt, dust, and foreign matter by solvent cleaning in
accordance with SSPC SP I prior to applying any finish. Etch all galvanized surfaces with
Great Lakes Laboratories Clean N Etch, (800) 888-1105 or equal.
. D. Concrete and concrete masonry surfaces shall be cleaned and free of oils,laitance, dust,dirt,
loose mortar, and excess moisture. Structural cracks and defects shall be repaired. All
surfaces must be completely dry prior to applying any coatings/paint.
E. Gypsum board(or drywall) surfaces shall be dry, flat, and free of dust, dirt, grease,oil,
powdery residue,wax, soap,and other contaminants.
3.4 TOUCH UP OF SHOP APPLIED COATINGS
•
A. All shop applied coatings with Manufacturer's standard paint and in non-immersion ser-
• vice, shall be touched up with the Manufacturer's coating.
3.5 APPLICATION
A. No paint shall be applied when surrounding air temperature,as measured in the shade,is
below 45 degrees F.No paint shall be applied when the temperature of the surface to be
painted is below 40 degrees F.Paint shall not be applied to wet or damp surfaces, and shall
not be applied in rain, snow,fog or mist,or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%. Paint
shall not be applied when the substrate temperature is within 5 degrees of the dew point.
The Paint Manufacturer's temperature guidelines must be followed.
B. No paint shall be applied when it is expected that the relative humidity will exceed 85%or
that the air temperature will drop below 45 degrees F within 4 hours after the application
of the paint.
C. Maintain proper ventilation in area of work to alleviate volatile solvents evaporatingfrom
coating materials.
D. All ingredients in any container of the coating materials shall be thoroughly mixed and
shall be agitated often enough during application to keep the pigment suspended.
E. Should thinning be required use only the amounts specified by the coating Manufacturer.
F. Application of coating shall be by brush,roller,mitt, or spray and in accordance with
Manufacturer's recommendations.All material shall be evenly applied to form a smooth,
continuous,unbroken coating. Drips,runs,sags, or pinholes shall not be acceptable.
099100/5of6
G. Provide proper application equipment, including ladders,scaffolding,masking materials,
and tools toperform work. Ladders and scaffolding shall meet or exceed UL require-
ments and Metal Ladder Manufacturer's Association.
H. 'Second coat shall be tinted slightly to differentiate between the second coat and third(fi-
nal) coat.
I. Meet all requirements set forth by Occupational Safety and Health Act; OSHA, for con-
fined space. ,
3.6 SYSTEM INSPECTION AND TESTING '
A. After application of each coating in the specified system and its surface has cured,meas-
ure its thickness with a properly calibrated Nordson.Microtest Dry Film Thickness Gauge,
or equivalent.Follow standard method for measurement of dry paint thickness with
magnetic gauges as outlined in Steel Structures Painting Council's SSPC PA2.
B. Make as many determinations as needed to ensure the specified thickness values in each '
typical area. To all surfaces having less dry film thickness than specified, apply'additional
coat(s)at no extra cost to Owner to bring thickness up to specifications.
C. Structural metals in immersion service that receive a protective coating system shall be
checked with a non-destructive holiday detector that shall not exceed 67 1/2 volts. All
• pinholes or defects shall be repaired in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed rec-
ommendations and then retested.
D. Masonry, drywall,or other non metallic surfaces shall be continuously checked with wet
film thickness gauges during application to ensure proper dry film thickness will be attained.
Also, square feet coverage needs to be monitored to verify proper coverage rates.
E. Painting contractor shall permit the Owner's Representative and/or paint&coating Man-
ufacturer(as requested by owner)to inspect his work for conformance to this specifica-
tion. Owner reserves the right to reject all work that does not comply with this specifica-
tion.
3.7 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion,the painting Contractor shall clean up and remove from site all surplus
materials,tools,appliances, empty cans,cartons,and rubbish resulting from painting
work. Site shall be left in neat, orderly condition.
B. Remove all protective drop cloths and masking from surfaces not being painted.Provide
touch up around same areas as directed by the Owner's Representative.
C. Remove all misplaced paint splatters or drippings resulting from this Work.
•
•
END OF SECTION
099100/6of6
SECTION 09 9713
STEEL TANK COATINGS
1. GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all necessary equipment, labor,materials,and tools to paint the interior and exterior
of the water storage tank(s),including all exposed piping within the tank structure in
accordance with the Project Drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The latest revisions of the following standard specifications shall govern the work with
regards to materials, design, construction,inspection, and testing to the extent specified or as
indicated in this specification.
1. NSF International
a) ANSI/NSF 61,Drinking Water system Component—Health Effects (current edition)
2. American Water Works Association
a) ANSI/AWWA D102, Standard for Coating Steel Water Storage Tanks,2006 Edition
3. The Society for Protective Coatings
a) SSPC PA-1 Shop,Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel,April 1,2000 Edition
(Editorial November 1,2004)
b) SSPC PA-2 Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages,May 1,
2004 Edition(Editorial September 1, 2009)
c) SSPC SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning, January 1,2007 Edition
d) SSPC SP-7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning, January 1,2007 Edition
e) SSPC SP-10,Near-White Blast Cleaning,January 1, 2007 Edition
4. Manufacturer's product data sheets
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Paint manufacturer Product Data Sheet and MSDS for each paint product
B. Cleaning and Painting Instruction document with outline of surface preparation,paint system
(including dry film thickness) and sterilization procedure.
C. Samples of each finish and color shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before any
work is started. Such samples when approved in writing shall constitute a standard, as to
color and finish only,for acceptance or rejection of the finish work.
1.4 QUALITY
A. Meet the requirements of AWWA D 102
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Materials shall be delivered to the job to the project site in manufacturer's original,unopened
containers.
B. Paint Materials shall be stored in an enclosed well-ventilated area in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
1.6 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. Containment of the structure is at the discretion of the Contractor. Contractor is responsible
for preventing any contamination of surrounding system components and/or damage to
surrounding structures or property due to airborne paint particles or spent abrasive.
099713 / 1of4
1.7 WARRANTY
A. All work shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of one (1)year from the date of
substantial completion against faulty design, defective materials,and faulty workmanship.
Substantial completion shall be the date the tank is placed', or available to be placed, in
service.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All paint materials are to be from a single manufacturer.Thinners are to be as recommended
by the paint manufacturer unless otherwise approved. •
B. The paint and paint products specified are manufactured by Tnemec Company or approved
equal. Substitutions can be made with written approval if an alternative paint system is
presented and specified.
• C. All painting and thinning materials shall be in manufacturer's original containers with labels
intact. The labels shall show the manufacturer's name, type and color of paint, and the
manufacturer's stock and batch number. Only newly purchased paint bought specifically for
this project shall be used.
D. All materials shall be stored in an environment and in such a manner as to comply with all of
the provisions of manufacturer's product data sheets. -
E. Coatings used on potable water bearing surfaces shall be certified to ANSI/NSF 61.
2.2 INTERIOR WET SURFACE PAINT SYSTEM
A. Shop Painting
1. Surface Preparation. Remove all oil and grease from the surface before blast cleaning.
All surfaces shall be abrasive blast cleaned to a NEAR-WHITE finish in accordance with
SSPC SP-10.
2. Shop Primer. Immediately after abrasive blasting and before any rusting occurs,apply
one-coat of polyamidoamine epoxy Tnemec Pota-Pox Plus V140-1255 (Beige) or Pota-
Pox Plus;Fast Cure V 140E-1255 (Beige)to a DFT range of 4.0-6.0 mils.
B. Field Painting • -
1. Surface Preparation. After placement and prior to field touch-up priming, all surfaces
shall be cleaned to remove all surface contamination including oil, grease,dust, dirt and
foreign matter.Weld slag,weld spatter, and other sharp or rough projections shall be
removed.All rusted, abraded and unpainted areas shall be abrasive blast cleaned to a
NEAR-WHITE finish in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
2. Field Touch-Up. Spot prime with polyamide epoxy Tnemec Pota-Pox 20-1255 (Beige)
or Pota-Pox Fast Cure FC20-1255 (Beige) to a DFT range of 4.0-6.0 mils.
• 3. Field Finish Coat. Apply one-coat of polyamide epoxy Tnemec Pota-Pox 20-15BL
(Tank White)or Pota Pox Fast Cure FC20-15BL(Tank White)to a DFT range of 4.0-6.0
mils.
a) The total DFT range of the three-coat paint system is 8.0-12.0 mils.
2.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEM
A. Shop Painting
099713/2of4
1. Surface Preparation. Remove all oil and grease from the surface prior to blast cleaning.
All surfaces shall be abrasive blast cleaned to a COMMERCIAL finish in accordance
with SSPC SP-6.
2. Shop Primer. Immediately after abrasive blasting and before any rusting occurs, apply
one-coat of zinc-rich urethane Tnemec Hydro-Zinc 94-H20 to a DFT of 2.5-3.5 mils.
B. Field Painting
1.• Surface Preparation. After erection and prior to field touch-up priming,all surfaces shall
be cleaned to remove all surface contamination including oil, grease, dust, dirt and
foreign matter.Weld slag,weld spatter, and other sharp or rough projections shall be
removed.All rusted,abraded and unpainted areas shall be abrasive blast cleaned to a
COMMERCIAL finish in accordance with SSPC SP-6.
2. Field Touch-Up. Spot prime with zinc-rich urethane Tnemec Hydro-Zinc 94-H20 or
Hydro-Zinc 91-H20 to a DFT range of 2.5-3.5 mils.
3. Field Intermediate Coat. Apply one complete coat of polyamidoamine epoxy Tnemec
HB Epoxoline II Series N69 or Series HB Epoxoline II Fast Cure Series N69F to a DFT
range of 2.0-3.0 mils.
4. Field Finish Coat. Apply one complete coat of alphatic acrylic polyurethane Tnemec
Endura-Shield Series 73 to a DFT range of 2.0-3.0 mils.
5. The total DFT range of the three-coat paint system is 6.5-9.5 mils.
3. EXECUTION
•
3.1 APPLICATION CONDITIONS
A. Adhere to all ambient temperature and surface temperature restrictions described in the paint
manufacturer's product data sheets.
B. No paint shall be applied when the temperature of the surface to be painted is below the
minimum specified by the paint manufacturer.
C. No paint shall be applied to wet, damp or frost coated surfaces or when the relative humidity
exceeds 85%.
3.2 MIXING AND THINNING
A. Paint shall be thoroughly mixed in the proportions stated in the manufacturer's product data
sheets. The pot life of the mixed materials shall not exceed the manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Paint shall be factory mixed to proper consistency and viscosity for application without
thinning. In no case shall the wet film thickness of applied paint be reduced,by the addition
of thinner or otherwise,below the thickness recommended by the paint manufacturer.
3.3 SURFACE.PREPARATION
A. All surfaces must be dry and free from dirt, dust, sand, mud, oil, grease,rust, and mill scale
before applying paint to the surface.
B. All steel surfaces shall be prepared for painting by abrasive blast cleaning as defined in the
materials section of this specification.
099713 /3of4
C. All steel surfaces cleaned on a particular day shall be painted:within the same day and before
evidence of rusting or discoloration.Any abrasive blast cleaned'surfaces that develop rusting •
due to.climatic conditions or prolong exposure shall be re-blasted prior to painting.
D. All interior wet surfaces that have been prime coated in the shop shall be brush off blasted in
' accordance with SSPC SP-7 prior to receiving any field applied paint.
3.4 PAINT APPLICATION
A. Paint shall be applied in a neat manner with finish surfaces free of runs, sags,ridges,heavy
laps, and brush marks.
B. Prior to applying the first field spray coat to the interior wet area, all weld seams,rough areas,
bolt heads,bold threads,nuts;corners,'and difficult to coat areas,shall be stripe coated.
Striping shall be by either brush or roller using a 5%thinned primer material.
3.5 CURING AND VENTILATION
A. Adhere to all curing provisions of the paint manufacturer's product data sheets.No paint shall
be applied over paint that has not had sufficient time to properly cure. ,
B. The interior of the tank shall be ventilated during painting and drying periods using fans or
air compressors of sufficient number and size in relation to the tank size. During drying
periods,the hatches at the top and bottom of the tank,shall remain open.
3.6 INSPECTION TESTING AND RECORDS
•
A. In the event the owner elects to conduct inspections of the tank painting,the paint
subcontractor shall provide the owner or his representative reasonable access to the various
areas for inspection. The owner is to be notified 24 hours prior to blasting or painting.
B. The painting subcontractor shall take and record dry film thickness readings on each coat of
• paint. Dry film thickness (DFT)shall be measured in accordance with SSPC PA-2. •
C. The painting subcontractor shall prepare a daily record of ambient air temperatures, surface
temperatures on surfaces to be worked on, and relative humidity readings. The record shall
also indicate any general weather conditions for the day.All.data is to be recorded at the
following times:
1. The beginning of the workday. •
2. The time blasting or painting is started, and a minimum of every four hours thereafter. •
3. The completion of work each day.
D. The paint manufacturer shall visit the site to confirm that the paint is being properly prepared
and applied to the tank surface.
E. A one-year anniversary inspection in accordance with AWWA D 102 is required for this
project.
,END OF SECTION
• 099713 /4of4
SECTION 221123.13
DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
1. GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
•
A. Variable Speed Pumping Package
B. Pump Control Panel
C. Variable Frequency Drive
D. Sensor Transmitters'
E. Sequence of Operation
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AWWA-American Water Works Association
B. ANSI-American National Standards Institute
C. ASTM-American Standards for Testing Materials
D. HI-Hydraulic Institute
E. ASME-American Society of Mechanical Engineers
F. UL-Underwriters Laboratories
G. ISO -International Standards Organization
H. NEMA-National Electrical Manufacturers Association
I. ETL-Electrical Testing Laboratories
J. CSA-Canadian Standards Association
K. NEC-National Electrical Code
L. IEC-International Electrotechnical Commission
M. NSF-NSF Intemational
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall include the following:
1. System summary sheet
2. Sequence of operation
3. Shop drawing indicating dimensions,required clearances and location and size of each
field connection
4. Power and control wiring diagrams
5. System profile analysis including variable speed pump curves and system curve. The
analysis shall also include pump,motor,pump efficiencies,horsepower and kilowatt/hour
consumption.
6. Pump data sheet
B. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted.
•
22 1123.13/ 1 of 14
1.4 Quality Assurance
A. The manufacturer shall assume"Unit Responsibility" for the complete pumping package.
Unit responsibility shall be defined as responsibility for interface and successful operation of
all system components supplied by the pumping system manufacturer.
B. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years' experience in the design and construction
of packaged pumping systems, and over 10 years in active design/production of centrifugal
pumps.
C. The pump(s) shall be hydrostatically tested by the manufacturer.in accordance with Hydraulic
Institute standards at a minimum of 350 PSI prior to shipment.
•
D. Production performance testing shall be conducted by the manufacturer on each pump unit.
Head at three operating points will be measured to verify performance: 70%of BEP,BEP,
and 120% of BEP. •
E. Bidders shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to packaged pumping
systems. Any deviations from this specification shall be bid as a voluntary alternate clearly
defined in writing. If no exceptions are noted,the supplier or contractor shall be bound by
these specifications.
F. A copy of manufacturer's certificate of insurance shall be made available upon request
. showing as a minimum, general liability coverage of$1,000,000, and an excess liability
coverage of$10,000,000.
G. The pumping package shall be certified by an approved independent testing and certification
organization as being compliant with the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61 for potable drinking
water and NSF-61 Annex G for low lead content.
H. Manufacturer shall be listed by UL as a manufacturer of packaged pumping systems under
UL/cUL category QCZJ.
I. Manufacturer shall be listed by UL as a manufacturer of control panels under UL 508A.
J. The manufacturer's production facility shall be certified by an approved independent testing
and certification organization as being compliant with the requirements of NSF/ANSI 61 and
NSF-61 Annex G. The manufacturing facility shall be subjected to periodic inspections and
audits.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
•
A. Subject to compliance with these specifications,the following manufacturers shall be
acceptable:
1. Goulds Water Technology.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
B. Furnish and install as shown on the plans two multistage centrifugal pump units,Model e-SV.
as manufactured by Goulds Water Technology.All pump units shall be from one
manufacturer and provided complete including electric motor drive.Pump motors shall be 30
hp,460 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz.
C. Manufacturer shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as a manufacturer of packaged
pumping systems.
221123.13/2of14
D. The entire pumping package shall be NSF/ANSI/NSF-61 certified for potable drinking water
and NSF-61 Annex G for a wetted area,weighted average lead content=0.25%.
E. The control system shall include, as a minimum,the programmable logic station controller,
variable frequency drives, a manifold mounted 4-20mA pressure transducer and any
additional equipment as specified or as required to properly execute the sequence of
operation.
F. Pumps shall be protected from thermal accumulation via individual thermal relief
mechanisms.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Pump Logic Controller
1. It is the intent of these specifications to secure a completely prewired automatic control
panel utilizing a PLC/Operator Interface/Transducer based control system for the
operation of the booster pumps and well pumps. The automatic pump control system
shall be constructed to NEMA 12 standards.All pilot devices,breaker interlocks and
operator interfaces shall be located on the outer door of the enclosure for ease of
operation.
2. The electrical characteristics for the motor control center shall be 480V/3-phase/60Hz.
Enclosure shall be UL Listed for use as service entrance equipment.
3. The pump logic controller shall be microcomputer based and hold its software in flash
memory. On-line field modified data entries, such as stage point, alternation, serial
communication, and sensor setup, as a minimum, shall be stored in non-volatile memory
with capability to prevent accidental loss of data due to voltage surge or spike.In the
•
event of a complete power outage, all factory preset or last saved data values remain
stored and available for recall by the operator.
•
4. The variable speed pump controller shall function to a proven program that safeguards
the pumps/system against damaging hydraulic conditions including:
a) Motor Overload
b) Pump Flow Surges
c) Hunting
d) Integral Curve Limiting Feature: The pump logic controller shall automatically
protect the system from overload through frequency/current optimization.
5. The pump logic controller shall be capable of accepting individual analog inputs from
zone sensor/transmitters as indicated on the plans. Analog input resolution shall be 12-bit
minimum, and the controller shall scan each analog input a minimum of once every 100
milliseconds.Use of a multiplexer for multiple sensor inputs is not acceptable. All
sensor/transmitter inputs shall be individually wired to the pump logic controller for
continuous scan and comparison function.All analog inputs shall be provided with
current limit circuitry to provide short circuit protection and safeguard against incorrect
wiring of sensors.
6. Hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional-integral-derivative control
function.The proportional,integral and derivative values shall be user adjustable over an
infinite range.The scan and compare rate that selects the command set point and process
variable signal shall be continuous and automatically set for optimum performance. Each
sensor shall be scanned at least once every100 milliseconds.
7. The pump logic controller shall be self-prompting.All messages shall be displayed in
plain English. The following features shall be provided: Multi-fault memory and recall
221123.13/3of14
On-screen help functions LED pilot lights and switches Soft-touch membrane keypad
switches
8. The variable speed pumping controller shall be provided with a user-friendly operator
interface complete with membrane switches and numeric keypad. Display shall be no less
than four lines with each line capable of displaying up to twenty characters. The human
interface panel shall display the following values:
a) Pump On/Off Status
b) Pump% Speed
c) Individual Alarm Conditions
d) Troubleshooting Diagnostics
e) User-adjustable parameters such as alternation,PID, set points, etc.
9. The system shall utilize the QuickStart feature to simplify programming and startup of
the pump control system. The feature shall be specific to pump systems and use suitable
pump terminology.
10. A data-logging feature shall be provided as a function of the pump logic controller. The
Alarm log shall include the last 40 alarms with date/time stamp.The Pump data log shall
display individual pump run timers and pump cycle counters.A Signal log shall be
provided to display the maximum and minimum values with date/time stamps for each
process variable.
•
11. The Logic controller shall incorporate a Flash Memory for saving and reloading
customized settings. These field determined values shall be permanently retained in Flash
memory for automatic reloading of the site-specific setup values in the event of data
corruption due to external disturbances. The Controller shall also employ a sensor setup
copy feature.
12. The pump controller shall be capable of communicating by both hard-wired and serial
communications. The following communication features shall be provided in'hard wired'
form via 4-20ma analog output signals and digital input/outputs:
a) Remote system start/stop(dry contact pressure switch supplied by Contractor)
b) General Alarm(qty. 1,relay output from pump controller)
c) Process variable or VFD speed(qty. 1 4-20ma analog output supplied by pump
controller)
d) System on/off status(qty. 1 relay output supplied by pump controller)
13. The following communication features shall be provided via an onboard RS-485 port
utilizing Modicon Modbus protocol:
a) All sensor process variables
b) Individual zone set points
c) Individual pump failure
d) Individual pump on/off status
e) Individual VFD on/off status
f) VFD speed
g) Individual VFD Failure
h) Individual sensor failure
14. The pump logic controller enclosure shall be NEMA 1 with NEMA 4 rated operator
interface.
15. Dynamic Flow Loss Compensation: To maximize energy efficiency,the controller shall
be capable of using algorithms to simulate operational control,as if using a sensor
located at the critical fixture, such that the friction loss associated with varying flow
221123.13/4of14
through the system is compensated for by corresponding set point adjustments. As flow
increases,the pressure losses due to friction in the system will increase accordingly.This
feature will allow controller to modify the set-point in real time based on the speed
changes to compensate system friction loss. The use of a flow meter is not required. The
controller will log the last 40 real time setpoint changes.
B. Centripro Aquavar Variable Frequency Drive
1. Description
a) This specification covers complete variable frequency drives(VFDs) designated on
the drawing schedules to be variable speed.All standard and optional features shall
be included within the VFD panel. The Centripro Aquavar VFD hardware shall be
manufactured by Danfoss or approved equal.
b) The VFD shall be rated NEMA 1 or NEMA 12 as required on the schedule.The VFD
shall have been evaluated by UL and found acceptable for mounting in a plenum or
other air handling compartment.Manufacturer shall supply a copy of the UL plenum
evaluation upon request.
c) The VFD shall be tested to UL 508C. The appropriate UL label shall be applied.
When the VFDs are to be located in Canada, C-UL certifications shall apply.VFD
shall be manufactured in ISO 9001,2000 certified facilities.
d) The VFD shall be CE marked and conform to the European Union ElectroMagnetic
Compatibility directive.
e) The VFD shall be UL listed for a short circuit current rating of 100 kA and labeled
with this rating.
•
f) The VFD manufacturer shall supply the VFD and all necessary controls as herein
specified.
2. Components
. a) The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into an
adjustable frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three-phase AC motors.
The motor current shall closely approximate a sine wave.Motor voltage shall be
varied with frequency to maintain desired motor magnetization current suitable for
the driven load and to eliminate the need for motor de-rating.
b) When properly sized, the VFD shall allow the motor to produce full rated power at
rated motor voltage, current, and speed without using the motor's service factor.
VFDs utilizing sine weighted/coded modulation (with or without 3rd harmonic
injection)must provide data verifying that the motors will not draw more than full
load current during full load and full speed operation.
c) The VFD shall include an input full-wave bridge rectifier and maintain a fundamental
(displacement)power factor near unity regardless of speed or load.
d) The VFD shall have a dual 5% impedance DC link reactor on the positive and
negative rails of the DC bus to minimize power line harmonics and protect the VFD
from power line transients. The chokes shall be non-saturating. Swinging chokes that
do not provide full harmonic filtering throughout the entire load range are not
acceptable. VFDs with saturating(non-linear)DC link reactors shall require an
additional 3%AC line reactor to provide acceptable harmonic performance at full
load,where harmonic performance is most critical.
e) The VFD's full load output current rating shall meet or exceed NEC Table 430-150.
The VFD shall be able to provide full rated output current continuously, 110%of
rated current for 60 seconds and 120%of rated torque for up to 0.5 second while
starting.
221123.13 /5of14
f) A programmable automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided
standard in the VFD.This feature shall automatically and continuously monitor the
motor's speed and load to adjust the applied voltage to maximize energy savings.
g) Output power circuit switching shall be able to be accomplished without interlocks or
damage to the VFD.
h) An automatic motor adaptation algorithm shall measure motor stator resistance and
reactance to optimize performance and efficiency. It shall not be necessary to run the
motor or de-couple the motor from the load to perform the test.
i) Galvanic isolation shall be provided between the VFD's power circuitry and control
• circuitry to ensure operator safety and to protect connected electronic control
equipment from damage caused by voltage spikes, current surges, and ground loop
currents.VFDs not including either galvanic or optical isolation on both analog I/O
• and discrete digital I/O shall include additional isolation modules.
j) VFD shall minimize the audible motor noise through the use of an adjustable carrier
frequency. The carrier frequency shall be automatically adjusted to optimize motor
and VFD operation while reducing motor noise.VFDs with fixed carrier frequency
are not acceptable.
3. Protective features
a) A minimum of Class 20 I2t electronic motor overload protection for single motor
applications shall be provided. Overload protection shall automatically compensate
for changes in motor speed.
b) Protection against input transients, loss of AC line phase,output short circuit, output
ground fault, over voltage,under voltage,VFD over temperature and motor over
temperature. The VFD shall display all faults in plain language. Codes are not
acceptable.
c) Protect VFD from input phase loss. The VFD should be able to protect itself from
damage and indicate the phase loss condition. During an input phase loss condition,
the VFD shall be able to be programmed to either trip off while displaying an alarm,
issue a warning while running at reduced output capacity, or issue a warning while
running at full commanded speed. This function is independent of which input power
phase is lost.
d) Protect from under voltage. The VFD shall provide full rated output with an input
voltage as low as 90% of the nominal. The VFD will continue to operate with
reduced output,without faulting,with an input voltage as low as 70%of the nominal
voltage.
e) Protect from over voltage.The VFD shall continue to operate without faulting with a
momentary input voltage as high as 130%of the nominal voltage.
f) The VFD shall incorporate a programmable motor preheat feature to keep the motor
warm and prevent condensation build up in the motor when it is stopped in a damp
environment by providing the motor stator with a controlled level of current.
• .g) VFD shall include a "signal loss detection" algorithm with adjustable time delay to
sense the loss of an analog input signal. It shall also include a programmable time
delay to eliminate nuisance signal loss indications. The functions after detection shall
.be programmable.
h) VFD shall function normally when the keypad is removed while the VFD is running.
No warnings or alarms shall be issued as a result of removing the keypad.
i) VFD shall catch a rotating motor operating forward or reverse up to full speed
without VFD fault or component damage.
j) Selectable over-voltage control shall be provided to protect the drive from power
regenerated by the motor while maintaining control of the driven load.
221123.13/6of14
k) VFD shall include current sensors on all three output phases to accurately measure
motor current,protect the VFD from output short circuits, output ground faults, and
act as a motor overload.If an output phase loss is detected, the VFD will trip off and
identify which of the output phases is low or lost.
1) If the temperature of the VFD's heat sink rises to 80°C,the VFD shall automatically
reduce its carrier frequency to reduce the heat sink temperature. It shall also be
• possible to program the VFD so that it reduces its output current limit value if the
VFD's temperature becomes too high.
m) In order to ensure operation during periods of overload,it must be possible to
program the VFD to automatically reduce its output current to a programmed value
during periods of excessive load.This allows the VFD to continue to run the load
without tripping.
n) The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fan(s)for quiet operation,
minimized losses, and increased fan life.At low loads or low ambient temperatures,
the fan(s)maybe off even when the VFD is running.
o) The VFD shall store in memory the last 10 alarms. A description of the alarm, and
the date and time of the alarm shall be recorded.
p) When used with a pumping system,the VFD shall be able to detect no-flow
situations, dry pump conditions, and operation off the end of the pump curve. It shall
be programmable to take appropriate protective action when one of the above
situations is detected.
4. Interior Features
a) Hand, Off and Auto keys shall be provided to start and stop the VFD and determine
the source of the speed reference. It shall be possible to either disable these keys or
password protect them from undesired operation.
b) There shall be an "Info"key on the keypad. The Info key shall include "on-line"
context sensitive assistance for programming and troubleshooting.
c) The VFD shall be programmable to provide a digital output signal to indicate
whether the VFD is in Hand or Auto mode.
d) Password protected keypad with alphanumeric,graphical,backlit display can be
remotely mounted. Two levels of password protection shall be provided to guard
against unauthorized parameter changes.
e) All VFDs shall have the same customer interface. The keypad and display shall be
identical and interchangeable for all sizes of VFDs.
f) To set up multiple VFDs,it shall be possible to upload all setup parameters to the
VFD's keypad,place that keypad on all other VFDs in turn and download the setup
parameters to each VFD. To facilitate setting up VFDs of various sizes,it shall be
possible to download from the keypad only size independent parameters.Keypad
shall provide visual indication of copy status.,
g) Display shall be programmable to communicate in multiple languages including
English, Spanish and French.
h) A red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER-ON light shall
be provided. These indications shall be visible both on the keypad and on the VFD
when the keypad is removed. •
i) A quick setup menu with factory preset typical HVAC parameters shall be provided
on the VFD.The VFD shall also have individual Fan,Pump, and Compressor menus
specifically designed to facilitate start-up of these applications.
j) The VFD's PID controller shall be able to actively adjust its setpoint based on flow.
This allows the VFD to compensate for a pressure feedback sensor which is located
near the output of the pump rather than out in the controlled system.
221123.13 /7of14
k) Floating point control interface shall be provided to increase/decrease speed in
response to contact closures.
1) Five simultaneous meter displays shall be available. They shall include at a
minimum, frequency, motor current,motor voltage,VFD output power,VFD output
energy,VFD temperature in degrees, actual process variable and set point among
others.
m) Programmable Sleep Mode shall be able to stop the VFD. When its output frequency
drops below set "sleep" level for a specified time,when an external contact
commands that the VFD go into Sleep Mode, or when the VFD detects a no-flow
situation, the VFD may be programmed to stop. When the VFD's speed is being
controlled by its PID controller, it shall be possible to program a"wake-up" feedback
value that will cause the VFD to start.To avoid excessive starting and stopping of the
driven equipment, it shall be possible to program a minimum run time before sleep
mode can be initiated and a minimum sleep time for the VFD.
n) A run permissive circuit shall be provided to accept a "system ready" signal to ensure
that the VFD does not start until dampers or other auxiliary equipment are in the
proper state for VFD operation. The run permissive circuit shall also be capable of
initiating an output"run request" signal to indicate to the external equipment that the
VFD has received a request to run.
o) VFD shall be programmable to display feedback signals in appropriate units, such as
inches of water column(in-wg),pressure per square inch (psi).or temperature(°F).
p) VFD shall be programmable to sense the loss of load. The VFD shall be
programmable to signal this condition via a keypad warning,relay output and/or over
the serial communications bus. To ensure against nuisance indications, this feature
must be based on motor torque,not current, and must include a proof timer to keep
brief periods of no load from falsely triggering this indication.
5. Standard Inputs and Outputs
a) Four dedicated,programmable digital inputs shall be provided for interfacing with
the systems control and safety interlock circuitry.
b) Two terminals shall be programmable to act either as digital outputs or additional
digital inputs.
c) Two programmable relay outputs,Form C 240 V AC, 2 A, shall be provided for
remote indication of VFD status.
i. Each relay shall have an adjustable on delay/off delay time.
d) Two programmable analog inputs shall be provided that can be either direct-or-
reverse acting.
i. Each shall be independently selectable to be used with either an analog
voltage or current signal.
ii. The maximum and minimum range of each shall be able to be independently
scalable from 0 to 10 V do and 0 to 20 mA.
iii. A programmable low-pass filter for either or both of the analog inputs must
be included to compensate for noise.
iv. The VFD shall provide front panel meter displays programmable to show the
value of each analog input signal for system set-up and troubleshooting,
e) One programmable analog current output(0/4 to 20 mA)shall be provided for
indication of VFD status. This output shall be programmable to show the reference or
feedback signal supplied to the VFD and for VFD output frequency, current and
power.It shall be possible to scale the minimum and maximum values of this output.
1) It shall be possible through serial bus communications to read the status of all analog
and digital inputs of the VFD.
22 1123.13/8 of 14
g) It shall be possible to command all digital and analog output through the serial
communication bus.
h) Optional Control and Monitoring Inputs and Outputs
i. It shall be possible to add optional modules to the VFD in the field to expand
its analog and digital inputs and outputs.
ii. These modules shall use rigid connectors to plug into the VFD's control card.
iii. The VFD shall automatically recognize the option module after it is powered
up.There shall be no need to manually configure the module.
iv. Modules may include such items as:
v. Additional digital outputs, including relay outputs
vi. Additional digital inputs
vii. Additional analog outputs
viii. Additional analog inputs,including Ni or Pt temperature sensor inputs
i) It shall be possible through serial bus communications to control the status of all
optional analog and digital outputs of the VFD.
j) A real-time clock shall be an integral part of the VFD.
k) It shall be possible to use this to display the current date and time on the VFD's
display.
1) Ten programmable time periods,with individually selectable ON and OFF functions
shall be available. The clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop
functions, constant speeds,PID parameter setpoints and output relays. Is shall be
possible to program unique events that occur only during normal work days, others
that occur only on non-work days, and others that occur on specific days or dates.
The manufacturer shall provide free PC-based software to set up the calendar for this
schedule.
m) All VFD faults shall be time stamped to aid troubleshooting.
n) It shall be possible to program maintenance reminders based on date and time,VFD
running hours, or VFD operating hours.
o) The real-time clock shall be able to time and date stamp all faults recorded in the
VFD fault log.
p) The VFD shall be able to store load profile data to assist in analyzing the system
demand and energy consumption over time.
q) The VFD shall include a sequential logic controller to provide advanced control
interface capabilities. This shall include:
i. Comparators for comparing VFD analog values to programmed trigger
values
ii. Logic operators to combine up to three logic expressions using Boolean
algebra
iii. Delay timers •
iv. A 20-step programmable structure
r) The VFD shall include a Cascade Controller which allows the VFD to operate in
closed loop set point(PID) control mode one motor at a controlled speed and control
the operation of 3 additional constant speed motor starters.
6. Serial Communications
a) The VFD shall include a standard EIA-485 communications port and capabilities to
be connected to the following serial communication protocols at no additional cost
and without a need to install any additional hardware or software in the VFD:
i. Modbus RTU
22 1123.13 /9 of 14
b) The VFD shall have provisions for an optional24V DC back-up power interface to
power the VFD's control card. This is to allow the VFD to continue to communicate
to the building automation system even if power to the VFD is lost.
•
7. Adjustments
a) The VFD shall have a manually adjustable carrier frequency that can be adjusted in
0.5 kHz increments to allow the user to select the desired operating characteristics.
The VFD shall also be programmable to automatically reduce its carrier frequency to
avoid tripping due to thermal loading.
b) Four independent setups shall be provided.
c) Four preset speeds per setup shall be provided for a total of 16.
d) Each setup shall have two prograinmable ramp up and ramp down times.
Acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable over the range from 1 to
3,600 seconds.
e) Each setup shall be programmable for a unique current limit value. If the output
current from the VFD reaches this value,any further attempt to increase the current
produced by the VFD will cause the VFD to reduce its output frequency to reduce the
load on the VFD. If desired,it shall be possible to program a timer which will cause
the VFD to trip off after a programmed time period.
f) If the VFD trips on one of the,following conditions,the VFD shall be programmable
for automatic or manual reset: external interlock,under-voltage,over-voltage, current
limit,over temperature, and VFD overload.
g) The number of restart attempts shall be selectable from 0 through 20 or infinitely and
the time between attempts shall be adjustable from 0 through 600 seconds.
h) An automatic "start delay" may be selected from 0 to 120 seconds. During this delay
time,the VFD shall be programmable to either apply no voltage to the motor or apply
a DC braking current if desired.
i) Four programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from
operating the load at a speed that causes vibration in the driven equipment shall be
provided. Semi-automatic setting of lockout ranges shall simplify the set-up.
8. Service Conditions
a) Ambient temperature, continuous,full speed,full load operation:
i. -10 to 45°C,(14 to 113°F)through 125 HP @ 460 and 600 volt,through 60
HP @ 208 volt
ii. -10 to 40°C(14 to 104°F) 150 HP and larger
b) 0 to 95%relative humidity,non-condensing.
c) Elevation to 3,300 feet without derating.
d) AC line voltage variation,-10 to+10% of nominal with full output.
e) No side clearance shall be required for cooling.
f) All power and control wiring shall be done from the bottom.
g) All VFDs shall be plenum rated.
9. Quality Assurance
a) To ensure quality,the complete VFD shall be tested by the manufacturer. The VFD
shall drive a motor connected to a dynamometer at full load and speed and shall be
cycled during the automated test procedure.
10. VFD shall utilize a full wave rectifier to convert three phase AC to a fixed DC voltage.
Power factor shall remain above 0.98 regardless of speed or load. VFD's employing
power factor correction capacitors shall not be acceptable.
221123.13/ I0of14
11. An internal line.reactor(5%impedance) shall be provided to lower harmonic'distortion
of the power line and to increase the fundamental power factor. ,
12. The,VFD shall be suitable for elevations to 3300 feet above'sea level without derating.
Maximum operating ambient temperature rating shall not be greater than 104°F.VFD
shall be suitable for operation in environments up to'95%non-condensing humidity.
13. The VFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain English via an
alphanumeric display:
a) Output Frequency •
b) Output Voltage
c) Motor Current
d) Kilowatts per hour
e) Fault identification with text
f) Percent torque
g) Percent power
h) RPM
14. The VFD shall have the ability to automatically restart after an over-current,overvoltage,
under-voltage, or loss of input signal protective trip. The number of restart attempts,trial
time,and time between reset attempts shall be programmable.
15. Three(3)programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from
operating the load continuously at an unstable speed.,
16. Operator Control Panel (Keypad)
a) Each VFD shall be equipped with a front mounted operator control panel (keypad)
consisting of a backlit,alphanumeric,graphic display and a keypad with keys for
Start/Stop, Local/Remote,Up/Down and Help. Two(2) Softkeys will be provided
which change functionality depending upon the position within the parameter
hierarchy or state of panel.
b) All parameter names, fault messages,warnings and other information shall be
displayed in complete English words or Standard English abbreviations to allow the
ter to understand what is being displayed without the use of a manual or cross-
, reference table.
c) The Display shall have contrast adjustment provisions to optimize viewing at any
angle.
d) The control panel shall provide a real time clock for time stamping events and fault
conditions.
e) The control panel shall include a feature for uploading parameter settings to control
panel memory and downloading from the control panel to the same Drive or to
another Drive.
0 All Drives throughout the entire power range shall have the same customer interface,
including digital display, and keypad,regardless of horsepower rating.
g) The keypad shall be able to be installed or removed from the drive while it is
powered,capable of remote mounting, and shall have its own non-volatile memory.
17. Protective Functions
a) For each-programmed warning and fault protection function,the Drive shall display a
message in complete English words or Standard English abbreviations. The three(3)
most recent fault messages along with time, current, speed,voltage,frequency and DI
Status shall be stored in the Drives fault history. The last ten (10) fault names shall
be stored in Drive memory.
22 1123.13/ 11 of 14
b) The Drive shall include internal MOV's for phase to phase and phase to ground line
voltage transient protection.
c) Output short circuit withstand rating and ground fault protection rated for 100,000
AIC shall be provided per UL508C without relying on line fuses. Motor phase loss
protection shall be provided..
d) The Drive shall provide electronic motor overload protection qualified per UL508C.
e) Protection shall be provided for AC line or DC bus overvoltage at 130% of maximum
rated or under voltage at 65% of min.rated and input phase loss.
f) A power loss ride through feature will allow the Drive to remain fully operational
after losing power as long as kinetic energy can be recovered from the rotating mass
of the motor and load.
18. Integrated Drive Disconnects
a) 3-Phase:Individual integrated drive fused disconnects shall have exterior operators.
b) Single-Phase: Individual integrated drive disconnects shall have exterior operators
and external fusing.
19. Variable Speed System Sequence of Operation
a) The system shall consist of a pump logic controller with multi-pump parallel
operation control, duty-standby pump selection, automatic alternation and automatic
transfer to the standby pump upon pump/VFD failure.
b) The pumping system shall start upon the closure of the dry contact when the pump
logic controller Mode of Operation is in REMOTE.
c) When the pump logic controller mode in LOCAL,the pumping system shall operate
automatically.
d) Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump logic controller,
indicative of process variable condition.
e) When the set point is satisfied by the process variable, the pump speed shall remain
constant at the optimum energy consumption level.
f) When the process variable exceeds the allowable drift from the set point for a set
time,the pump controller shall automatically start the next lag pump and continue in •
this fashion as necessary to satisfy system demand. To maintain system set point the
controller will operate the pumps synchronously or sequentially to ensure maximum
energy conservation.
g) As demand is satisfied,the controller shall automatically stop lag pumps as necessary
to conserve energy.
h) In the event of a pump failure or a VFD fault,the pump logic controller automatically
initiates a timed sequence of operation to start the redundant pump/VFD set in the --
variable speed mode.
i) In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable signal
shall be removed from the scan/compare program. The redundant zone
sensor/transmitters,if available, shall remain in the scan/compare program for
control.
. j) PUMP or VFD hard fault shall be flashed continuously on the display on the operator
interface of the pump logic controller until the fault has been corrected and the
controller has been manually reset.
k) When the system is satisfied, the pump controller shall shut down the single running
lead pump without the need of a flow sensor/switch or hydropneumatic tank and
enter energy saving/no flow shutdown mode.
20. Electrical
221123.13/ 12of14 '
a) Pump Logic Controller Enclosure.Main station disconnect shall have a through door
operator and shall be sized as shown in the technical data sheet. Individual integrated
fusible drive disconnects shall have exterior operators and shall be sized as shown in
the technical data sheet. Station disconnect panel shall be housed in a NEMA 1
enclosure with integral latches. The control enclosure shall be constructed of 14-
gauge steel and the back plate assembly shall be constructed of 14-gauge steel.
b) Controls and Enclosure. The control panel with controls shall be built in accordance
with NEC,and shall comply with UL standards.Pump station manufacturer shall be
authorized under UL508A to manufacture its own control panels. All equipment and
wiring shall be mounted within the enclosure and each device shall be Jabeled with
proper identification. All adjustments and maintenance shall be accessible from the
front of the control enclosure.A complete wiring circuit diagram and legend with
terminals,components, and wiring completely identified shall be provided. Main
disconnect shall be interlocked with door.
c) Station shall have a short circuit current rating(SCCR) OF'5000A•
21. Booster Pump (Pressure)Control
a) Pressure transducer shall be utilized for providing primary pressure signals for the
booster pump control logic.Pressure transducer shall be a solid-state bonded strain
gage type with an accuracy of<,±0.5%BFSL and constructed of 316 stainless steel.
Transducer shall be rated for a pressure of 300 psi and shall provide gauge pressure
output,rather than an absolute.Pressure transducer constructed of plastic is not
acceptable.Pressure transducer shall be 4-20mA analog type with 10-28 VDC supply
range shall utilize a packard type connector to prevent moisture intrusion and include
surge protection against voltage spikes.
b) Pressure transducer will be backed up using(4)Allen Bradley 836-C7A pressure
switches mounted on a common plate and piped to the common discharge manifold.
These units will be utilized if the control signal is lost.
22: Well Pump (Level) Control
a) The level control system shall be a submersible pressure transducer type, and will
start and stop the pumps in response to the liquid level in the ground storage tanks.
b) The primary elements of the control system shall be a 4-20mA submersible pressure
transducer. This unit will be backed up by(4) snap-action type float switches also
located in the ground storage tank.
c) Submersible Pressure Transducer-The submersible pressure transducer will provide
a 4-20mA signal which varies in direct response to the ground storage level.Full
Scale accuracy will Be+/-1%". Operating temperature will be-40 to+120 Deg. F.
The transducer housing will be machined from 316 SS with a 2 'A" diameter Stainless
steel diaphragm clamped between two rings to provide a watertight pressure seal.
Submersible pressure transducer shall be complete with sufficient wet location listed
wiring to provide continuous `un-spliced' connection from device to motor control
center.
d) A silicon oil-fill liquid behind the diaphragm will transmit the sensed pressure to a
solid state isolated piezo-resistive pressure transducer which will convert the sensed
pressure to a 4-20mA signal.
•
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
221123.13/ 13of14
B. The contractor shall align the pump and motor shafts to within the manufacturer's
recommended tolerances prior to system start-up..
C. Power wiring,as required,shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor. All wiring
shall be performed per manufacturer's instructions and applicable state, federal and local
codes.
•
D. Control wiring for remote mounted switches and sensor/transmitters shall be the j
responsibility of the controls contractor. All wiring shall be.performed per manufacturer's
instructions and applicable state, federal and local codes.
'3.2 DEMONSTRATION/TRAINING '
A. The system manufacturer's factory qualified representative shall provide start-up of the
packaged pumping system. This start-up shall include verification of proper installation,
system initiation, adjustment and fine tuning. Start-up shall not be considered complete until
the sequence of operation, including all alarms,has been sufficiently demonstrated to the
Owner or Owner's designated representative.This job site visit shall occur only after all
hook-ups,tie-ins, and terminations have been completed and signed-off on the manufacturer's
start-up request form.-
B. ,The system manufacturer's factory qualified representative shall provide on-site training for
owner's personnel. This training shall fully cover maintenance and operation of all system '
components.
C. The system manufacturer must have an optional complete pressure booster training program
available for owner's personnel. The training sessions'shall take place at the manufacturer's
facility and cover all aspects of pressure booster system design, service and operation.
3.3 , WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall warrant the water pumping system to be free of defects in material
and workmanship for one year(12 months) from date of authorized start-up,not to exceed
eighteen(18) months from date of manufacturer's invoice. Complete terms and conditions _
will be provided upon request.
3.4 START-UP SERVICE
A. Owner start up assistance shall be provided by a manufacturer qualified representative and
shall be a minimum of one 8-hour day.When discharge piping,electrical connections, and
electrical inspection have been completed,the'pump station representative shall be contacted
for start up.A minimum two-week notice shall be given to the Manufacturer Representative,
Owner, Operator,and Engineer prior to scheduled startup date.During startup,the complete
pumping system shall be given a running test of normal start and stop, and fully loaded
operating conditions.During this test, each pump shall demonstrate its ability to operate
without undue vibration, or overheating, and shall demonstrate its general fitness for service.
All defects shall be corrected, and adjustments shall be made to the pumping station for
satisfactory operation. System problems or concerns will be corrected by the general
contractor or appropriate subcontractor,in Conjunction with the appropriate factory
representative.Testing shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained, as determined
by the engineer.
END OF SECTION
221123.13/ 14of14
SECTION 221219
STEEL POTABLE WATER STORAGE NON-PRESSURE TANK
1. GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes requirements for providing the equipment, labor and materials
necessary to furnish and install a 22,000 gallon(10' diameter x 37.5' long)above-ground,
horizontal,non-pressure, steel storage tank system for potable water.
B. Requirements include furnishing and installing all equipment and accessories necessary to
make a complete system for the storage of potable water.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. AGREEMENT consists of the conditions of the contract between the Owner and the
Contractor,including referenced specifications, drawings and related documents.
B. AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION is Virginia Department of Health having statutory
jurisdiction over the project.
C. CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS consist of the general and supplemental conditions,
specifications, drawings, and any addenda issued prior to bidding.
D. CON TRACTOR is the person, firm, or corporation with whom Owner has entered into the
Agreement.
E. FURNISH means the Contractor shall supply the item specified, at the job site,unloaded,and
secured against damage,vandalism or theft.
F. INSTALL means the Contractor shall perform all work required to place the equipment
specified in operation, including installation, testing, calibration, and start-up.
G. OWNER is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement.
H. PRODUCT means the liquid stored in and dispensed from the tank.
I. PROVIDE means the Contractor shall Furnish and Install the equipment specified,and
perform all work necessary to provide a complete and functional system.
J. SPOIL means all material removed by demolition or excavating.
•
K. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or
designated portion thereof is sufficiently completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents for the Owner to utilize the Work for its intended use.
L. WORK means all materials, equipment, construction and services required by the Contract,
whether completed or partially completed.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless otherwise specified, equipment furnished under this section shall be fabricated and
installed in compliance with the instructions of the manufacturer.
B. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, accessories and installation materials comply
with the specification and that adequate provision is made in the tank design and fabrication
for mounting the specified system equipment and accessories.
C. The Contractor is solely responsible for construction means,methods,techniques, sequences
and procedures and for safety precautions and programs.
D. The contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and material required to provide a complete
and functional system.
22 1219/ 1 of 4
E. To avoid delays in construction,the Contractor shall ensure that all components of the system
are available at the time of installation.
F. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with other work being performed at the construction
site and minimize interference with the Owner's normal activities which may continue during
construction.
1.4 STANDARDS
A. The manufacture and installation of above-ground storage tank systems described in this
section shall adhere to the following standards and regulatory requirements:
1. Welded Carbon Steel Tanks for Water Storage,AWWA D-100, Coating Steel Water-
Storage Tanks,AWWA D-102,American Water Works Association, 6666 West Quincy
Ave.,Denver, CO 80235-3098
2. Welded Tanks for Oil Storage,API Standard 650, Eleventh Edition,June 2007,American
Petroleum Institute, 1220 L Street NW,Washington,DC 20005
3. Control of External Corrosion of Submerged Metallic Piping Systems,NACE
Recommended Practice RP0169, ;External Catholic Protection of On-Grade Metallic
Storage Tank Bottoms,NACE Recommended Practice RP0193-93,NACE International,
P.O.Box 218340,Houston,TX 77213.
4. National Fire Prevention Code, 1994,Building Officials and Code Administrators,4051
Flossmoor Road, Country Club Hills,Illinois 60478.
5. Standard Fire Prevention Code, 1995, Southern Building Code Congress International,
900 Montclair Road, Birmingham, Alabama 35213-1206.
6. Occupational Safety and Health Standards,particularly Flammable and Combustible
Liquids,29CFR 1910.106,Personal Protective Equipment 29CFR 1910 Subpart I,
Excavations 29CFR 1926.650 Subpart P,U. S. Department of Labor, Occupational
Safety and Health Administration(OSHA),Washington,D.C.
7. Clean Water Act and Oil Pollution Act of 1990, Spill Prevention, Control and
Countermeasure(SPCC)Plans,40 CFR 112, 113 and 114. •
8. Uniform building Code,International Conference of Building'Officials, 5360 Workman
Mill Road,Whittier, California.90601-2298.
9. Applicable state and local regulations and ordinances
B. In case of differences between building codes,state laws, local ordinances,utility company
regulations, and contract documents, the most stringent shall govern.
C. The codes and standards listed are the latest as of this publication. Codes and standards are
continuously updated. The Contractor shall confine the construction standard edition
enforced by the authority having jurisdiction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall provide shop drawings of the following system components for
approval before commencing construction.
1. Shop drawings of the tank(s)by the tank manufacturer.
2. Assembly and installation drawings. • 1
•
B. The Contractor shall provide product data sheets and descriptive material for major
components to be provided.
221219/2of4
1. Piping,venting equipment, fittings,hatches,ladders.
C. Submittals shall be delivered to the Engineer within [10 days] of notice to proceed. The
Engineer shall review the drawings and return them to the Contractor approved, or with
appropriate comments,within [14 days] of receipt.
D. The foundation design for the tank must be signed and sealed by the Contractor's Registered
Professional Engineer in the State of Virginia.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTATION
A. The Contractor shall provide three (3)sets of manufacturers'system component operation and
maintenance manual instructions.
B. The Contractor shall provide record("as-built")drawings and photographs of all system
components
C. The Contractor shall provide copies of all testing and inspection reports to the Owner prior to
substantial completion.
1.7 GUARANTEES,WARRANTIES AND INSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall provide a two year warrantee.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Tank manufacturer shall'be ISO 9001 certified.
B. Additional Information
1. Tanks shall be double butt welded with full penetration welds.
2. Tank shall have two top manways.
2.2 VENTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide one(1)normal atmospheric vent sized per the largest inlet or outlet connection.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Familiarity with the Site.
1. Contractor shall familiarize himself with the location of all public utility facilities and
structures that may be found in the vicinity of the construction.
2. The Contractor shall conduct his operation to avoid damage to the utilities or structures.
Should any damage occur due to the Contractor's operations,repairs shall be made at the
Contractor's expense in a manner acceptable to the Owner.
3. The Contractor is responsible for meeting all the requirements established by the agencies
for utility work, as well as work affecting utilities and other government agencies.
3.2 SITE PREPARATION
A. The site shall be prepared to ensure adequate support for the tank system and drainage of
surface water.
1. The foundation and tank supports shall be capable of supporting the weight of the tank
and associated equipment when full.
221219/3of4
2. The foundation design for the tank must be signed and sealed by the Contractor's
Registered Professional Engineer in the State of Virginia.
B. Regional Code Awareness
1. Regional and local fire codes authorities shall be consulted for local requirements.
2. Notify the Engineer of any local requirements not incorporated in the system as designed.
3. Regional and local fire codes authorities shall be consulted for local requirements.
C. Maintain legal separation distances from property lines,buildings,public ways, dispensers,
vehicles being fueled and other storage tanks.
3.3 TANK HANDLING, STORAGE AND INSTALLATION
A. Tanks shall be handled,lifted,stored and secured in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Unload with equipment having sufficient lifting capacity to avoid damage to the tank.
Securely store the tank at the job site.
C. The tank and associated equipment shall be installed in accordance with the fire safety codes,
regulations,standards and manufacturer's instructions including:
1. Federal, state and local fire safety, occupational health and environmental regulations.
2. The installation instructions of other system component manufacturers.
3. The Construction Documents and associated Drawings.
D. Advise the Owner of any shipping or handling damage encountered,.
E. No modifications shall be made to any tank without the prior written approval of the
manufacturer and the Engineer. This includes any welding on tank shells, adding
penetrations in the tank structure, or repairing damage which might affect the integrity of the
inner or outer tank.
•
END OF SECTION
221219/4of4
SECTION 25 9000
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The following sequence of operation describes the automatic and manual operation of
equipment. Equipment that is operationally a stand-alone unit is not described under this
section but shall be considered an integral part of the whole system when incorporating
these sequences of events in order to provide for a complete operating system. Items
shown or described in one section but not in the other shall be provided. Operating and
alarm levels and conditions stated in this document are based on nominal values and may
be field adjusted as required.
B. All control parameters shall be operator adjustable through the PLC workstations.
1.2 ALARM ANNUNCIATION
A. Audible alarms shall be able to be silenced locally,while maintaining visual display until
the alarm condition is cleared. Every alarm condition shall require manual
acknowledgement.Alarms shall be annunciated at the pump house and transmitted to
maintenance personnel by the SCADA RTU system.
B. The following conditions shall be monitored by the PLC system(s):
1. Hand-Off-Local-Remote Status (well pumps,booster pumps)
2. Hand-Off-Auto (chemical feed pumps).
3. Main Power
4. Auxiliary Power
5. Power Failure
6. Phase Loss
7. Well Pump Failure
8. Well Pump Running
9. Chemical Feed Pump Failure
10. Chemical Feed Pump Running
11. Booster Pump Failure
12. Booster Pump Running
13. Atmospheric Tank Water Level
14. Booster Pump Discharge Pressure •
C. The following conditions shall be annunciated as alarms at the Control Panel:
1. VFD Fault/Failure
2. VFD High Temperature
3. Pump Failure
4. Motor Seal Leak
5. Motor High Temperature
25 9000/ 1 of 3
6. Phase Monitor Fault
7. Tank Low Water Level
• 8. Tank High Water Level
9. System Low Pressure
10. System High Pressure
•
1.3 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
A. The water system shall be controlled by the PLC system and operate automatically in
LOCAL mode as follows:
1. Booster Pumps
a) When a demand is placed on the water distribution system while the water
booster pumps are off,the Hydropneumatic Tank will'supply the demand and
pressure in the system will decrease. When the pump discharge pressure
transmitter reaches the Pump On pressure (75 PSI),Booster Pump#1 will start in
a gradual manner and attempt to maintain the Set Point pressure(85 PSI)by
altering the VFD speed and therefore flow rate supplied by the pump. If demand
is greater than Booster Pump#1 can deliver,which will be indicated by the
system pressure falling below the allowable drift from the Set Point pressure,
then the PLC will turn on Booster Pump#2.
b) Booster Pump#2 will start in.a gradual manner and both pumps will maintain the
Set Point pressure by altering the VFD speed and therefore flow rate supplied by
the pumps. When demand on the system substantially decreases or stops,the
pressure in the system will increase until it reaches the Pump Off pressure(95
PSI),at which point both the Booster Pumps will be taken through the shut off
procedure.
c) If only Booster Pump#1 is running and the Pump Off pressure is reached,
Booster Pump#1 will be taken through the shut off procedure.
d) The PLC shall have the ability to periodically alternate the lead pump between
Booster Pump#1 and#2 based on run times.
e) If the discharge pressure transmitter falls below the Pump On pressure(75 PSI)
then the PLC shall transmit a Low Pressure alarm.If the discharge pressure
transmitter rises above the Pump Off pressure (95 PSI)then the PLC shall
transmit a High Pressure alarm.
2. Well Pumps
a) If the submersible pressure transmitter in the atmospheric storage tank indicates
the water level decreases to the Well Pump On elevation,then the well pumps
will start in a gradual manner and fill the storage tank. If the level in the
atmospheric storage tank increases to the Well Pump Off elevation,then the well
pumps will be taken through the shut off procedure.
b) If the submersible pressure transmitter in the atmospheric storage tank indicates
the water level decreases below the Well Pump On elevation, then the PLC shall
transmit a Low Water Level alarm. If the water level rises above the Well Pump
Off elevation,then the PLC shall transmit a High Water Level alarm.
c) If the level in the Atmospheric Storage Tank drops to the Booster Pump Off
Level, then Booster Pumps#1 and#2 will be shut off. This action will supersede
the call by the Pump On pressure to turn on the Booster Pumps. Whenever the
Booster Pump Off Level is reached in the atmospheric tank,the Booster Pumps
are to be locked out from running until water level in the tank rises to the Booster
25 90 00/2 of 3
Pump Restart Level. The system will not be able to provide water during this
time. This event should never occur as the system has been designed for the peak
hour demands. However, it should still be programmed into the PLC as a
safeguard to protect the Booster Pumps from running dry.
d) Neither the Well Pump nor the Booster Pumps should operate if alarms have not
been manually cleared.
B. The water system shall operate automatically in REMOTE mode as follows:
1. Booster Pumps
a) When a demand is placed on the water distribution system while the water
booster pumps are off,the Hydropneumatic Tank will supply the demand and
pressure in the system will decrease. When the pump discharge pressure reaches
• the Booster Pump 1 Cut On pressure (80 PSI),Booster Pump 1 will start in a
gradual manner and run at a fixed speed. If demand is greater than Booster Pump
1 can deliver,the system pressure will decrease to the Booster Pump 2 Cut On
Pressure(75 PSI),Booster Pump 2 will start in a gradual manner and run at a
fixed speed.
b) When demand on the system decreases or stops,the pressure in the system will
increase until it reaches the Booster Pump 2 Cut Off pressure(90 PSI), at which
point Booster Pump 2 will be taken through the shut off procedure. The pressure
in the system will continue to increase until it reaches the Booster Pump 1 Cut
Off pressure(95 PSI),at which point Booster Pump 1 will be taken through the
shut off procedure.
2. Well Pumps
a) If the water level in the atmospheric tank decreases to the Well Pump On float
switch,then the well pumps will start in a gradual manner and fill the storage
tank. If the level in the atmospheric storage tank increases to the Well Pump Off
float switch,then the well pumps will be taken through the shut off procedure.
b) If the level in the atmospheric storage tank drops to the Booster Pump Off float
switch,then Booster Pumps 1 and 2 will be shut off. This action will supersede
the call by the Pump On pressure to turn on the Booster Pumps. Whenever the
Booster Pump Off float switch is reached in the atmospheric tank, the Booster
Pumps are to be locked out from running until water level in the tank rises to the
• Booster Pump Restart float switch. The system will not be able to provide water
during this time.
C. The chemical feed pumps shall operate automatically in AUTO mode as follows:
1. Chemical Feed
a) The chemical feed pumps shall only run while the well pumps are running. The
dosing rate shall automatically adjust based on the raw water flow rate and the
chlorine readings taken by the chlorine analyzer. The pumps shall automatically
alternate after each well pump cycle.
2. PRODUCTS—NOT USED
3. EXECUTION—NOT USED
END OF SECTION
25 90 00/3 of 3
SECTION 26 0505
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical demolition.
2. PRODUCTS—NOT USED
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as indicated.
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only'abandoned facilities.
C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.
D. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installation.
E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls,floors, and ceilings to be removed.
B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company.
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits,use
personnel experienced in such operations.
D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is
complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections.
Minimize outage duration.
I. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Perform work for removal and disposal of equipment and materials containing toxic
substances regulated under the Federal Toxic Substances Control Act(TSCA)in
accordance with applicable federal, state,and local regulations.Applicable equipment and
materials include,but are not limited to:
1. Mercury-containing lamps and tubes,including fluorescent lamps,high intensity
discharge (HID),arc lamps,ultra-violet,high pressure sodium,mercury vapor,
ignitron tubes,neon, and incandescent.
B. Remove,relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling
finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit
servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that
are not removed.
26 0505 / 1 of 2
F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that
has been removed,unless otherwise noted.
H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets,stems,hangers, and other
accessories.
I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.
J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or
provide access panel as appropriate.
K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing
electrical installations, or as specified.
3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections.
Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide
typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
26 0505/2 of 2
SECTION 26 0519
ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Single conductor building wire.
B. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable.
C. Control wirings.
D. Wiring connectors.
E. Electrical tape.
F. Heat shrink tubing.
G. Wire pulling lubricant.
H. Cable ties.
' + 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0526-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements
for grounding conductors and grounding connectors.
B. Section 26 0536-Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional installation requirements
for cables installed in cable tray systems.
C. Section 26 0553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Identification
products and requirements. ,
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire;2013.
B. ASTM B8- Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,Hard,
Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011.
C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for
Electrical Purposes; 2010(Reapproved 2014).
D. ASTM B787/B787M- Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded
Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004(Reapproved 2014).
E. ASTM D3005 -Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride
Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape;2010.
F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically
Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2013.
G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
H. NECA 121 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cable(Type NM-B) and
Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cable(Type UF);2007.
I. NEMA WC 70-Nonshielded Power Cable 2000 V or Less for the Distribution of Electrical
Energy; 2009.
J. NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2013.
K. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
26 0519/ 1of8
•
L. UL 44-Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
M. UL 83 -Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition,Including All
Revisions.
N. UL 486A-486B -Wire Connectors; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
O. UL 486C- Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
P. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
Q. UL 493 -Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cables; Current
Edition,Including All Revisions.
R. UL 510-Polyvinyl Chloride,Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate sizes of raceways,boxes,and equipment enclosures installed under other
sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for
conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2. Coordinate the installation of direct burial cable with other trades to avoid conflicts
with piping or other potential conflicts.
3. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide
terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
4. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction,ratings,
listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding.
B. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.. •
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and
product listing.
B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise
indicated,permitted, or required.
26 0519/ 2of8
C. Provide control wiring as specified or recommended by the equipment manufacturer
installed in suitable raceway.
D. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted.
E. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is permitted only as follows:
1. Where not otherwise restricted,may be used:
a. Flat conductor cable for well pump feeders only..
F. Service entrance cable is not permitted.
G. Armored cable is not permitted.
H. Metal-clad cable is not permitted.
I. Manufactured wiring systems are not permitted.
2.2 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide all required conduit,boxes,wiring,
connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.
E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL
83.
F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
G. Conductor Material:
1. Provide copper conductors only.Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this
project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.
2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity,uncoated copper
conductors complying with ASTM B3,ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.
H. Minimum Conductor Size:
1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.
2. Control Circuits, 50 volts or less: 16 AWG.
3. Control Circuits, Greater than 50 volts: 14 AWG.
I. Where conductor size is not indicated,size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
J. Conductor Color Coding:
1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having
jurisdiction.Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.
26 0519/ 3of8
a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using
vinyl color coding electrical tape.
3. Color Code:
a. 208Y/120 V,3 Phase,4 Wire System:
i. Phase A: Black.
ii. Phase B: Red. •
iii. Phase C: Blue.
iv. NeutraUGrounded: White.
b. Equipment Ground,All Systems: Green.
2.3 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE
A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B. Conductor Stranding:
1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:
a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. •
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
D. Insulation:
1. Copper Building Wire: Type XHHW-2.
2.4 UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type UF multiple-conductor cable listed and labeled as complying
with UL 493, Type OF-B.
B. Provide equipment grounding conductor unless otherwise indicated.
C. Conductor Stranding:
1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.
2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.
D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
2.5 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the
conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A486B or UL 486C as
applicable.
B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps:
1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring
connectors.
2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or .
compression connectors. Compression connector shall only be utilized for butt
splicing two conductors.
C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
26 0519/ 4of8
1. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with
mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.
2. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can
accommodate,provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not
less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.
3. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or
compression connectors where connectors are required.
4. Stranded Conductors Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Use crimped terminals for
connections to terminal screws.
D. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with
conductors without stripping insulation.
E. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.
F. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V,221 degrees F for standard
applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications;pre-filled with sealant
and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations.
G. Mechanical Connectors: Provide set-screw type.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com/#sle.
b. Thomas &Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle.
2. Mechanical connectors shall be preinsulated type suitable for the environment for
which they are be installed.
3. Connectors that utilize tape for insulation shall not be utilized.
H. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
1. Compression connector shall be suitably insulated for the environment for which they
are to be installed with either heat shrink sleaves or rubber tape with vynil tape cover.
I. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated,with insulation grip and terminal configuration
suitable for connection to be made.
2.6 WIRING ACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Tape:
1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code
indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil;resistant to
abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up
to 221 degrees F.
2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as
complying with UL 510;minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion,
corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable
for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F.
3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber(EPR)tape, complying
with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous
temperature environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload
service.
26 0519/ 5of8
4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty,minimum thickness
of 125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F.
5. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible,
all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil.
B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant,with factory-applied adhesive;rated 600
V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.
C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be
installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature.
D. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verify that raceways,boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized
to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and
cables.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Circuiting Requirements:
1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. 'When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact
routing required.
3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location
indicated.
5. Maintain separation of Class I, Class 2,and.Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and
power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
6. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated,when branch circuits are
.indicated as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.
7. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded
conductors among.up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases
installed in the same raceway is not permitted.Provide dedicated neutral/grounded
conductor for each individual branch circuit.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
26 0519/ 6of8
D. Install underground feeder and branch-circuit cable(Type UF-B)in accordance with NECA
121.E. Installation in Raceway:
1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other
contaminants.
2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.
4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not
recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same
manner.
G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable
supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent
support from building structure.Do not provide support from raceways,piping, ductwork,
or other systems.
H. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.
I. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.
J. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes,wireways,panelboards and other
equipment enclosures.
K. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded
conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.
L. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or
make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without
cutting,nicking or damaging conductors.
3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,
oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's
recommended torque settings.
6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended
tools and dies.
M. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable
for the application,with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced
conductors.
1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors,
electrical tape,or heat shrink tubing.
26 0519/ 7of8
a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical
tape or electrical filler tape,followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating
electrical tape.
b. For taped connections likely to require re-entering,including motor leads,first
apply varnished cambric electrical tape, followed by adequate amount of rubber
splicing electrical tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical
tape.
2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors,
electrical tape,or heat shrink tubing.
a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing
electrical tape.
b. For taped connections;follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer
covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.
3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.
N. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
O. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of
integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under"Color Coding", apply half
overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible.
P. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,using
materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
Q. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide final connections to all equipment and
devices,including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.
•
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2.The insulation resistance
test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as
optional is not required.
1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs)prior to performing any high potential
testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs
connected. .
C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.
END OF SECTION
26 0519/ 8of8
SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Grounding and bonding requirements.
B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.
C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.
D. Ground bars.
E. Ground rod electrodes.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0519 -ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES: Additional requirements for conductors,for grounding and bonding,including
conductor color coding.
B. Section 26 0553-IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Identification
products and requirements.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE 81 -IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Grounding System; 2012.
B. NECA 1'- Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
C. NEMA GR 1 -Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings;2007.
D. NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2013.
E. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. UL 467-Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building.
2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with
specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode.
3. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding
and bonding system components.
B. Field quality control test reports.
26 0526/ 1 of 6
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system
components and connections.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to
be reused,they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion,integrity and
continuity are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.
B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide all required components, conductors,
connectors, conduit,boxes,fittings,supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete
grounding and bonding system. ,_
•
D. Where conductor size is not indicated,size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
E. Grounding System Resistance:
I. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless
otherwise approved by Engineer.Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not
constitute normally dry conditions.
2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 25 ohms to ground,when tested
according to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.
F. Grounding Electrode System:
1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to _.
form grounding electrode system.
a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.
b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical
damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end
with bonding jumper.
2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):
a. Provide connection to metal water service pipe(s)that are in direct contact with
earth for at least 10 feet at an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the
point of entrance to the building.
•
b. Provide bonding jumpers) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe
electrically continuous.
3., Ground Rod Electrode(s):
26 0526/ 2of6
a. Provide three electrodes in an equilateral triangle configuration unless otherwise
indicated or required. Existing ground rods may be utilized if the pass the Ground
Resistance Test. Otherwise,new rods shall be provided.
b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet from each other and any other ground
electrode.
c. Where location is not indicated, locate electrode(s)at least 5 feet outside building
perimeter foundation as near as possible to electrical service entrance;where
possible, locate in softscape(uncovered)area.
4. Provide additional ground electrode(s)as required to achieve specified grounding
electrode system resistance.
5. Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure,for
common connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as
permitted in NFPA 70. Connect grounding electrode conductor provided for service-
supplied system grounding to this ground bar.
a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required.
b. Where ground bar location is not indicated,locate in accessible location as near as
possible to service disconnect enclosure.
c. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Service-Supplied System Grounding:
1. For each service disconnect,provide grounding electrode conductor to connect
neutral(grounded)service conductor to grounding electrode system.Unless
otherwise indicated,make connection at neutral(grounded)bus in service disconnect
enclosure.
2. For each service disconnect,provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral
(grounded)bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make
• any other connections between neutral(grounded) conductors and ground on load
side of service disconnect.
H. Separately Derived System Grounding:
1. Separately derived systems include,but are not limited to:
a. Transformers (except autotransformers such as buck-boost transformers).
b. Generators,when neutral is switched in the transfer switch.
2. Provide grounding electrode conductor to connect derived system grounded
conductor to nearest effectively grounded metal building frame.Unless otherwise
indicated,make connection at neutral (grounded)bus in source enclosure.
3. Provide bonding jumper to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest
metal building frame and nearest metal water piping in the area served by the derived
system,where not already used as a grounding electrode for the derived system.
Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor connection.
4. Where common grounding electrode conductor ground riser is used for tap
connections to multiple separately derived systems,provide bonding jumper to
connect the metal building frame and metal water piping in the area served by the
derived system to the common grounding electrode conductor.
26 0526/ 3 of 6
•
5. Outdoor Source: Where the source of the separately derived system is located
outside the building or structure supplied,provide connection to grounding electrode
at source in accordance with NFPA 70.
6. Provide system bonding jumper to connect system grounded conductor to equipment
ground bus. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor
connection.Do not make any other connections between neutral(grounded)
conductors and ground on load side of separately derived system disconnect.
7. Where the source and first disconnecting means,are in separate enclosures,provide
supply-side bonding jumper between source and first disconnecting means.
I. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:
1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses,
metallic equipment enclosures,metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding
terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing
electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in
accordance with NFPA 70.
2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit
raceway.Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor. •
3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop,increase size of
equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70..
4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch
circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded
• equipment ground bus only.Do not terminate on neutral(grounded) or
isolated/insulated ground bus.
6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to
accommodate conduit movement.
7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This
includes,but is not limited to:
a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground
water pipe used as grounding electrode.
b. Metal process piping.
2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.
• B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526:
1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.
a. Exceptions:
i. Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact
with earth.
26 0526/ 4 of 6
ii. Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete(not in
raceway).
C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:
1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the
conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.
2. Unless otherwise indicated,use exothermic welded connections for underground,
concealed and other inaccessible connections.
3. Unless otherwise indicated,use compression connectors or exothermic welded
connections for accessible connections.
D. Ground Bars:
1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.
2. Size: As indicated.
3. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.
E. Ground Rod Electrodes:
1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.
2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad)steel.
3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length,unless otherwise indicated.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been
completed.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated,install ground rod electrodes
vertically. Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle
or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches(750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA
70 or provide ground plates.
1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated,install with top of rod 12 inches
below finished grade.
• D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.
1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without
cutting,nicking or damaging conductors.Do not remove conductor strands to
facilitate insertion into connector.
2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points,
and contact surfaces.
26 0526/ 5 of 6
'3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the
items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's
recommended torque settings.
5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended
tools and dies.
E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.
B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
C. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions.Precipitation
within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.
D. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with
specified requirements.
E. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
•
26 0526/ 6 of 6
SECTION 26 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable,boxes, and other
electrical work.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for
conduits.
B. Section 26 0533.16 -Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes.
C. Section 26 5100 -Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for
interior luminaires.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A123/A123M- Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products; 2015.
B. ASTM A153/A153M- Standard Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel;2013.
D. MFMA-4 -Metal Framing Standards Publication;2004.
E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
F. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment
and components to be installed.
2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials
required for installation.
3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting
surfaces at the installed locations.
4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork,piping, equipment and other
potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
5. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete
has fully cured.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
26 0529/ 1 of 5
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal
channel(strut)framing systems and post-installed concrete and masonry anchors.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or
methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling,protection,
examination,preparation, and installation of product.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with applicable building code.
C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS •
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners,fittings, accessories, and
hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work. . '
2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended,
where applicable.
3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in
accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be
supported with a minimum safety factor of 3. Include consideration for vibration,
equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable.
4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
5. Do not use wire,chain,perforated pipe strap,or wood for permanent supports unless
specifically indicated or permitted.
6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment
where installed.
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless
otherwise indicated.
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel,
or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.
B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps,clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be
supported.
1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
26 0529/ 2 of 5
2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers,brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.
D. Metal Channel (Strut)Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel
(strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of
supports. -
1. Comply with MFMA-4.
2. Channel Material:
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use galvanized steel.
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.
3. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch.
4. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-1/2 inch width by 1-5/8 inch height.
E. Hanger Rods: Threaded galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
1. Minimum Size,Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.
b. Single Conduit up to 1 inch(27 mm)trade size: 1/4 inch diameter.
c. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch(27 mm)trade size: 3/8 inch diameter.
d. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter.
F. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted,use the anchor and
fastener types indicated for the specified applications.
2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts or Epoxy anchors.
3. Steel: Use beam clamps,machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.
4. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
5. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.
6. Powder-actuated fasteners are not permitted.
7. Hammer-driven anchors and fasteners are not permitted.
8. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel(strut)and spot inserts
specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings,walls,and floors.
a. Comply with MFMA-4.
b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.
c. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch minimum base
metal thickness.
d. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel(strut)framing system.
9. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation
Service,LLC(ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.+
26 0529/ 3 of 5
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
, A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment.components.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services,LLC(ICC-ES)
evaluation report conditions of use where applicable... .
D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer,do not provide support from
suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer,•do not provide support from roof
deck.
G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of
Structural Engineer.
•
H. Equipment Support and Attachment:
I. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel.(strut)to
support equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel(strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on
hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel(strut)to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp
locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment.Do not install equipment such that it relies
on its own weight for support.
•
I. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0533.13..
J. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0533.16.
K. Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5100.
L. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete
seepage during concrete pour.
M. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
N. Remove temporary supports.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL , ,
A. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.
B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
26 0529/ 4of5
C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.
END OF SECTION
26 0529/ 5 of 5
SECTION 26 0533.13
CONDUIT
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC).
B. Flexible metal conduit(FMC).
C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit(LFMC).
D. Electrical metallic tubing(EMT).
E. Rigid polyvinyl chloride(PVC) conduit.
F. Conduit fittings.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0526- Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
1. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding.
B. Section 26 0529 -Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Identification
products and requirements.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C80.1 -American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit(ERSC);
2005.
B. ANSI C80.3 -American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT);
2005.
C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction;2010.
D. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits(Rigid,IMC, EMT); 2013.
E. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC,ENT,LFNC);2003.
F. NEMA FB 1 -Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,Electrical
Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2012.
G. NEMA TC 2-Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Conduit;2013.
H. NEMA TC 3 -Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and
Tubing; 2015.
I. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
J. UL 1 -Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
K. UL 6 -Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L. UL 360 -Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
M. UL 514B-Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
N. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current
Edition,Including All Revisions.
O. UL 797-Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
26 0533.13 / 1 of 8
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed,
including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork,piping,
equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and
equipment installed under other sections or by others.
4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the
integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
5. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is
complete between outlet,junction and splicing points.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits
and fittings.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within structural concrete
slabs,where permitted.
2., ,Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA
70 and product listing.
B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted,use the conduit types
indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies,
comply with the most restrictive requirements.Where conduit type for a particular
application is not specified,use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
C. Underground:
1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
2. Exterior,Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
26 0533.13 / 2 of 8
3. Exterior,Embedded Within Concrete Ductbank: Use galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit or rigid PVC conduit. Conduit shall have a minimun of 3" of conduit around
each conduit and 4" minimum spacing(edge to edge)between conduits.
4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid
metal conduit where emerging from underground.
5. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil,use corrosion protection tape to
provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side
of where conduit emerges.
D. Embedded Within Concrete:
1. Within Slab on Grade: Not permitted.
2. Within Slab Above Ground: Not permitted.
E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
F. Interior,Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
G. Exposed, Interior,Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit or electrical metallic tubing(EMT).
H. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
1. Locations subject to physical damage include,but are not limited to:
a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or
closets.
I. Exposed,Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
J. Concealed,Exterior,Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized
steel rigid metal conduit.
K. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:
1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
2. Damp,Wet,or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
3. Maximum Length: 3 feet unless otherwise indicated.
4. Vibrating equipment includes,but is not limited to:
a. Transformers.
b. Motors.
2.2 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused
only where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity
is verified by pulling a mandrel through them.
B. •Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526.
C. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway
system.
D. Provide products listed, classified,and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
E. Minimum Conduit Size,Unless Otherwise Indicated:
26 0533.13 / 3 of 8
1. Branch Circuits: 1/2 inch(16 mm)trade size.
2. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch(16 mm)trade size.
3. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: ,1/2 inch (16 mm)trade size.
4. Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch(21 mm) trade size.
5. Underground,Exterior: 1-1/2 inch trade size.
F. Where conduit size is not indicated,size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
2.3 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT(RMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70,Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with
ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
B. Fittings:
1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and
labeled as complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. •
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only.Threadless set screw and
compression(gland)type fittings are not permitted.
2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT(FMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70,Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and
labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
B. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.
2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)
A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride(PVC)jacketed steel flexible metal
conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.
B. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.
2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING(EMT)
A. Description: NFPA 70,Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI
C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.
B. Fittings:
26 0533.13 / 4 of 8
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB I and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 514B.
•
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression(gland) type.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
b. Do not use set-screw type connectors and couplings.
2.7 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE(PVC)CONDUIT
A. Description: NFPA 70,Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA
TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise
indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage;rated for use with conductors
rated 90 degrees C. •
B. Fittings: •
1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 651; material to match conduit.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit(RMC)in accordance with NECA 101.
D. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride(PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.
E. Conduit Routing:
1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing,determine exact
routing required.
3. Conceal all exterior conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.
4. Interior conduits may be run concealed or exposed.
5. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the
shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel
or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where
practical.
6. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of three 90 degree bends
between pull points.
26 0533.13/ 5 of 8
7. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.
8. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at
sealing fittings where moisture may collect.
9. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other
systems.
F. Conduit Support:
1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using
suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from
piping, ductwork, or other systems.
3. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.
a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide
space between conduit and mounting surface.
4. Use metal channel (strut)with accessory,conduit clamps to support multiple parallel
surface-mounted conduits.
5. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.
6. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel(strut)with
accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.
7. Use of spring steel conduit clips for support of conduits is not permitted.
8. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.
9. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ,
comply with the most stringent requirements.
G. Connections and Terminations:
1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of
galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.
2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated,use three-
piece couplings.Do not use running threads.
3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to
another.
4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of
liquid into connectors.
5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double
lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
6. Where spare conduits stub up through concrete floors and are not terminated in a box
or enclosure,provide threaded couplings equipped with threaded plugs set flush with
finished floor.
7. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect
conductors.
8. Secure joints and connections to provide maximuni mechanical strength and electrical
continuity.
26 0533.13 / 6 of 8
H. Penetrations:
1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members,including footings and
grade beams,without approval of Structural Engineer.
2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation.
Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible
point to prevent entry of moisture and gases.
6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane,seal as required to maintain
• integrity of membrane.
7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment
openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where
penetrations are necessary,seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of
roofing system and maintain roof warranty.Include proposed locations of
penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.
I. Underground Installation:
1. Minimum Cover,Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Underground,Exterior: 24 inches.
b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab.
2. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 0553 along entire
conduit length.
3. Provide underground warning tape along entire conduit length.
J. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are
indicated to be concrete-encased,provide concrete with minimum concrete cover of 3
inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated.
K. Hazardous (Classified)Locations: Where conduits cross boundaries of hazardous
(classified)locations,provide sealing fittings located as indicated or in accordance with
NFPA 70.
L. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential
substantial temperature differential,provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound
at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes,but is not
limited to:
1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior
spaces.
M. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to
be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 24 inches at each end.
N. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
26 0533.13 / 7 of 8
A. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
B. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation of conduit,use suitable manufactured plugs to provide
protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for
installation of conductors.
END OF SECTION
26 0533.13 / 8 of 8
SECTION 26 0533.16
BOXES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull
boxes.
B. Cabinets and enclosures,including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.
C. Underground boxes/enclosures.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0529 -Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit:
1. Conduit bodies and other fittings.
2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of
bends between pulling points.
C. Section 26 0553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Identification
products and requirements.
D. Section 26 2726-Wiring Devices:
1. Wall plates.
2. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA I - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
B. NECA 130- Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.,
• C. NEMA FB 1 -Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical
Metallic Tubing, and Cable;2012.
D. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum);2014.
E. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. SCTE 77 -Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity; 2013.
G. UL 50-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition,Including All Revisions.
H. UL 50E-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition,Including All Revisions.
I. UL 508A-Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
J. UL 514A-Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork,piping,
equipment,or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
26 0533.16/ 1 of 5
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of
conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices,.calculated according to NFPA 70.
4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of
connected conduits,calculated according to NFPA 70.
5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork,furniture,devices,equipment, etc.
installed under other sections or by others.
• 6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.
7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of
flush-mounted boxes where indicated.
8. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets
and enclosures,boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and underground
boxes/enclosures.
1. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Include reports for load testing in accordance with
SCTE 77 certified by a professional engineer or an independent testing agency.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes,pull
boxes, cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures.
C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 BOXES
A. General Requirements:
1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted
by NFPA 70 and product listing.
2. Provide all boxes,fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway
system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.
3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
•
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
26 0533.16/ 2 of 5
5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors
terminate.
B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches,Including Those Used as Junction and
Pull Boxes:
1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.
2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless
otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed
covers.
3. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid
metal conduit is used.
4. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.
5. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.
6. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with
UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs.
7. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type
and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate
mounting of luminaire where required.
8. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction.Do
not use field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.
9. Minimum Box Size,Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch square by
1-1/2 inch deep(100 by 38 mm)trade size.
10. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726.
C. Cabinets and Enclosures,Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or
UL 508A.
2. NEMA 250 Environment Type,Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Indoor Clean,Dry Locations: Type 4.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X,stainless steel.
3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:
a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures,Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes:
a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
b. Back Panels: Painted steel,removable.
c. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable
for purpose indicated,with 100 percent spare terminal capacity.
•
5.. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:
26 0533.16/ 3 of 5
1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush,non-skid covers
with legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts.
2. Size: As indicated on drawings.
3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval,bat not less
than 18 inches.
4. Provide logo on cover to indicate type of service. •
5. Applications:
a. Parking Lots, Sidewalks and Landscape Areas Subject Only To Occasional
Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures,with minimum
SCTE 77,Tier 15 load rating.
b. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular
traffic.
• 6. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77.
a. Combination fiberglass/polymer concrete boxes/enclosures are acceptable.
3. EXECUTION •
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship)and,where applicable,,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting
heights are not indicated.
•
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D. Unless otherwise indicated,provide separate boxes for fine voltage and low voltage
systems.
E. Unless otherwise indicated,boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are
indicated or permitted.
F. Box Locations: •
1. Unless dimensioned,box locations indicated are approximate.
2. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.
a. Switches,Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 2726.
3. Unless otherwise indicated,where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same
location at different mounting heights,install along a common vertical center line.
260533.16/ 4of5
4. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of
conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling
points in accordance with Section 26 0533.13.
5. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas,unless otherwise indicated:
a. Electrical rooms.
b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. Equipment Rooms.
G. Box Supports:
1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using
suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes
(other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections
in accordance with NFPA 70.Do not provide support from piping,ductwork, or other
systems.
H. Install boxes plumb and level.
I. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:
1. Install enclosure on gravel base,minimum 6 inches deep.
2. Provide cast-in-place concrete collar constructed,minimum 10 inches wide by 12
inches deep, around enclosures.
3. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling.Backfill with
cover bolted in place.
J. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent
devices exceeds 300 V.
K. Close unused box openings.
L. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or
equipment installed or designated for future use.
M. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
N. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 0553.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt,debris,plaster and other foreign material.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation,protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material
until ready for installation of conductors.
END OF SECTION
•
26 0533.16/ 5 of 5
SECTION 26 0553
INDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical identification requirements.
B. Identification nameplates and labels.
C. Wire and cable markers.
D. Underground warning tape.
E. Floor marking tape.
F. Warning signs and labels.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0519-ELECTRICAL POWER AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less;vinyl color
coding electrical tape.
B. Section 26 0573 -Power System Studies: Arc flash hazard warning labels.
C. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices-Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-
marked wallplates.
D. Section 27 1000-Structured Cabling: Identification for communications cabling and
devices.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI Z535.2 -American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs;
2011.
B. ANSI Z535.4-American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.
C. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D. UL 969-Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified
prior to fabrication of identification products.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not conceal items to be identified,in locations such as above suspended ceilings,
until identification products have been installed.
2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are
complete.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each
product.
26 0553 / 1 of 7
B. Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed
designations,materials, legends,and formats.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling,protection,
examination,preparation and installation of product.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform toarequirements of NFPA 70.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Identification for Equipment:
• 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and
control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Motor Control:
i. Identify ampere rating.
ii. Identify voltage and phase.
iii. Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.
iv. Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device.
v. Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device.
Do not identify spares.and spaces. ,
b. Panelboards:
i. Identify ampere rating.
ii. Identify voltage and phase.
iii. Identify power source and circuit number.Include location when not within
' sight of equipment.
iv. Identify main overcurrent protective device.Use identification label for
panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door,
use identification nameplate.
v. Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards
with a door.
vi. For power panelboards without a door,use identification nameplate to
identify load(s) served for each branch device.
c. Transformers:
i. Identify kVA rating.
ii. Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary.
iii. Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.
iv. Identify load(s) served. Include location.
d. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:
26 0553/ 2of7
i. Identify voltage and phase.
ii. Identify power source and circuit number.Include location.
iii. Identify load(s) served. Include location.
e. Transfer Switches:
i. Identify voltage and phase.
ii. Identify power source and circuit number for both normal power source and
standby power source. Include location.
iii. Identify load(s) served. Include location.
iv. Identify short circuit current rating based on the specific overcurrent
protective device type and settings protecting the transfer switch.
2. Service Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.
b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination
of branch circuits, feeders, and services,use identification nameplate or means of
identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service
disconnecting means to identify all other services,feeders, and branch circuits
supplying that building or structure.Verify format and descriptions with authority
having jurisdiction.
3. Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings,where
permitted,in accordance with NFPA 70.
4. Use identification nameplate to identify panelboards utilizing a high leg delta system
in accordance with NFPA 70.
5. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with
remote disconnecting means.
6. Use identification label or identification nameplate on inside of door at each fused
switch to identify required NEMA fuse class and size.
7. Use identification label or identification nameplate on inside of door at each motor
controller to identify nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service
factor,voltage, and phase of motor(s) controlled. •
8. Use field-painted floor markings,floor marking tape,or warning labels to identify
required equipment working clearances.
a. Field-Painted Floor Markings: Alternating black and white stripes,3 inches wide,
painted in accordance with Section 09 9123 and 09 9113.
9. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the
available fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring
documentation by NFPA 70,including but not limited to the following.
a. Service equipment.
b. Industrial control panels.
10. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Comply with Section 26 0573.
B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:
•
26 0553/ 3 of 7
1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519.
2. Identification for Communications Conductors and Cables: Comply with Section 27 _
1000.
3. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for
ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of -
feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch
circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.
4. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated
for power,control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following
,locations:
a. At each source and load connection.
b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.
c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the
enclosure.
5. 5. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system
components for grounding electrode conductors.
6. Use.underground warning tape to identify direct buried cables.
C. Identification for Boxes:
1. Use identification labels to identify circuits enclosed.
D. Identification for Devices:
1: Identification for Communications Devices: Comply with Section 27 1000.
2. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 2726.
3. Factory Pre-Marked Wallplates: Comply with Section 26 2726.
4. Use engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles.
5. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall-
mounted control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control
location and for multiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location.
2.2 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Identification.Nameplates:
1. Materials:
a. Indoor Clean,Dry Locations: Use plastid nameplates.
b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel,or aluminum nameplates suitable
for exterior use. —
2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-
conductive phenolic with beveled edges;minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved
text.
3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-
etched text. -
26 0553 / 4 of 7
4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized;minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or
laser-etched text.
5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1
inch high;Four,located at corners for larger sizes.
B. Identification Labels:
I. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels;UV, chemical,water,heat, and
abrasion resistant.
2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text.Do not use handwritten text
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Format for Equipment Identification:
1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.
2. Legend:
a. Equipment designation or other approved description.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height:
a. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.
5. Color:
a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.
D. Format for General Information and Operating Instructions:
1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.
2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and
safe operation and maintenance.
3. Text:All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height: 1/4 inch.
5. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.
E. Format for Receptacle Identification:
I. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.
2. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
a. Include voltage and phase for other than 120 V, single phase circuits.
3. Text:All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.
5. Color: Black text on clear background.
F. Format for Control Device Identification:
1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch by 1.5 inches.
2. Legend: Load controlled or other designation indicated.
3. Text:All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
26 0553/ 5 of 7
4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch.
5. Color: Black text on clear background.
2.3 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS
A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating,
heat-shrink sleeve, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to
be identified.
B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable
.ties:
C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.
F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.,
2.4 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Materials: Use foil-backed detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 3 inches wide,with minimum thickness of 5 mil,
unless otherwise required for proper detection.
C. Legend: Type of service,continuously repeated over full length of tape.
D. Color:
1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on yellow background.
2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. Floor Marking Tape for Equipment Working Clearance Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl
or polyester tape with overlaminate, 3 inches wide,with alternating black and white stripes.
2.6 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.
B. Warning Signs:
1. Materials:
2. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated:
C. Warning Labels:
1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-
adhesive vinyl labels; UV,chemical,water,heat, and abrasion resistant; produced
• using materials recognized to UL 969.
2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and
accessories recommended by label manufacturer.
3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.
26 0553/ 6 of 7
3. EXECUTION
•
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing,
and maintenance.Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with
rear access.
4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.
5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
7. Boxes: Outside face of cover.
8. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.
9. Devices: Outside face of cover.
C. Install identification products centered,level,and parallel with lines of item being
identified.
D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to
interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.
E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion,with no bubbles or
wrinkles and edges properly sealed.
F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches
below finished grade.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles,wrinkles, curling or other
signs of improper adhesion.
END OF SECTION
26 0553/ 7 of 7
SECTION 26 0573
POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Short-circuit study. •
B. Protective device coordination study.
C. Arc flash and shock risk assessment.
1. Includes arc flash hazard warning labels.
D. Criteria for the selection and adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices not
specified in this section, as determined by studies to be performed.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Additional
requirements for arc flash hazard warning labels.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE 1584-2018 -Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations
B. ANSI Z535.4-American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.
C. IEEE 141 -IEEE Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution for Industrial
Plants; 1993 (Reaff 1999).
D. IEEE 242-IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems;2001.
E. IEEE 399-IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
Analysis; 1997.
F. IEEE 551 -IEEE Recommended Practice for Calculating Short-Circuit Currents in
Industrial and Commercial Power Systems;2006.
' G. NEMA MG 1 -Motors and Generators;2014.
H. NETA ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2013.
I. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
J. NFPA 70E-Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace;2015.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Existing Installations: Coordinate with equipment manufacturer(s)to obtain data
necessary for completion of studies.
2. Coordinate the work to provide equipment and associated protective devices
complying with criteria for selection and adjustment, as determined by studies to be
performed.
3. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
26 0573/ 1 of 7
1. Submit study reports prior to or concurrent with product submittals.
2. Do not order equipment until matching study reports and product submittals have
both been evaluated by Engineer.
3. Verify naming convention for equipment identification prior to creation of final
drawings,reports,and arc flash hazard warning labels(where applicable).
C. Scheduling:
1. Arrange access to existing facility for data collection with Owner.
2. Where work of this section involves interruption of existing electrical service, arrange
service interruption with Owner.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Study preparer's qualifications.
B. Study reports, stamped or sealed and signed by study preparer.
C. Product Data: In addition to submittal requirements specified in other sections, include
manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for equipment and protective devices
indicating information relevant to studies.
1. Include characteristic time-current trip curves for protective devices.
2. Include impedance data for busway.
3. Include impedance data for engine-generators.
4. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or,
where acceptable, series rated systems.
5. Include documentation of listed series ratings.
6. Identify modifications made in accordance with studies that:
a. Can be made at no additional cost to Owner.
b. As submitted will involve a change to the contract sum.
D. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Label Samples: One of each type and legend specified.
E. Project Record Documents: Revise studies as required to reflect as-built conditions.
1. Include hard copies with operation and maintenance data submittals.
2. Include computer software files (Program Data Files)used to prepare studies with file
name(s) cross-referenced to specific pieces of equipment and systems.
1.6 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
A. Scope of Studies:
1. Except where study descriptions below indicate exclusions,analyze system at each
bus from primary protective devices of utility source down to each piece of
equipment involved, including parts of system affecting calculations being performed
(e.g. fault current contribution from motors).
2. Include in analysis alternate sources and operating modes (including known future
configurations)to determine worst case conditions.
a. Known Operating Modes:
26 0573/ 2 of 7
i. Utility as source.
ii. Generator as source.
B. General Study Requirements:
1. Comply with NFPA 70.
2. Perform studies utilizing computer software complying with specified requirements;
manual calculations are not permitted.
C. Data Collection:
1. Compile information on project-specific characteristics of actual installed equipment,
protective devices, feeders,etc. as necessary to develop single-line diagram of
electrical distribution system and associated input data for use in system modeling.
a. Utility Source Data: Include primary voltage,maximum and minimum three-
phase and line-to-ground fault currents, impedance,X/R ratio, and primary
protective device information.
i. Obtain up-to-date information from Utility Company.
b. Generators: Include manufacturer/model,kW and voltage ratings, and impedance.
c. Motors: Include manufacturer/model, type (e.g. induction, synchronous),
horsepower rating,voltage rating,full load amps, and locked rotor current or
NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
d. Transformers: Include primary and secondary voltage ratings,kVA rating,
winding configuration,percent impedance, and X/R ratio.
e. Protective Devices:
i. Circuit Breakers: Include manufacturer/model, type(e.g.thermal magnetic,
electronic trip), frame size,trip rating,voltage rating, interrupting rating,
available field-adjustable trip response settings, and features (e.g. zone
selective interlocking).
ii. Fuses: Include manufacturer/model, type/class (e.g. Class J),size/rating, and
speed(e.g. time delay, fast acting).
•
f. Protective Relays: Include manufacturer/model,type, settings, current/potential
transformer ratio, and associated protective device.
g. Conductors: Include feeder size,material(e.g. copper, aluminum),insulation type,
voltage rating,number per phase,raceway type,and actual length.
D. Short-Circuit Study:
1. Comply with IEEE 551 and applicable portions of IEEE 141,IEEE 242, and IEEE
399.
2. For purposes of determining equipment short circuit current ratings, consider
conditions that may result in maximum available fault current,including but not
limited to:
a. Maximum utility fault currents.
b. Maximum motor contribution.
26 0573/ 3 of 7
c. Known operating modes (e.g.utility as source, generator as source,
utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).
3. For each bus location, calculate the maximum available three-phase bolted
symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. For grounded systems, also calculate
the maximum available line-to-ground bolted fault currents.
E. Protective Device Coordination Study:
1. Comply with applicable portions of IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.
2. Analyze alternate scenarios considering known operating modes (e.g. utility as
source, generator as source,utility/generator in parallel,bus tie breaker open/close
positions).
3. Analyze protective devices and associated settings for suitable margins between time-
current curves to achieve full selective coordination in compliance with Authority
Having Jurisdiction(AHJ)., Utilize a minimum of.1 seconds coordination or less
where required by the AHJ.
4. Coordination study shall be performed prior to submission of Generator, Transfer
Switch,Panelboard and Variable Frequency Motor Controller shop drawings.
5. Make revisions to equipment selections as required to ensure that coordination meets
the requirements of the AHJ or minimum of.1 seconds,whichever is more stringent.
F. Arc Flash and Shock Risk Assessment:
1. Comply with NFPA 70E.
2. Perform incident energy and arc flash boundary calculations in accordance with IEEE
1584 (as referenced in NFPA 70E Annex D),where applicable.
a. To clarify IEEE 1584 statement that"equipment below 240 V need not be
considered unless it involves at least one 125 kVA or larger low-impedance
transformer in its immediate power supply" for purposes of studies,study preparer
to include equipment rated less than 240 V fed by transformers less than 125 kVA
in calculations.
b. Where reasonable, study preparer may assume a maximum clearing time of two
seconds in accordance with IEEE 1584,provided that the conditions are such that a
worker's egress from an arc flash event would not be inhibited.
c. For single-phase systems, study preparer to perform calculations assuming three-
phase system in accordance with IEEE 1584,yielding conservative results.
3. For equipment with main devices mounted in separate compartmentalized sections,
perform calculations on both the line and load side of the main device.
4. Analyze alternate scenarios considering conditions that May result in maximum
incident energy, including but not limited to:
a. Maximum and minimum utility fault currents.
b. Maximum and minimum motor contribution.
c. Known operating modes (e.g.utility as source, generator as source,
utility/generator in parallel,bus tie breaker open/close positions).
G. Study Reports:
26 0573 / 4 of 7
1. General Requirements:
a. Identify date of study and study preparer.
b. Identify study methodology and software product(s)used.
c. Identify scope of studies, assumptions made, implications of possible alternate
scenarios, and any exclusions from studies.
d. Identify base used for per unit values.
e. Include single-line diagram and associated input data used for studies; identify
buses on single-line diagram as referenced in reports, and indicate bus voltage.
f. Include conclusions and recommendations.
2. Short-Circuit Study:
a. For each scenario, identify at each bus location:
i. Calculated maximum available symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents
(both three-phase and line-to-ground where applicable).
ii. Fault point X/R ratio. •
iii. Associated equipment short circuit current ratings.
b. Identify locations where the available fault current exceeds the equipment short
circuit current rating,along with recommendations.
3. Protective Device Coordination Study:
a. For each scenario, include time-current coordination curves plotted on log-log
scale graphs.
b. For each graph include(where applicable):
i. Partial single-line diagram identifying the portion of the system illustrated.
ii. Protective Devices: Time-current curves with applicable tolerance bands for
each protective device in series back to the source,plotted up to the maximum
available fault current at the associated bus.
iii. Conductors: Damage curves.
iv. Transformers: Inrush points and damage curves.
v. Generators: Full load current, overload curves,decrement curves, and short
circuit withstand points.
vi. Motors: Full load current, starting curves, and damage curves.
vii. Capacitors: Full load current and damage curves.
c. For each protective device, identify fixed and adjustable characteristics with
available ranges and recommended settings.
i. Circuit Breakers: Include long time pickup and delay,short time pickup and
delay,and instantaneous pickup.
ii. Include ground fault pickup and delay.
iii. Include fuse ratings.
' 26 0573/ 5of7
iv. Protective Relays: Include currentlpotential transformer ratios, tap, time dial,
and instantaneous pickup.
d. Identify cases where either full selective coordination or adequate protection is not
achieved, along with recommendations.
• 4. Arc Flash and Shock Risk Assessment:
a. For each scenario, identify at each bus location:
i. Calculated incident energy and associated working distance.
ii. Calculated arc flash boundary.
iii. Bolted fault current.
iv. Arcing fault current.
v. Clearing time.
vi. Arc gap distance.
b. For purposes of producing arc flash hazard warning labels,summarize the
maximum incident energy and associated data reflecting the worst case condition
of all scenarios at each bus location.
c. Identify locations where the calculated maximum incident energy exceeds 40
calories per sq cm.
d. Include recommendations for reducing.the incident energy at locations where the
calculated maximum incident energy exceeds 12 calories per sq cm.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Study Preparer Qualifications: Professional electrical engineer licensed in the State in
which the Project is located and with minimum five years experience in the preparation of
studies of similar type and complexity using specified computer software.
1. Study preparer may be employed by the manufacturer of the electrical distribution
equipment.
2. Study preparer may be employed by field testing agency.
B. Computer Software for Study Preparation: Use the latest edition of commercially available
software utilizing specified methodologies.
1. Acceptable Software Products:
a. ETAP/Operation Technology,Inc: www.etap.com/#sle.
b. SKIM Systems Analysis,Inc: www.skm.com/#sle.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 ARC FLASH HAZARD WARNING LABELS
A. Provide warning labels complying with ANSI Z535.4 to identify arc flash hazards for each
work location analyzed by the arc flash and shock risk assessment.
1. Nominal Size: 4 by 6 inches.
2. Legend: Provide custom legend in accordance with NFPA 70E based on equipment-
specific data as determined by arc flash and shock risk assessment.
26 0573 / 6 of 7
a. Include orange header that reads "WARNING"where calculated incident energy is
less than 40 calories per square cm.
b. Include red header that reads "DANGER" where calculated incident energy is 40
calories per square cm or greater.
c. Include the text"Arc Flash and Shock Hazard;Appropriate PPE Required" or
approved equivalent.
d. Include the following information:
i. Arc flash boundary.
ii. Available incident energy and corresponding working distance.
iii. Nominal system voltage.
iv. Limited approach boundary.
v. Restricted approach boundary.
vi. Equipment identification.
vii. Date calculations were performed.
viii. Identify immediate upstream protection device.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install arc flash warning labels in accordance with Section 26 0553.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B. Adjust equipment and protective devices for compliance with studies and recommended
settings.
C. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from studies. Obtain direction before
proceeding.
3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
END OF SECTION
26 0573/ 7 of 7
SECTION 26 2416
PANELBOARDS
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Lighting and appliance panelboards.
B. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0529 -Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 4300 -Surge Protective Devices.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS W-C-375 -Circuit Breakers,Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service;Federal
Specification;Revision E,2013.
B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction;2010.
C. NECA 407- Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards;2009.
D. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.
E. NEMA PB 1 -Panelboards; 2011.
F. NEMA PB 1.1 -General Instructions for Proper Installation,Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less;2013.
G. NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2013.
H. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
I. UL 50-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
J. UL 50E-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
K.. UL 67-Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L. UL 489 -Molded-Case Circuit Breakers,Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
M. UL 869A-Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition,Including All
Revisions.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork,piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
262416/ 1 of
3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of
flush-mounted panelboards where indicated.
4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
5. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions,voltage,main bus
ampacity,overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes,short circuit current ratings,
conduit entry locations,conductor terminal information, and installed features and
accessories.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment
with all required clearances indicated.
2. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or,
where acceptable,series rated systems.
3. Include documentation of listed series ratings.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual
installed circuiting arrangements.
D. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect,handle,and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NECA 407.
B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,water, construction debris, and
traffic.
C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
panelboard internal components, enclosure,and finish.
26 2416/ 2of6
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.
B. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.coni.
C. Schneider Electric;,Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.
D. Siemens Industry,Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.
E. Source Limitations: Fumish panelboards and associated components produced by the same
manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and
obtained from a single supplier.
2.2 PANELBOARDS -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
•
A. Provide products listed, classified,and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
B. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1.' Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available
fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings.
2. Listed series ratings are acceptable, except where not permitted by motor contribution
according to NFPA 70.
3. ' Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70.
C. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service
equipment according to UL 869A.
D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the
installation.
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.
F. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.
1. Provide fully rated neutral bus,with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit
requiring a neutral connection.
2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard,with a suitable lug
for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
G. Conductor Terminations:. Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250,and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL
50E.
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250:Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean,Dry Locations: Type 1.
2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
3. Fronts:
a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.
26 2416/ 3of6
b. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including
bussing,connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
I
J. Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective
devices are provided in accordance with Section 26 4300, list and label panelboards as a
complete assembly including surge protective device.
K. Load centers are not acceptable.
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch
circuit type,circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, •
configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.
B. Conductor Terminations:
1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or
copper conductors.
2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C. Bussing:
1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective
devices.
2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Aluminum.
3. Ground Bus Material: Aluminum.
D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.
E. Enclosures:
1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.
2. Fronts: Provide lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent
protective device handles without exposing live parts.
3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.
2.4 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
•
A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle,trip-free,trip-indicating
circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS
W-C-375 where applicable; ratings,configurations, and features as indicated on the
drawings.
2. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short
circuit current rating indicated,but not less than:
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less
than the short circuit current rating indicated.
26 2416/ 4of6
c. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with
upstream devices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit
current rating indicated.
3. Conductor Terminations:
a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.
b. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper
conductors.
4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole,furnish thermal inverse time
tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element
for short circuit protection.
5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
6. Provide listed switching duty rated circuit breakers with SWD marking for all branch
circuits serving fluorescent lighting.
7. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
8. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers.
9. Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by
NFPA 70.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
• B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are
consistent with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.
D: Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.
D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
E. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.
F. Install panelboards plumb.
G. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps
and rough opening completely covered.
H. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit
breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.
I. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted
panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.
26 2416/ 5of6
J. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
K. Install all field-installed branch devices, components,and accessories.
L. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section
7.6.1.1.Tests listed as optional are not required.
C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated
components.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
26 2416/ 6of6
SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
i
A. Wall switches.
B. Receptacles.
C. Wall plates.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0533.16-Boxes.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
B. NECA 130- Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices;2010.
C. NEMA WD 1 -General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (R 2010).
D. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Devices-Dimensional Specifications;2012.
E. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. UL 20- General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
G. UL 498 -Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork,furniture, equipment, etc.
installed under other sections or by others.
2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements
of actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face
block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.
4. Notify Engineer of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. GFCI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
26 2726/ 1 of 4
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.
B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.
C. Pass&Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us
2.2 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS
A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.
B. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for
receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
C. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks.
2.3 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES .
A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wiring Devices,Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with white nylon wall plate.
C. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof
cover.
2.4 WALL SWITCHES
A. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap
switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and
listed as complying with UL 20;types as indicated on the drawings.
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding
clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
2. Switches for use outdoor shall be suitable for wet locations.
B. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade,20 A, 120/277 V with standard
toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole
single throw,three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.
2.5 RECEPTACLES
A. Receptacles-General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and
NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498; types as indicated on the drawings.
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp
for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.
B. Convenience Receptacles:
1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade,20A, 125V,
NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings.
2. Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade,20A,
125V,NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL
498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or
duplex as indicated on the drawings.
C. GFCI Receptacles:
26 2726/ 2 of 4 •
1. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex,20A,
125V,NEMA 5-20R,rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather
resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in
damp or wet locations.
2.6 WALL PLATES
A. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum or thermoplastic,with
hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet
locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and
are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify that final surface fmishes are complete,including painting.
E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection
to wiring devices.
F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and,where applicable,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for
installation of wiring devices provided under this section.
C. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes as required for installation of wiring devices provided
under this section.
1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated,as follows:
a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.
b. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.
2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge
of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise,notify Engineer to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
D. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install permanent bather between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent
devices exceeds 300 V.
F. Where required,connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long.Do not
connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
26 2726/ 3 of 4
G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal
and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use
push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.
H. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
I. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not
use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.
• J. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
K. Install wall switches with OFF position down.
L. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on bottom and horizontally
mounted receptacles with grounding,pole on left.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each wiring device for damage and detects.
B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation.
C. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.
D. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's
instructions.
E. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt,paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
26 2726/ 4 of 4
SECTION 26 2813
FUSES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Fuses.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 2816.16-Enclosed Switches: Fusible switches.
B. Section 26 2913 -Enclosed Controllers: Fusible switches.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA FU 1 -Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses;2012.
B. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
C. UL 248-1 -Low-Voltage Fuses-Part 1: General Requirements; Current Edition,Including
All Revisions.
D. UL 248-4-Low-Voltage Fuses-Part 4: Class CC Fuses; Current Edition,Including All
Revisions.
E. E.UL 248-12 -Low-Voltage Fuses-Part 12: Class R Fuses; Current Edition,Including All
Revisions.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
I I
1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for
compatibility with indicated fuses.
a. Fusible Enclosed Switches: See Section 26 2816.16.
b. Fusible Switches for Enclosed Motor Controllers: See Section 26 2913.
2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and
nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed.
3. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current
ratings, interrupting ratings,time-current curves, and current limitation curves.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Bussmann, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.
I i
26 2813 / 1 of 2
B. Littelfuse, Inc: www.littelfuse.com.
C. Mersen: ep-us.mersen.com.
2.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Service Entrance:
1. Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RK1, time-delay.
B. Feeders:
1. Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RKI,time-delay.
C. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time-delay.
D. Primary Protection for Control Transformers: Class CC, time-delay.
2.3 FUSES
A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide fuses for all fusible equipment as
required for a complete operating system. .
C. Provide fuses of the same type,rating, and manufacturer within the same switch.
D. Comply with UL 248-1.
E. Unless otherwise indicated,provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1,
Class and ratings as indicated.
F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.
G. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12.
H. Class CC Fuses: Comply with UL 248-4.
I. Provide the following accessories where indicated or where required to complete
installation:
1. Fuseholders: Compatible with indicated fuses.
2. Fuse Reducers: For adapting indicated fuses to permit installation in switch designed
for fuses with larger ampere ratings.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's
recommendations and nameplate data for equipment.
B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized.
B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer,type, and size are easily read.
C. Identify fuses installed in each device (Size and Type)with a label on the inside of the
device with a label in accordance with Section 26 0553. '
END OF SECTION
26 2813/ 2of2
I SECTION 26 2816.16
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Enclosed safety switches.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0526-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0529-Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Identification
products and requirements.
D. Section 26 2813 -Fuses.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction;2010.
B. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum);2014.
C. NEMA KS 1 -Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum);
2013.
D. NETA ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems;2013.
E. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. UL 50-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition,Including All Revisions.
G. UL 50E-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment,Environmental Considerations; Current
_ Edition,Including All Revisions.
H. UL 98 -Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
I. UL 869A-Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition,Including All
Revisions.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork,piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
within working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
4. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
26 2816.16/ 1 of 4
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed
switches and other installed components and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions,voltage and current ratings,
short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information,and _
installed features and accessories.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of enclosed switches and adjacent
equipment with all required clearances indicated.
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
•
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com.
B. General Electric Company: www.geindustrial.com.
C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us.
D. Siemens Industry,Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.
E. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed switches and associated components produced by the
same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and
obtained from a single supplier.
2.2 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as
complying with UL 98;heavy duty;ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the
drawings.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Unless otherwise indicated,provide products suitable for continuous operation under the
following service conditions:
1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.
2. Ambient Temperature: Between-22 degrees F and 104 degrees F.
D. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load,
E. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.
F. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Minimum Ratings:
a. Heavy Duty Single Throw Switches Protected by Class R, Clads J, Class L, or
Class T Fuses: 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
262816.16/ 2of4
G. Enclosed Safety Switches Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use
as service equipment according to UL 869A.
H. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.
I. Fuse•Clips for Fusible Switches: As required to accept fuses indicated..
1. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed,provide rejection feature to prevent
installation of fuses other than Class R.
J. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
K. Provide insulated,groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection
is required,with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor.
L. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch,with a
suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.
M. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL
50E.
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
N. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position
with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.
O. Heavy Duty Switches:
1. Comply with NEMA KS 1.
2. Conductor Terminations:
a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.
b. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper
conductors.
3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position,
capable of accepting three padlocks.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated
requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
262816.16/ 3of4
D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E. Install enclosed switches plumb.
F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply,mount
enclosed switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79
, inches above the floor or working platform.
G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
H. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 for fusible switches as indicated or as
required by equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Identify enclosed switches in accordance with Section 26 0553.
3.3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.
C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or
associated components.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings. _
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
•
262816.16/ 4of4
SECTION 26 2923
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Variable frequency controllers.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Identification
products and requirements.
B. Section 26 2813 -Fuses.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA ICS 7.1 -Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection,Installation,
and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems;2006.
B. NEMA ICS 7-Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable-Speed Drives;2006.
C. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum);2014.
D. NETA ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2013.
E. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size,ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and
enclosure details.
- B. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions and
weights shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling,protection,
examination,preparation, and installation of product.
D. Operation Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include instructions for starting and operating
controllers, and describe operating limits that may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions.
E. Maintenance Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include routine preventive maintenance schedule.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL)and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt,water, construction debris, and
traffic.
26 2923 / 1 of 4
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Variable Frequency Motor Controllers:
1. ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.
2. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.
3. Rockwell Automation,Inc.;Allen-Bradley Products:
ab.rockwellautomation.com/#sle.
4. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.
5. Siemens Industry,Inc: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle.
B. Source Limitations: Furnish variable frequency motor,controllers and associated
components produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.
C. Gould: Compatible with the pump as provided by the pump manufacturer.
D. Substitutions: Substitution will only be allow where specifically approved by the pump
manufacturer as compatible with the pump for this application and length of cable between
the pump and the drive.
•2.2 DESCRIPTION -
A. Variable Frequency Controllers: Enclosed controllers suitable for operating the indicated
loads, in conformance with requirements of NEMA ICS 7. Select unspecified features and
options in accordance with NEMA ICS 3.1.
1. Employ microprocessor-based inverter logic isolated from power circuits.
2. Employ pulse-width-modulated inverter system.
3. Design for ability to operate controller with motor disconnected from output.
4. Have LCD display with keypad for adjustmet of settings.
5. Have Three(3)programmable analog(4-20mA)inputs for speed setting and other
monitoring functions. ,
6. Have two (2)programmable analog(4-20mA) outputs,one programmed for speed
' output.
7. Have dry contacts for run and fault indication. s
8. Have two (2)programmable digital inputs.
9. Have Dual-port EtherNet/IP for communication suitable for Modbus protocal and
shall include all necessary hardware and drivers.
10. Controls outputs and manage status information locally within the drive, allowing
operation of the drive independently or complementary to supervisory contro
B. Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 1, suitable for equipment application.'
C. Controls outputs and manages status information locally within the drive, allowing you to
operate the drive independently'or complementary to supervisory contro
D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.3 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS
26 2923 / 2 of 4
' A. Rated Input Voltage: 480 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz.
B. Motor Nameplate Voltage: 460 volts,three phase, 60 Hertz.
C. Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and 0.95,lagging, over entire range of operating
speed and load.
D. Operating Ambient: 0 degrees C to 40 degrees C.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate output voltage, output frequency,and
output current.
B. Status Indicators: Separate indicators for overcurrent,overvoltage, ground fault,
overtemperature, and input power ON.
C. Furnish HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch and manual speed control.
D. Control Power Source: Integral control transformer.
E. Door Interlocks: Furnish mechanical means to prevent opening of equipment with power
connected, or to disconnect power if door is opened; include means for defeating interlock
• by qualified persons.
F. Safety Interlocks: Furnish terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both
manual and automatic mode.
G. Disconnecting Means: Include integral fused disconnect switch on the line side of each
controller.
H. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Shop inspect and perform standard productions tests for each controller.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation.
B. Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service
conditions required by the manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NEMA ICS 7.1 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.
C. Provide fuses in fusible switches;refer to Section 26 2813 for product requirements.
D. Program the drive to operate as indicated to respond to the external input indicated.
E. Set overloads in drive base and nameplate ratings of motors to be controlled.
F. Identify variable frequency controllers in accordance with Section 26 0553.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide the service of the manufacturer's field representative to prepare and start
controllers.
26 2923 / 3 of 4
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. -
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.17. The insulation-resistance
test on control wiring listed as optional is not required.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Make final adjustments to installed controller to assure proper operation of load system.
Obtain performance requirements from installer of driven loads.
3.5 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstrate operation of controllers in automatic and manual modes.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
B. Provide service and maintenance of controllers for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
26 2923 / 4 of 4
•
SECTION 26 3600
TRANSFER SWITCHES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Transfer switches for low-voltage (600 V and less) applications and associated accessories:
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0526-Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0529-Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. •
C. Section 26 0553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS: Identification
products and requirements.
D. Section 26 3213 -Engine Generators: For interface with fransfer switches.
1. Includes additional testing requirements.
2. Includes related demonstration and training requirements.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
B. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.
C. NEMA ICS 10 Part 1 -Industrial Control and Systems Part 1: Electromechanical AC
Transfer Switch Equipment; 2005.
D. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
E. UL 1008-Transfer Switch Equipment; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate compatibility of transfer switches to be installed with work provided
under other sections or by others.
2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork,piping,
equipment,or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances required by NFPA 70.
3. Coordinate arrangement of equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
4. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.
5. Notify Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each
product,including ratings,configurations, dimensions, finishes,weights, service condition
requirements, and installed features.
1. Where applicable,include characteristic trip curves for overcurrent protective devices
upon request.
26 3600/ 1 of 5
•
1
B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations of
system components,required clearances, and field connection locations. Include system
interconnection schematic diagrams showing all factory and field connections. —i
1. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are based on testing
with specific overcurrent protective devices or time durations; indicate short-time _
ratings where applicable. =
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
, use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,handling, -
protection, examination,preparation, installation,and operation of product.
D. Manufacturer's detailed field testing procedures.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on system operation,
equipment programming and setup,replacement parts, and recommended maintenance
procedures and intervals.
1. Include contact information for entity that will be providing contract maintenance and
trouble call-back service. ,
F. Executed Warranty:,Submit documentation of final executed warranty completed in -
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
G. Maintenance contracts.
H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of system components, installed
circuiting arrangements and routing, and final equipment settings. -
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE • -
A. Comply with the following: -
1. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code).
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide minimum two year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due to -
defective materials or workmanship.
2. PRODUCTS '
2.1 MANUFACTURES
A. , Transfer Switches: . -
•
1. ABB/GE: www.geindustrial.com/#sle.
2. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle.
3: Russelectric:www.russelectric.com -
4. Thomson Power Systems: www.thomsonps.com/#sle.. . •
_
B. Substitutions: Not permitted. . .
I
2.2 TRANSFER SWITCHES •
•
26'3600/ 2 of 5
A. Provide complete power transfer system consisting of all required equipment, conduit,
boxes,wiring, supports, accessories,system programming,etc. as necessary for a complete
operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.
B. Provide products listed,classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Applications:
1. Utilize open transition transfer unless otherwise indicated or required.
D. Construction Type: Only "contactor type" (open contact)transfer switches are acceptable.
Do not use "breaker type" (enclosed contact)transfer switches.
E. Automatic Transfer Switch:
1. Transfer Switch Type: Automatic transfer switch.
2. Transition Configuration: Delayed-transition(with neutral position).
3. Voltage: As indicated on the drawings. •
4. Ampere Rating: 225 amps minimum.
5. Neutral Configuration: Switched neutral.
6. Load Served: As indicated on the drawings.
-- , 7. Primary Source: As indicated on the drawings.
8. Alternate Source: As indicated on the drawings.
F. Comply with NEMA ICS 10 Part 1,'and list and label as complying with UL 1008 for the
classification of the intended application (e.g. emergency, optional standby).
G. Do not use double throw safety switches or other equipment not specifically designed for
power transfer applications and listed as transfer switch equipment.
H. Load Classification: Classified for total system load(any combination of motor,electric
discharge lamp,resistive;and tungsten lamp loads with tungsten lamp loads not exceeding
30 percent of the continuous current rating)unless otherwise indicated or required.
I. Switching Methods:
1. Delayed Transition:
a. Provide break-before-make transfer with programmable time delay in a neutral
position not connected to either source, and with interlocks to prevent
simultaneous connection of the load to both sources.
2. Neutral Switching: Either simultaneously switched neutral(break-before-make)or
overlapping neutral (make-before-break) methods are acceptable.
3. Obtain control power for transfer operation from line side of source to which the load
is to be transferred.
J. Service Conditions: Provide transfer switches suitable for continuous operation at indicated
ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
K. Enclosures:
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250:Unless:otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R or Type 4.
26 3600/ 3of5
2. Provide lockable door(s).
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
L. Short Circuit Current Rating:
I. Withstand and Closing Rating: Provide transfer switches,when protected by the
supply side overcurrent protective devices to be installed,with listed withstand and
closing rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as
determined by short circuit study.
2. Short Time Rating: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated,provide
transfer switches with short time ratings suitable for the maximum short time delay
setting of the supply side overcurrent protective device.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of transfer switches are consistent with the
indicated requirements.
C. Verify that rough-ins for field connections are in the proper locations.
D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transfer switches.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E. Install transfer switches plumb and level.
F. Unless otherwise indicated,mount floor-mounted transfer switches on properly sized 3 inch
high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
H. Identify transfer switches and associated system wiring in accordance with Section 26
0553.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and
assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's detailed testing procedures and field
reports with submittals.
B. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Provide additional inspection and testing as required for completion of associated engine
generator testing as specified in Section 26 3213.
D. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation,and retest until entire system complies
with contract documents.
26 3600/ 4 of 5
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt,paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.
3.5 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of transfer
switches.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of four hours of training concurrent with generator training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
4. Location: At project site.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed transfer switches from subsequent construction operations.
3.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide to Owner at no extra cost, a separate maintenance contract for the service and
maintenance of transfer switches for two years from date of Substantial Completion;
Include a complete description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination,
adjustment, inspection, and testing,with a detailed schedule.
B. Conduct site visit at least once every three months to perform inspection, testing,and
preventive maintenance. Submit report to Owner indicating maintenance performed along
with evaluations and recommendations.
C. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner:
1. Provide on-site response within 4 hours of notification.
2. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost
to Owner.
3. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly
basis,based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly
rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract.
D. Maintain an on-site log listing the date and time of each inspection and call-back visit,the
condition of the system, nature of the trouble,correction performed, and parts replaced.
END OF SECTION
26 3600/ 5 of 5
SECTION 26 5100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Interior luminaires.
B. Building Mounted Exterior luminaires.
C. Ballasts and drivers.
D. Luminaire accessories.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0533.16-Boxes.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IES LM-63 -IESNA Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and
Related Information;2002 (Reaffirmed 2008).
B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction;2010.
C. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems;2006.
D. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; 2006.
E. NEMA 410 -Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with
Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts;2011.
F. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code;Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
• Jurisdiction,Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
G. UL 1598 -Luminaires; Current Edition,Including All Revisions.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other
sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc.
required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims
with mounting surfaces at installed locations.
2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork,piping,
equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system'components, and other potential
conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Notify Engineer of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product
of the manufacturer.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
detailed information on luminaire construction,dimensions,ratings,finishes,mounting
requirements, listings,service conditions,photometric performance, installed accessories,
26 5100/ 1 of 3
•
and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all
proposed features.
1. ' Provide electronic files of photometric data certified by a National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program(NVLAP) lab independent testing agency in
IES LM-63 standard format for proposed substitutions. •
C. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any
associated remote components.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
•
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized'by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. PRODUCTS • I
2.1 GENERAL
. l
A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
•
2.2 LUMINAIRES
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598,where applicable.
C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D. Unless otherwise indicated,provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,
ballasts,reflectors, lenses,housings and other components required to position, energize
and protect the lamp and distribute the light.
E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded,provide all required conduit,boxes,wiring, .
connectors,hardware,supports,trims, accessories,'etc. as necessary for a complete
operating system.
F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation,and service without
any damage,distortion, corrosion, fading,discoloring, etc.
•
2.3 . BALLASTS AND DRIVERS
A. Ballasts/Drivers-General Requirements:
1. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current
applicable federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.
2. 2Electronic Ballasts/Drivers: Inrush currents not exceeding peak currents specified in
NEMA 410.
2.4 ACCESSORIES •
A. Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-plated steel,minimum 1/4" size,field-
painted as directed.
3. EXECUTION .
3.1 EXAMINATION -
26. 5100/ 2 of 3
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and
are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.
D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection
to luminaires.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for
installation of luminaires provided under this section.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500
(commercial lighting)and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
E. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent
luminaires.
F. Suspended Luminaires:
1. Install using the suspension method indicated,with support lengths and accessories as
required for specified mounting height.
G. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to
center of luminaire.
H. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
I. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
J. Install lamps in each luminaire.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each product for damage and defects.
B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
C. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or
replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Engineer.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting),NECA 502 (industrial
lighting),and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints,paint, or other foreign
material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.
END OF SECTION
26 5100/ 3of3
SECTION 33 0523
HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work: Furnish and install underground utilities using the horizontal directional
drilling(HDD)method of installation, also commonly referred to as directional boring or
guided horizontal boring for pressure pipe. This Work shall include all piping services,
equipment,materials, and labor for the complete and proper installation,testing,restoration
of underground utilities,and environmental protection and restoration.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Directional Drilling Contractor or Subcontractor shall have a minimum of 4-years
experience constructing water,wastewater, or reclaimed water.Experience to include
pipelines of the same or larger diameter and the same or greater lengths.
2. The Contractor's operations shall be in conformance with the Plastic Pipe Institute
•
(PPI)TR-46 "Guidelines for Use of Mini-Horizontal Directional Drilling for
Placement of High Density Polyethylene Pipe" and the pipe manufacturer's guidelines
and recommendations.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be provided to the Engineer for review and acceptance prior to
construction in accordance with the County's General Construction Standards.
1. Work Plan
2. Pipe
3. Joining procedure
4. Training and experience of directional boring machine operator
5. Directional drilling equipment Specifications including calibration records
6. Proposed deviations from design
B. Prior to beginning Work,the Contractor must submit a work plan to the Engineer detailing
the procedure and schedule to be used to execute the Project. The Work plan should
include the following:
1. A description of all equipment to be used
2. Down-hole tools
3. A list of personnel and their qualifications and experience
4. List of Subcontractors
5. An environmental protection plan
6. Contingency plans for possible problems
C. Equipment
1. The Contractor will submit specifications on directional drilling equipment to be used
to ensure that the equipment will be adequate to complete the Project. Equipment
shall include but not be limited to the following:
33 0523 / 1 of 5
a. Drilling rig
b. Mud system
c. Down-hole tools
d. Guidance,system
e. Rig safety systems •
f. Data logger
D. Records
1. Contractor shall submit record drawings in accordance with specification 01 7000
Closeout Procedures.
2. Fusion results for all field joints shall be provided at the Engineer's request, for
review prior to substantial completion.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The directional drilling equipment shall consist of the following: '
1. A directional drilling rig of sufficient capacity to perform the bore and pullback
operations.
2. A drilling fluid mixing and delivery system of sufficient capacity to complete the
installation.
3. A guidance system to accurately guide boring operations.
4. A vacuum truck of sufficient capacity to handle the drilling fluid volume.
B. All equipment shall be in good, safe operating condition with sufficient supplies,materials,
and spare parts on hand to maintain the system in proper working order and minimize
delays to construction operations.
2.2 DRILLING SYSTEM
A. The directional drilling machine shall consist of a hydraulically powered system to rotate, ---
push, and pull hollow drill pipe into the ground at a variable angle.while delivering a
pressurized fluid mixture to a guidable drill (bore)head. The machine shall be anchored to
the ground, if required to withstand the pulling,pushing, and rotating pressure to complete
the installation. The hydraulic power system shall be self-contained with sufficient
pressure and volume to power drilling operations. Hydraulic system shall be free of leaks.
The rig shall be grounded during drilling and pullback operations. There shall be a system
to detect electrical current from the drilling string and an audible alarm that automatically
sounds when an electrical current is detected.
2.3 PIPE
A. Pipe shall be High Density Polyethylene(HDPE) in accordance with specification 33 1000
Water Utilities.
B. HDPE Pipe
1. HDPE pipe shall have a maximum dimension ratio of DR 11, and minimum pressure
class PC 160 psi.
33 0523 / 2 of 5
2. HDPE pipe shall have been continuously marked by the manufacturer with
permanent printing indicating at a minimum the following:
' a. Nominal size(inches) •
b. Dimension ratio(DR)
c. Pressure rating(psi)
d. Material classification(PE 3408)
e. Plant, extruder, and operator codes
f. Resin supplier code
g. Date produced
3. HDPE pipe shall be black in color with permanent colored stripes extruded into the
pipe length or shall be 1 solid-color,per the applicable service.
a. Water:Blue
4. Installation Curvature
a. The pipeline curvature shall not exceed the minimum radius as defined by the pipe
manufacturer.
2.4 TRACER WIRE
A. Tracer wire shall be installed per specification 33 1000 Water Utilities.
2.5 DRILLING FLUIDS
A. Drilling fluids shall consist of a mixture of potable water and gel-forming colloidal
material,such as bentonite or a polymer surfactant mixture producing a slurry of custard-
like consistency.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
A. Responsible representatives of the Contractor and Subcontractor(s)shall be present at all
times during directional drilling operations. A responsible representative as specified
herein is defined as a person experienced in the type of work being performed and who has
the authority to represent the Contractor in a routine decision-making capacity concerning
the manner and method of carrying out the Work.,
B. The Contractor and Subcontractor(s) shall have sufficient number of competent workers on
the Project at all times to ensure the utility placement is made in a timely, satisfactory
manner. Adequate personnel for carrying out all phases of the directional drilling operation
• (where applicable: tunneling system operators,operator for removing spoil material, and
laborers as necessary for various related tasks)must be on the job site at the beginning of
Work. A competent and experienced supervisor representing the Contractor or
Subcontractor that is thoroughly familiar with the equipment and type of work to be
performed,must be in direct charge and control of the operation at all times. In all cases,
the supervisor must be continually present at the project site during the directional drilling
operation.
3.2 WORK PLAN
33 0523 / 3 of 5
A. Work plan should be comprehensive,realistic,and based on actual working conditions for
this particular Project. Plan should document the requirements to complete the Project.
1. Calibration records for guidance equipment shall be included. Specifications for any
drilling fluid additives that the Contractor•intends to use or might use shall be
submitted.
3.3 COORDINATION OF THE WORK
A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer at least 3-days in advance of starting
Work.
3.4 INSTALLATION
•
A. Erosion and sediment control measures and on-site containers shall be installed to prevent
drilling mud•from spilling out of entry and/or exit pits. Drilling mud shall be disposed of
off-site in accordance with local, state,and federal requirements.
1. No other chemicals or polymer surfactant shall be used in the drilling fluid without -'
written consent of the Engineer and after a determination is made that the chemicals
to be added are not harmful or corrosive to the facility and are environmentally safe.
B. Pilot Hole: Pilot hole shall be drilled on bore path with no deviations greater than± 1-foot
in the horizontal plane and± 1-foot in the vertical plane. In the event that the pilot does
deviate from bore path more than± 1-foot, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. The
Engineer may require the Contractor to pullback and re-drill from the location along bore
path before the deviation: The Contractor shall submit any.proposed deviations from the
design bore path with the submittals. . , •
C. Reaming: Upon successful completion of pilot hole,the Contractor will ream borehole to a
minimum of 25%greater than outside diameter of pipe using the,appropriate tools.
Contractor will not attempt to ream at one time more than the drilling equipment and mud
system are designed to safely handle.
D. Pullback: After successfully reaming borehole to the required diameter,Contractor shall put
the pipe through the borehole. In front of the pipe shall be a swivel and barrel reamer to
compact bore hole walls. Once pullback operations have commenced,operations must
continue without interruption until pipe is completely pulled into borehole.. During
pullback operations, the Contractor shall not apply more than the maximum safe pipe pull
pressure at any time. A break away head rated below the maximum safe pull force shall be
utilized. •
E. The pipe entry area shall be graded to provide support for the pipe to allow free movement
into the borehole. The pipe shall be guided in the borehole to avoid deformation of; or
damage to,the pipe. •
F. If unexpected subsurface conditions are encountered during the bore,the procedure shall be
stopped. The installation shall not continue until the County has been consulted.
G. The pipe shall be pulled back through the borehole using the wet insertion construction
technique. The pipe shall be installed full of water.
H. The pipe shall be installed•in•a manner that does not cause upheaval,settlement, cracking,
movement,or distortion of surface features. • •
I. A boring log shall be kept with horizontal and vertical location of the installation. The
horizontal location of the bore shall be marked in the field during the bore at a minimum of -
50 foot increments and at directional changes. These marks shall include the bore depths.
•
33 0523 / 4of5
The contractor shall locate and record these marks in accordance with the as-built
requirements.
J. The pipe shall be installed at a minimum 3' of cover or greater as indicated on the plans.
3.5 INSPECTION
A. Fusion joining shall include a processor or electronic data recording device capable of
reading and storing the input parameters and the fusion results for later download to a
record file.
3.6 FIELD TESTING
A. Testing of the directionally drilled pipe shall be done in accordance with the Albemarle
County Service Authority Standards.
END OF SECTION
33 0523 / 5 of 5
SECTION 33 1000
WATER UTILITIES
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. All pumps piping,valves, fittings,meters, appurtenances and other products shall conform
to the requirements of the latest edition of the Local Utility Standards.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with all applicable codes and regulations as required by regulatory agencies having
jurisdictions over this Work.
1.3 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM:
A. The Contractor shall make connections to the existing system under a pressure or non-
pressure condition, as indicated, complying with the system owner's requirements for the
time of day such work can be done. The Contractor shall pay all costs associated with the
connections unless otherwise indicated. If the system owner performs the work,the
Contractor shall arrange for the work to be done.
B. Owner's valves and equipment shall be operated only by the Owner.
C. Contractor shall submit for approval dimensioned layout drawings for all flanged ductile
iron pipe. Drawings shall include all fittings,valves, equipment,taps, appurtenances, and
dimensions to locate pipe in buildings.
D. Exposed pipe shall be installed level,plumb and square to building walls and equipment in
accordance with industry standards and practices.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 UNDERGROUND PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Ductile Iron Pipe:
1. Ductile iron pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C151,AWWA C150 and
Rubber-gasket joints shall meet the requirements of AWWA Cl 11 3"through 24"
pipe shall be, at a minimum, class 52 with a working pressure of 350 psi. Pipe shall
have a single cement-mortar lining and a bituminous seal coat conforming to the
requirement of AWWA C104. A minimum of 5%of the pipe furnished shall be
gauged for roundness full length and so marked. Pressure class of pipe shall be
increased if the specific installation warrants it.
B. Polyethylene pipe
1. 3 Inches and Smaller-Pipe shall be manufactured from a PE 3408 resin listed with
the Plastic Pipe Institute(PPI) as TR-4. The resin material will meet the
specifications of ASTM D3350-02 with a cell classification of PE:345464C. Pipe
shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM D2737 (copper tubing size),ASTM
33 1000/ 1 of 15
•
D2239(iron pipe size,controlled inside diameter) and ASTM D 3035 (iron pipe size,
controlled outside diameter).Pipe shall have a pressure class as specified on the
plans.The pipe shall contain no recycled compounds except that generated in the
manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw
material.All pipes shall be suitable for use as pressure conduits, and per AWWA
C901,have nominal burst values of three times the Working Pressure Rating(WPR)
of the pipe. Pipe shall also have the following agency listing of NSF 61.
C. Fittings
• 1. Ductile Iron Fittings
a. Fittings for PVC pipe and DI pipe shall be ductile iron. Ductile iron fittings shall
be in accordance with AWWA C110.No compact fittings are allowed.Pressure
ratings shall be a minimum of 350 psi for fittings 24-inch and smaller and 250 psi
for 30-inch. All fittings shall have a single cement mortar lining on the interior
and a bituminous seal coating on the exterior. Fittings shall have mechanical joints
conforming to the requirements of AWWA C111. Bolts for mechanical joint
fittings shall be high strength,corrosion-resistant low alloy steel with hexagon
nuts having a minimum yield point of 45,000 psi in accordance with AWWA
C111. Mechanical joint bolts shall be torqued with a torque wrench as per
manufacturer's recommendations. '
2. Polyethylene Pipe Fittings
a. Fittings for polyethylene pipe shall be manufactured specifically for the intended
use and be approved by the piping manufacturer to be compatible with their
product. All fittings shall have a working pressure rating equal to or greater than
the pipe, and shall meet all requirements of NSF 61.
b. Butt Fusion Fittings _-
i. Fittings shall be PE3408 HDPE, Cell Classification of 345464C as
determined by ASTM D3350-02, and approved for AWWA use. Butt Fusion
Fittings shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM D3261. Molded&
fabricated fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to the pipe unless
otherwise specified in the plans. Fabricated fittings are to be manufactured
using Data Loggers. Temperature,fusion pressure and a graphic
representation of the fusion cycle shall be part of the quality control records.
All fittings shall be suitable for use as pressure conduits,and per AWWA
C906,shall have a nominal burst values of three and one-half times the
Working Pressure Rating(WPR).
c. Electrofusion Fittings
i. Fittings shall be PE3408 HDPE,Cell Classification of 345464C as determined
by ASTM D3350-02. Electrofusion Fittings shall have a manufacturing
standard of ASTM F1055.Fittings shall have a pressure rating equal to the
pipe. All electrofusion fittings shall be suitable for use as pressure conduits,
and per AWWA C906,have nominal burst values of three and one-half times
the Working Pressure Rating(WPR).
ii. Flanged and Mechanical Joint Adapters-Flanged and Mechanical Joint
Adapters shall be PE 3408 HDPE, Cell Classification of 345464C as
determined by ASTM D3350-02. Flanged and Mechanical Joint Adapters
shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM D3261.
d. Coupling Style Fittings
33 1000/ 2 of 15
. • i. Pipe fittings 2" and smaller may be Dresser style 90, and Ford Meter Products
• Quick Joint or pack joint fittings or approved equal upon approval of the
engineer or owner.
D. Thrust Restraint
1. Contractor to install concrete thrust blocks at all fittings valves and dead ends. Thrust
blocks shall be sized and located as indicated on the thrust block details on the
contract drawings.
2. All pipe fittings,plugs,caps,tees,and bends in underground ductile iron or PVC
piping must be restrained utilizing Megalug Series 1100 retainer glands by EBAA
Iron Sales,Inc.(or approved equal). Glands shall be manufactured of ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A 536-80.Restraining devices shall be of ductile iron heat
• treated to a minimum hardness of 370 BHN. Dimensions of the gland shall be such
that it can he used with the standardized mechanical joint bell and tee-head bolts
conforming to ANSI/AWWA A21.11 and C153/A21.53. Twist-off nuts shall be used
to insure proper actuating of the restraining devices.The mechanical joint restraint
device shall have a working pressure of at least 250 psi with a minimum safety factor
of 2.
3. All ductile iron bell and spigot pipe joints shall be restrained using US Pipe Field Lok
350 type gaskets unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. If all joints are not
required to be restrained the minimum restrained lengths and locations will be
--, indicated on the drawings. Gaskets shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer
to be compatible with their pipe.. •
•
E. Couplings for under ground or buried service shall be ductile iron mechanical joint in
accordance with underground ductile fittings in this section.
2.2 ABOVE GROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING , •
A. Ductile iron pipe
1. Ductile iron pipe installed above ground, inside buildings or underground vaults,
shall be flanged ductile iron pipe class 53 in accordance with ANSI A21.15 (AWWA
• . C 115). Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings pipe shall have Class 125 flanged
joints utilizing factory installed screwed flanges(no uniflange type flanges are
permitted)meeting the requirements of ANSI B 16.1, outside coating shall be red
primer, and gaskets for flanged pipe shall be 1/8"thick full face red rubber. All steel
flanges mating to flat face flanges shall have the raised face machined off. Pipe shall
have a single cement mortar lining with asphaltic seal coat meeting the requirements
forAWWAC104.
B. Ductile Iron Fittings
1. Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall be flanged.ductile iron in accordance with ANSI
A21.10(AWWA CI10). Ductile iron compact fittings, in accordance with ANSI
i A21.53 (AWWA C153),may not be used unless specifically approved by the
Engineer. Fitting's up to 30" diameter shall have a minimum working pressure rating
of 250 psi. Unless indicatedotherwise on the drawings,pipe shall have Class 125
flanged joints meeting the requirements of ANSI B 16.1, outside coating shall be red •
primer, and gaskets for flanged pipe shall be 1/8" thick full face red rubber. Fittings
shall have a single cement-mortar lining and a bituminous seal coat conforming to the
requirement of AWWA C 104.
C. Above Ground CopperTubing
33 1000/ 3 of 15
1. Copper tubing for exposed services shall be seamless,hard copper tubing Type L,in
conformance with ASTM B88. Fittings shall be wrought copper with soldered joints.
Solder shall be 95-5 approved for potable water service.
D. Couplings
1. Couplings for above ground or exposed service shall be Dresser Style 38 or approved
equal. Transition couplings shall be Dresser Style 162 or approved equal. All
couplings shall be rodded unless otherwise noted.
E. Flange adaptors
1. Flange adaptors shall be used where indicated on the drawings or as approved by the
engineer. Flange adaptors may be used as a final connection or to allow for
disassembly of pipe for equipment maintenance in approved locations. Flange
adaptors are not to be used to make up for misaligned pipe.
2. Flanged Adapter shall be JCM flanged coupling adaptors model 30IR or approved
equal.
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Gate valves 3" through 12" shall open counter-clockwise,have a resilient seat and meet the
requirements of AWWA C509. Body shall be of cast iron with a 250 psig maximum
working pressure and hydrostatically tested to 500 psig. Wedge"shall be constructed of cast
iron,bonded in synthetic rubber in accordance with ASTM D2000. Valve shall be coated
inside and out with a fusion epoxy coating of a nominal 10 mil thickness on all exposed
iron surfaces in compliance with AWWA C550 and be NSF 61 certified. Valves shall be
bi-directional flow and have a ten year limited warranty.
1. Above ground valves or exposed valves in vaults shall utilize outside screw and yoke
(OS&Y)with rising stems and have flanged ends meeting the requirements of ANSI
B 16.1, Class 125.
2. Underground valves shall utilize non rising stems,mechanical joint ends with a 2"
operating nut in accordanbe with AWWA C111.
3. Gate valves 3" and larger when located 6ft. or more above the finish floor or
operating platform shall have chain operators.
4. Valves shall be Mueller series 2360, or approved equal.
2.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly valves shall have a ductile iron body, seat in body design, ductile iron disk with a
316 stainless steel disc edge(3" and 4"valves to have 316 disk),symmetrical disc,
nonmetallic bearings,chevron self-adjusting"V"type packing and have a 250 psi working
pressure. Valves shall meet or exceed all the requirements of AWWA C504 standard class
250B and be NSF 61 certified.'Exposed piping shall have flange ends Class 125 and
underground valves shall have mechanical joint ends. Valves 6" and larger shall have gear
. operators. All exposed valves with gear operators shall have a position indicator.
B. Valves shall be Mueller Lineseal XP butterfly valves (class 250B)or approved equal.
2.5 BALL VALVES -ABOVE GROUND
A. Ball valves 2" and smaller shall be 150 lb rated,threaded ends,bronze or stainless steel
body(stainless steel valves are to be used on stainless steel pipe), full port, lever operated,
ball valves,with stainless steel ball and stem, and Teflon seats. Ball valves shall be Crane
figure 9201 (bronze body), 9231(stainless steel) or approved equal.
2.6 CHECK VALVES
33 1000/ 4 of 15
•
A. Swing check valves
1. 3 inch and larger
a. Check valves 3" and larger shall be Class 125 flanged ends ductile iron body
bronze mounted,bronze disc facing,swing type lever and weight check valves in
accordance with AWWA C508. Flanged end dimension and drilling shall comply
with ANSI B 16.1, Class 125. Check valves 3" through 12" shall have a 175 psig
maximum working pressure and a 350 psig test pressure. Check valves 14"
through 24" shall have a 150 psig maximum working pressure and a 300 psig test
pressure.
2. Check valves shall have an adjustable oil decelerator(oil cushion)installed on the
outside of the valve to control valve closing.
3. Check valves 2" and smaller shall be class 150 bronze or stainless steely-pattern
swing check valves with threaded ends. Valves shall be Crane figure 137(bronze),
Crane Aloyco figure 49 or approved equal.
B. Silent check valves
1. Silent check valves shall be the globe type with a spring loaded disk. Valve shall
- have a ductile iron body,bronze plug, 316 stainless steel spring and a working
pressure rating of 250 psig. Valves shall be flanged in accordance with ANSI B 16.1
class 125.Valves shall be APCO globe style series 600, Clow style 636 or approved
equal. Wafer type check valves shall not be permitted.
2.7 ABOVE GROUND OR EXPOSED TAPS
A. All taps on exposed pipe.Flanged pipe or above ground pipe shall be made on fitting
.bosses. No tapping saddles or tapping of pipe will be allowed unless specifically called for
on the drawings.
2.8 AIR RELEASE VALVES
A. Air release valves shall have a minimum of a 1"N.P.T. inlet for pipe sizes 16" and smaller
with a 3/32"minimum size outlet orifice. Valves shall have a cast iron body and cover,
stainless steel float,Buna-N seat,Delrin lever frame-and all other internal part shall be
stainless steel or bronze. Air release valves shall be suitable for 150 psi working pressure at
a minimum.
B. All air release valve installations shall contain an isolation valve to allow removal of the air
release valve while the line is under pressure and a means to manually vent the pipeline
without removal of the air release valve.
2.9 Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer
A. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer assembly shall consist of an internal pressure
differential relief valve located in a zone between two positive seating check modules with
captured springs and silicone seat discs. Service of all internal components shall be through
a single access cover secured with stainless steel bolts. The assembly shall also include two
resilient seated isolation valves,for resilient seated test cocks, a protective bronze wye
strainer with a 20-mesh screen and an air gap drain fitting.
B. The assembly shall meet the requirements of: the latest available American Water works
Association(AWWA)standards including Std. C511;hold current University of Southern
California Foundation for Cross Connection Control and Hydraulic Research(USC)
approval and hold the American Society of Sanitary engineers(ASSE)listing.
C. All RPZ backflow preventers shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
-
331000/ 5of15
D. Shall be a Watts Regulator Co. Series 009QT-S or equal. Size shall be as indicated on the
drawings.
2.10 SAMPLE TAPS
A. All sample taps are to be threadless hose bibs unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
Those indicated to have threads shall be provided with a hose bib vacuum breaker.
2.11 WALL PIPES AND SLEEVES
A. Pipes through concrete walls and slabs shall be provided with wall pipes or penetration
seals. Wall pipes shall comply with cast iron fittings specification and shall have flanged
joint connections unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Penetration seals shall be Link-
Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation of Wayne Michigan,or equal. All
hardware shall be stainless steel. Sleeves inside diameters shall be sized to fit the outside
diameter of the penetrating pipe and the link seal. Sleeves shall be of a thickness to
maintain their shape and shall be manufactured buy the seal manufacturer. All Sleeves
shall have waterstops and be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. Where pipe
penetrations are in existing concrete structures, core drilling is acceptable provided the hole
size is,coordinated with the seal manufacturer.
2.12 PIPE LOCATING DEVICES
A. Tracer wire shall consist of a steel core to which an outer layer of copper has been
metallurgically bonded. The outer layer shall be 30 mils thick high-density polyethylene
(HDPE)insulation. Tracer wire shall be Copperhead Reinforced Tracer Wire or approved
equal. Wire shall be colored blue for water.
B. Wire Connectors
1. Connector,Wire, Set Screw Pressure type for use with No. 10 stranded wire size.
a. Holub Industries MA-2 or equivalent
b. Ideal Industries Model 30-222 or equivalent . -
2. Connector,Wire,C-Tap for two-way splicing of tracer wire for use with No. 10
stranded wire size.
a. -T&B#54705 or equivalent
3. Connector, Wire, Split Bolts-Three-Wire Type for use with No. 12 stranded wire
size.
a. ILSCO Catalog#SEL-2S or equivalent.
4. Electrical Coating- Scotchkote 3M Electrical Coating or equivalent.
a. Scotchkote 3 M Electrical Coating Part No. 054007 •
b. Electric Tape-3M Super 33 +Scotch Brand Premium Vinyl Electrical Tape or
equivalent
5. Wire nuts shall not be allowed underground.
C. Locator Stations
1. Locator stations shall consisted of a specially formulated High Density Polyethylene
post with UVI inhibitors. Color shall be blue for water or as requested by owner.
The station shall provide for the attachment of two tracer wires and a ground wire to
three terminal lugs inside a line marker. The lugs are to be welded to an aluminum
sleeve,which is mounted inside a HDPE post. All locator components shall be
plastic,aluminum, or stainless steel to avoid rusting. Post shall be marked to indicate
it is a locator station.
33 1000/ 6 of 15
" . 2. Locator stations shall be Vulcan H-41 Locator, "Big Fink" manufactured by Cott
Manufacturing Company or approved equal.
D. Marking Tape
1. Tape shall be 3.5 mill polyethylene tape 3" in width,with the continuous printed
message, "Caution-Waterline Buried Below." Tape shall be style 48288 as
manufactured by the Seton Safety and Identification or approved equal
2.13 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Pressure gauges shall be of all stainless steel construction, 3.5 inch case size,accuracy of
I%over the entire dial arch, ''A"NPT bottom connection,Pressure range shall be as
indicated on the drawings.
B. Pressure gages shall be Ashcroft stainless steel-case 1009 pressure gauges or approved
equal.
C. All pressure gages shall be installed with a '''A" stainless steel ball valve and stainless steel
nipples.
D. All pressure gages shall be mounted with fittings or on fitting bosses. NO TAPPING OF
PIPE OR SADDLES WILL BE ALLOWED.
2.14 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Pipes shall be supported by steel pipe hangers,clamps . brackets,rods and inserts as
required to support the imposed pipe loads. Hangers in general shall be new, manufactured
of carbon steel and hot dipped galvanized after fabrication or 304 stainless steel.
B. Pipes 2 'A inches and larger shall be supported with adjustable floorstand type pipe supports
as detailed on the drawings. Pipe supports shall be Standon Model S89 flange support,
Standon Model S96 cradle support as manufactured by Material Resources,Inc. or
approved equal.
C. Pipes 2" and smaller shall be supported from the floor,walls or ceiling depending on the
type of building construction. Pipe supports for these size pipes shall be as manufactured
by Unistrut Building Systems. Supports shall consist of floor stands,wall brackets or
clevis type hangers. Unistrut and appurtenances shall be stainless steel. Clips for copper
tubings shall be copper coated. Minimum threaded rod size shall be 3/8 inch.
D. Ductile Iron and steel pipe supports shall be spaced in accordance with the following
schedule:
Pipe sizes %s-3/4 1- 1 1/4 1 %s-2 3—4 6 8
(inches)
Max spacing 4 6 8 10 12 14
(feet)
E. Copper tubing pipe supports shall be spaced in accordance with the following schedule:
Nominal tubing size %z- 1- 1 1/4 1 %-2
(inches) 3/4
Max spacing(feet) 4 6 8
F. Pipe supports shall be located as per the following:
1. Maximum spacing as indicated above
2. Maximum of 12 inches from all horizontal and vertical changes in direction.
33 1000/ 7 of 15
3. On the suction and discharge of pump piping to eliminate pipe stresses on the pump
flanges.
4. On the connections to all equipment to eliminate pipe stresses on the equipment
connections and allow equipment removal.
5. On the inlet and outlet piping to the water meter to allow the removal of the water
meter.
6. Additional pipe supports as indicated on the drawings
3. EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Water lines shall be laid to lines and grades shown on the drawings with appurtenances and
service connections at required locations. Installation of all materials shall be in strict
conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and AWWA standards.
3.2 SEPARATION OF POTABLE WATER LINES AND SANITARY AND/OR COMBINED
SEWER
A. Follow State Health Department standards for separation of water mains and sewer lines.
B. Parallel Installation:
1. Normal Conditions Water lines shall be constructed at least 10 feet horizontally
from a sewer or sewer manhole whenever possible. The distance shall be measured
edge to edge.
2. Unusual Conditions When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of at
least 10 feet,the water line may be laid closer to a sewer or sewer manhole provided
that:
a. The bottom of the water line is at least 18 inches above the top of the sewer.
b. Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained,the sewer shall be constructed of
AWWA approved water pipe pressure tested in place to 50 psi without leakage
prior to backfilling. The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and
tested in place.
C. Crossing:
1. Normal Conditions: Water lines crossing over sewers shall be laid to provide a
separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the water line and the top of
the sewer whenever possible.
2. Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent the vertical separation described
in crossing,normal conditions, (paragraph above) the following construction shall be
used.
a. Sewers passing over or under water lines shall be constructed of the materials p
described in parallel installation,unusual conditions Paragraph b. above.
b. Water lines passing under sewers shall, in addition,be protected by providing:
i. A vertical separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the sewer
• and the top of the water lines.
ii. That the length of the water line shall be centered at the point of the crossing
so that joints shall be equidistant and as far as possible from the sewer.
33 1000/ 8 of 15
• D. Sanitary and/or combined sewers or sewer manholes No water pipes shall pass through or
come in contact with any part of sewer or sewer manhole.
3.3 EXAMINATION OF MATERIAL:
A. All pipes, fittings,valves and other appurtenances shall be examined carefully for damage
and other defects immediately before installation. Defective materials shall be marked and
held for inspection by the Owner,who may prescribe corrective repairs or reject materials.
3.4 PIPE ENDS:
A. All lumps,blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the socket and plain ends of
each pipe, and the outside of the plain end and the inside of the bell shall be wiped clean
and dry and be free from dirt sand, grit,or any other foreign material before the joint is
made. Proper lubricant shall be used for all push joint pipe.
3.5 PIPE CLEANLINESS:
A. Foreign material shall be prevented from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the
trench. During laying operations, no debris,tools,clothing or other materials shall be
placed in the pipe.
3.6 PIPE PLACEMENT: •
A. Laying of the pipe shall be commenced immediately after the excavation is started, and
every means must be used to keep pipe lying closely behind the trenching as each length of
pipe is placed in the trench,the joint shall be assembled and the pipe brought to correct line
and grade before the next length of pipe is laid. No more than 200 if of trench shall be
opened at any one time. No opened trenches will be allowed at the end of the work day.
B. Lay pipe with bell ends facing the direction of laying. Where grade is 10 percent or greater,
lay pipe uphill with bell ends upgrade.
3.7 PIPE PLUGS:
A. At times when pipe laying is not in progress,the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by a
water tight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. When practical,the plug shall
remain in place until the trench is pumped completely dry. Care must be taken to prevent
pipe flotation should the trench fill with water.
3.8 LAYING CONDITIONS
A. Pipe shall be placed in a dry trench at the proper line and grade.
3.9 PIPE DEFLECTION
A. Permissible deflection in mechanical joint pipe shall not be greater than 1/2 of that listed in
AWWA C600 or as recommended by pipe manufacturer. No joint deflection shall be
allowed in PVC pipe. Radius turn with PVC pipe shall be by bending pipe at 1/2
manufacturers recommended deflection.
3.10 PIPE CUTTING:
A. Cutting of the pipe shall be done in a neat,workmanlike manner with the proper tools
without creating damage to the pipe or cement mortar lining.
3.11 RESTRAINED JOINTS
A. Provide reaction anchors of concrete blocking, metal harness,retainer gland type,restaining
gaskets or restrained joint type pipe at all changes in direction of pressure pipelines and as
shown on Drawings.
B. All mechanical joint bolts shall be torqued with a torque wrench as recommended by the
manufacturer.
33 1000/ 9 of 15
Bolt Size—Inches Torque Ft. -Lbs.
5/8 . 45 - 60
3/4 75 -90
1 100-120
C. Tighten nuts on alternate side of the gland until pressure on the gland is equally distributed
3.12 POLYETHYLENE PIPE INSTALLATION •
A. Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the jobsite above
ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed in strict
accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used
in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the
pipe manufacturer,including,but not limited to, temperature requirements of 400 degrees
Fahrenheit, alignment, and an interfacial fusion pressure of 75 PSI.The butt fusion joining
will produce a joint weld strength equal to or greater than the tensile strength of the pipe
itself. All welds will be made using a Data Logger to record temperature,fusion pressure,
with a graphic representation of the fusion cycle shall be part of the Quality Control __
records.
B. Sidewall fusions for connections to outlet piping shall be performed in accordance with
HDPE pipe and fitting manufacturer's specifications. The heating irons used for sidewall
fusion shall have an inside diameter equal to the outside diameter of the.HDPE pipe being
fused. The size of the heating iron shall be 'A inch larger than the size of the outlet branch
being fused.
C. Mechanical joining will be accomplished by either using a HDPE flange adapter with a
Ductile Iron back-up ring or HDPE Mechanical Joint adapter with a Ductile Iron back-up
ring.
D. Socket fusion,hot gas fusion, threading, solvents, and epoxies will not be used to join
HDPE pipe.
3.13 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES.
A. Install valves with operator stems plumb in the vertical plane. Locate valves where shown
on Drawings.
3.14 TRACER WIRE
A. Wire shall be placed on the top of all underground pipes and attached to the pipe with wire
ties at a minimum of every sixteen(10)feet. Water service connections will have a single
wire attached from the main line wire and terminating in the meter box as close to the
surface as possible. Tracer wire within Meter Boxes will be stripped three-quarter(3/4)
inch from the end and capped with a wire nut to minimize electrical ground contact. All
connections at the main line must be electrically sound and physically secure with screw
connections or clamps. All connections must be taped with electric tape and sealed with an
electrical coating sealant.
3.15 LOCATOR STATIONS
A. Locator Stations shall be installed every 1000 ft long the pipe line and within ten (10)feet
of each fire hydrant. Locator pipe shall be buried in the ground a minimum of 3 ft and be a
minimum of 3 ft above the ground.
3.16 MARKING TAPE
A. Install marking tape in utility trenches above all pipes in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Install tape approximately 18 inches above the pipe and not less than 18
inches deep.
33 1000/ 10 of 15
3.17 TESTING
A. Contractor shall supply water at no cost,for testing potable water lines.
B. Pressure Testing of Water Mains and Pressure Pipe
1. Hydrostatic testing shall be performed in accordance with AWWA C600.
2. After the pipe has been installed, all pipe or any valved section thereof shall be
subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of at least 1.5 times the working pressure or 150
psi which ever is greater, at the lowest point in the system.
3. Test Pressure Restrictions:
a. Test pressures shall: •
i. Not be less than 1.25 times the working pressure or 125 psi which ever is
greater at the highest point along the test section.
ii. Not to exceed pipe or thrust restraint design pressures.
iii. Be of at least 2-hour duration.
iv. Not vary by more than 5 psi for the duration of the test.
v. Not to exceed the rated pressure of the valves,hydrants and appurtenances.
b. Each valved section of pipe shall be filled with water slowly and the specified test
pressure,based on the elevation of the lowest point of the line or section under test
and corrected to the elevation of the test gage, shall be applied by means of a pump
connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
c. Before applying the specified test pressure, air shall be expelled completely from
• the pipe,valves and hydrants. If permanent air vents are not located at all high
points,the Contractor shall install corporation cocks at such points so that the air
can be expelled as the line is filled with water. After all the air has been expelled,
the corporation cocks shall remain closed and be left in place.
d. All exposed pipe, fittings,valves,hydrants, and joints shall be examined carefully
during the test. Any damaged or defective pipe, fittings,valves, or hydrants that
are discovered following the pressure test shall be repaired or eplaced with sound
material and the test shall be repeated until it is satisfactory.
C. Leakage Test For Bell and Spigot and Mechanical Joint Pipe
1. A leakage test shall be conducted concurrently with the pressure test
2. Leakage shall be defined as the quality of water that must be supplied into the newly
installed pipe, or any valved section thereof,to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the
specified test pressure after the air in the pipeline has been expelled and the pipe has
been filled with water. Leakage shall not be measured by a drop in pressure in a test
section over a period of time.
3. No pipe installation will be accepted if the leakage is greater than that determined by
the following formula:
L=SDP
133,200
.in which L is the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; S is the length of pipeline
tested, in feet; D is the nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches;and P is the average
test pressure during the leakage test in pounds per square inch gage.
33 1000/ 11 of 15
4. When testing against closed metal-seated valves,an additional leakage per closed
valve of 0.0078 gallons/hour/inch of nominal valve size shall be allowed.
5. Acceptance shall be determined on the basis of allowable leakage. If any test of pipe
installed discloses leakage greater than that specified above,the Contractor shall, at
his own expense, locate and make repairs as'necessary until the leakage is within the
specified allowance. ALL VISIBLE LEAKS ARE TO BE REPAIRED
REGARDLESS OF THE AMOUNT OF LEAKAGE.
6. Allowable leakage
D. Leakage testing of exposed and above ground pipe
I. ALL JOINTS ARE TO BE WATERTIGHT. THERE SHALL BE NO VISIBLE
LEAKS ALLOWED. ALL LEAKS ARE TO BE REPAIRED.
3.18 DISINFECTION
A. The water used in the disinfection and flushing process shall be potable water from an
approved supply. If water is to be transported to the subject site,then the tank trucks must u
also be properly disinfected prior to transporting water. Disinfection of the vehicle should
also include all appurtenances used such as valves,hoses, etc.
B. Preliminary.Flushing
• 1. The main shall be'flushed prior to disinfection,except when the tablet method is
used. Flushing shall beat a velocity of not less than 3.0 ft./sec. Adequate provisions -
shall be made for drainage of flushing water. Flushing is to be performed only with
the approval of and under the direction of the Town Inspector. The Contractor shall
inspect areas of discharge and provide the necessary equipment to prevent any
environmental damage or,erosion. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
damage that may result from flushing.
C. Form of Chlorine for Disinfection
1. Liquid chlorine shall be used only when suitable equipment is available and only
under the direct supervision of a person familiar with the physiological, chemical, and
physical properties of this element and'who is properly trained and equipped to
. handle any emergency that may arise. Introduction of chlorine-gas directly from the
supply cylinder'is unsafe and shall not be permitted.
2. Calcium hypochlorite contains 70 percent available chlorine by weight. It shall be
either granular or tabular in form. The tablets, 6-8 to the ounce, are designed to
dissolve slowly in water. A chlorine-water solution shall be prepared by dissolving
the granules in water in the proportion requisite for the desired concentration.
3. Sodium hypochlorite is supplied in strengths from 5.25 to 16 percent available
chlorine. The chlorine-water solution shall be prepared by adding hypochlorite to _
•
water. Product deterioration shall be reckoned with in computing the quantity of
sodium hypochlorite required for the desired concentration.
4. Application: The hypochlorite solutions shall be applied to the water main with a •
chemical feed pump designed for feeding chlorine solutions. For small applications
the solutions may be fed with a hand-pump, for example, a hydraulic test pump. Feed
lines shall be of such material and strength as to withstand safely the maximum
pressures that may be created by the pumps. All connections shall be checked for
• tightness before the hypochlorite solution is applied to the main.
D. Methods of Chlorine Application:
1. Continuous Feed Method
33 1000/ 12 of 15
a. Water from the existing distribution system or other approved sources of supply
shall be made to flow at a constant,measured rate into the newly-laid pipeline.
The water shall receive a dose of chlorine,also fed at a constant,measured rate.
The two rates shall be proportioned so that the chlorine concentration in the water
in the pipe is maintained at a minimum of 50 MG/L available chlorine. To assure
that this concentration is maintained, the chlorine residual shall be measured at
intervals not exceeding 2,000 feet in accordance with the procedures described in
the current edition of"Standard Methods" and AWWA M12- "simplified
procedures for water examination." In the absence of a meter, the rate may be
determined either by placing a.pitot gage at the discharge or by measuring the time
to fill a container of known volume. Table 1 gives the time to fill a container of
known volume. Table 1 gives the amount of chlorine required for each 100 ft. of
pipe of various diameters. Solutions of 1 percent chlorine may be prepared with
sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite. The latter solution requires
approximately 1 lb. of calcium hypochlorite in 8.5 gal. of water.
TABLE I
CHLORINE REQUIRED TO PRODUCE 50 MG/L CONCENTRATION
IN 100 FT. OF PIPE-BY DIAMETER
Pipe Size 100 Percent 1 Percent
In. Chlorine Chlorine Solutions
Lb. Gal.
4 0:027 0.33
6 0.061 0.73
• 8 0.108 1.30
10 0.170 2.04
12 0.240 2.88
16 0.430 5.12
20 0.675 8.00
b. During the application of the chlorine,valves shall be manipulated to prevent the
treatment dosage from flowing back into the line supplying the water. Chlorine
application shall not cease until the entire main is filled with the chlorine solution.
The chlorinated water shall be retained in the main for at least 24 hours,during
which time all valves and hydrants in the section treated shall be operated in order
to disinfect the appurtenances. At the end of this 24 hour period, the treated water
shall contain no less than 25 MG/L chlorine throughout the length of the main.
2. Slug Method(Use only if authorized by Utilities Department)
a. Water from the existing distribution system or other approved source of supply
shall be made to flow at a constant,measured rate into the newly laid pipeline.
The water shall receive a dose of chlorine,also fed at a constant,measured rate.
The two rates shall be proportioned so that the concentration in the water entering
• the pipeline is maintained at no less than 300 MG/L. The chlorine shall be applied
continuously and for a sufficient period to develop a solid column or"slug" of
chlorinated water that will, as it passes along the line, expose all interior surfaces
to a concentration of at least 300 MG/L for at least 3 hours. The application shall
be checked at a tap near the upstream end on the line by chlorine residual
measurements.
33 1000/ 13 of 15
b. As the chlorinated water flows past tees and crosses,related valves and hydrants
shall be operated so as to disinfect appurtenances.
3. Tablet Method
a. Use only when scrupulous cleanliness has been exercised because preliminary
flushing cannot be used. Do not use this method if trench water or foreign material
have entered the main or if the water is below 41 degrees F(5 degrees C). This
method may be used for mains up to 12 inches in diameter and where the total
length of the main is less than 2,500 feet. Tablets shall not be used with PVC pipe.
b. Place tablets in each section of pipe and also in hydrants,hydrant branches,and
other appurtenances. Attach tablets using an adhesive that is a NSF 61 listed 1
product. Tablets shall be free of adhesive except on the one broad side to be
attached. Place all tablets at the top of the main. If the tablets are attached before
the pipe section is placed in the trench,mark the position of the tablet in the pipe
and assure that the pipe is placed with the tablet at the top.
c. The following table shows the number of 5 grain WITS tablets necessary per joint
of pipe to obtain 50 PPM chlorine.
Pipe Size Tablets Per 18-20 Ft. Joint
3 in. 1
4 in. 1 p
6 in. 2
8 in. 3
l0 in. 4
12 in. 7
d. When installation is complete,fill the main with water at a velocity of less than 1
foot per second. The water shall remain in the pipe for at least 24 hours. Operate
valves so that the strong chlorine solution will not flow back into the line
supplying the water.
E. Final Flushing: After the applicable retention period,the heavily chlorinated water shall be
flushed from the main.Using a"Neutralization Station",neutralize the waterline until the
chlorine concentration in the water leaving the main is no higher than that generally
prevailing in the system, or less than 1 MG/L. Chlorine residual determination shall be
made to ascertain that the heavily chlorinated water has been removed from the pipeline.
3.19 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTS
A. After final flushing, and before the water main is placed in service,samples shall be
collected and tested for bacteriologic quality and shall show the absence of coliform
organisms. At least two samples shall be collected at least 24 hours apart at intervals not
exceeding 2,000 ft. and tested by the Department of Consolidated Laboratory Services or a
Department of Consolidated Laboratory Services certified laboratory. and the results
submitted to engineer.
B. Samples for bacteriological analysis shall be collected in sterile bottles treated with sodium
thiosulfate. If laboratory results indicate the presence of coliform bacteria, the samples are
unsatisfactory and disinfection shall be repeated until the samples are satisfactory.
Cleaning, disinfection, and testing will be the responsibility of the contractor. Water for
these operations will be furnished by the owner,but the contractor shall include in his bid
the cost of loading,hauling, and discharging the water.
33 1000/ 14 of 15
C. A sampling tap consisting of a corporation cock with metal pipe shall be installed within
two feet of valves. The corporation stop inlet shall be male one inch in size and the outlet
shall have one-inch I.P. threads and a cap.
D. Testing and disinfection of the completed sections shall not relieve the contractor of his
responsibility to repair or replace any cracked or defective pipe. All work necessary to
secure a tight line shall be done at the contractor's expense
END OF SECTION
I
33 1000/ 15 of 15
SECTION 33 2000
WELLS
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Publications listed below form part of this specification to extent referenced in the text by
basic designation only. Consult latest edition of publication unless otherwise noted.
B. American National Std. Institute(ANSI)/American Water Works Assoc. (AWWA)
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
D. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers(IEEE)
E. National Electric Code (NEC)/National Electrical Manufacturers'Assoc. (NEMA)
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Submittals shall include shop drawings, electrical ladder logic drawings, and support
data.
B. Operations and Maintenance Manuals
1. Operation and maintenance instructions must be provided for the pump and control
system and must be specific to equipment supplied in accordance with these
specifications.
C. As-Built Documentation
1. A complete casing and screen location record showing individual lengths of sections
• of casing and screens and the location of packers,plugs, and seals if installed.
1.3 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY
A. The pump manufacturer shall warrant all equipment to be of quality construction, free of
defects in material and workmanship for a period of 18 months from date of installation.A
written warranty shall be furnished to the owner.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 WELL PUMP
A. The pump shall be submersible,vertical deep well turbine style with multiple bowls,
designed and constructed in accordance with AWWA El 01. The pump shall be sized to
meet the design criteria specified on the pump curve shown on the drawings. The pump
shall be designed for continuous or intermittent submerged operation.
B. Pump, column check valve, cable,motor and control panel shall be the single responsibility
of the pump manufacturer and shall be as specified on the drawings,or approved equal.
C. Pump: The pump shall have a discharge housing with integral check valve,protection
against upthrust and motor thrust bearing to absorb downthrust. Each impeller shall be
fitted with a seal ring around its eye or skirt to prevent hydraulic losses. A filter screen
shall be included on the suction inlet assembly.
D. Materials of Construction: the pump bowls, impellers, guide vanes, strainer,and check
valve shall be 304 stainless steel. The pump shaft shall be 431 stainless steel.
33 2000/ 1 of 3
E. Impellers: The impellers shall be the enclosed type and shall be free from defects and must
be accurately cast,machined,balanced, and filed for optimum performance and minimum
vibration.
F. . Submersible Cable: The pump cable shall be sized to limit the voltage drop to no more
than 5%. The cable shall have three separate conductors, and a ground. Each conductor
shall be insulated separately with a synthetic rubber or plastic insulation suitable for
continuous immersion in water and shall be water and oil resistant. The cable should be the
length of the column pipe plus extend from the well plate to pump electrical controller. The
cable should be adequately secured to the column pipe by plastic ties, or other non-metallic
means, at 10-foot intervals. It should conform to NEC codes and be shielded when passing
bowls.
G. Submersible Electric Motor: The motor shall be a heavy duty submersible type NEMA
design for 4" motors, 3450 rpm and inverter duty rated. The motor shall be capable of
continuous operation under water. A suitable thrust bearing shall be incorporated in the
lower end of the motor adequate to receive the entire hydraulic thrust load of the pump unit
plus the weight of the rotating parts regardless of the direction of rotation. The variable
speed motor shall have a 1.15 service factor, and shall be suitable for use on a 480 volt,
three phase electric service. The motor leads shall be protected against the pump with a
304 stainless steel cable guard held in place with stainless steel banding. As the motor lead
exit the top of the cable guard it shall be properly protected to prevent damaging or cutting
the lead by the cable guard material.
H. Check Valve: The column check valves shall be installed to prevent backflow. Valves
shall be either bronze or ductile iron designed for minimum head loss, to provide a positive
seal under high or low pressure applications. The lowest check valve shall be installed
within 20' of the pump discharge. Valves shall be lead and zinc free, and rated at a
minimum 425 psi. All internal components except the nitrile seal shall be stainless steel.
2.2 CONTROLS
A. The well pump controls shall be located in a common panel with the booster pump controls.
The well pump controller will come equipped with a Hand-Off-Auto (H-O-A) switch.
2.3 WELL SCREEN
A. Double extra-heavy continuous Slot Wire Wound: The screen shall be constructed of
wound wire,reinforced with longitudinal bars,the wire having a cross section that will
form an opening between each adjacent coil.of wire that is shaped in such a manner as to
increase in size inward. The wire shall be firmly attached to the bars that will, in turn,be
attached to a coupling adapter. The total open area shall be such that the design entrance
velocity shall not exceed 6 feet per minute(0.1 foot per second). The width of the aperture
openings will be selected on the basis the water bearing formations. The screen shall have
adequate strength to resist the external forces to which it will be subjected during and after
installation.
1. The screen shall be fabricated entirely of Type 304L stainless steel.
2. The nominal diameter of the screen shall match the specified screen diameter.
3. Screens shall be manufactured by Johnson Screens,Inc.,Post Office Box 3118, St.
Paul,Minnesota 55165, or approved equal.
4. Method of Joining Screen to Screen:
a. Screen sections shall be joined by welded or threaded connections.
33 2000/ 2 of 3
1 b. If joints are to be welded,the welding rod must be made of material suitable for
joining corrosion resistant materials in a manner so as not the reduce that
resistance. Where welded joints are used, the standards of the American Welding
Society shall apply.
c. Where threaded and coupled joints are used, couplings shall be API or equivalent,
made up so that when tight all threads will be buried in the lip of the coupling.
d. Where dissimilar metals are jointed by couplings, a dielectric coupling shall be
used.
e. Screen sections for a single interval shall be joined by threaded and coupled joints
or electric arc welding. Welding rods and methods recommended by the screen
manufacturer shall be employed. Resulting joint(s)must be straight, sand tight,
and retain 100 percent of the screen strength.
f. Blank spacers for multiple interval screen shall be of the same material as the inner
casing,unless otherwise specified. They shall be joined to the screen by the
threaded and coupled joints or electric arc welding. The resulting joints must be
straight, sand tight,and retain 100 percent of the screen strength.
5. Method of Connecting Screen to Inner Casing: The inner casing and screen shall be
joined by threaded and coupled joints or electric arc welding.The resulting joints
must be straight,sand tight, and retain 100 percent of the screen strength.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
•
A. The well pump and all appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and requirements.
B. Setting the Screen and Inner Casing: The screen and inner casing assembly shall be
properly joined and lowered into the borehole. Lowering may be by means of a temporary
string of pipe attached to the bottom of the screen via the wash down bottom fitting. The
inner casing shall extend up into the outer casing 25 feet.
1. Centering guides shall be placed around the inner casing and screen assembly at a
maximum spacing of 100 feet and within one foot above each section of the screen.
3.2 CONTAMINATION
A. The Contractor shall use due precaution to maintain the premises in a sanitary condition and
prevent the entrance of surface water or any other matter into the well and keep the well
safe from contamination. The Contractor shall be responsible for any material that may fall
into the well and any effect it may have on water quality or quantity.
B. The well pump and piping installation shall come complete with all appurtenances and shall
be disinfected in accordance with VDH Waterworks Regulations.
END OF SECTION
33 2000/ 3 of 3
SECTION 40 7521
CHLORINE ANALYZER
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Amperometric chlorine analyzer for continuous measurement of free or total chlorine in
aqueous solutions.
1.2 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
A. The method of measuring free or total chlorine will be with a three-electrode amperometric
sensor immersed into an electrolytic medium with a membrane,selective to chlorine,
separating it from the sample.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements
1. Measurement range: 0 to 20 ppm chlorine for either free or total chlorine
2. Total Chlorine
a. Low Limit Of Detection(LOD): 30 ppb (0.03 ppm)or better
b. Limit Of Quantitation(LOQ): 90 ppb(0.09 ppm) or better
c. Repeatability/precision: 30 ppb or 3%,whichever is greater
d. Response time: —100 s for 90% change(T90)(At a stable T and pH)
e. Interference: Chlorine Dioxide, Ozone, and chalk deposits
3. Free Chlorine
a. Low Limit Of Detection (LOD): 30 ppb(0.03 ppm) or better
b. Limit Of Quantitation(LOQ): 90 ppb (0.09 ppm) or better
c. Repeatability/precision: 30'ppb or 3%,whichever is greater
d. Response time:—140 s for 90% change(T90) (At a stable T and pH)
e. Interference: Monochloramine, Chlorine Dioxide, Ozone,and chalk deposits
4. Drift:<10%with regular calibration (calibration will be weekly to quarterly
depending on the application,given stable sample temperature and pH of water
sample)
5. Specificity/Selectivity: Non-specific to a certain chlorine form,responds to any
chlorine species and other oxidizers as noted in the interference section
6. Calibration method: Customer has the option to use one(zero or slope)or two point
(zero and slope) calibration. Two point calibration with chemical zero is
recommended for chlorine concentration<0.5 ppm
7. Verification procedure: One-point process calibration(slope) against a standard
reference method.
1.4 CERTIFICATIONS (WHEN CONNECTED TO A HACH SC CONTROLLER):
A. EMC: CE compliant for conducted and radiated emissions CISPR 11 (Class A limits),EMC
Immunity EN 61326-1 (Industrial limits)
B. Safety: General Purpose UL/CSA 61010-1 with cETLus safety mark
40 7521 / 1 of 5
C. Australian C-TICK and Korean KC Markings
D. NEMA 4X/IP65 Water and Dust Ingress Ratings
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Operational Criteria
1. Operating temperature: 5 to 45 °C (41 to 113 °F)
2. Relative humidity: 0-95%,non condensing
B. Sample Requirements •
1. Maximum back pressure the chlorine sensor can manage without failure:
a. 0.5 bar,no pressure impulses and/or vibrations
2. Temperature: 0 to 45 °C (33 to 113 °F)
3. Temperature compensation range: 5 to 45 °C (41 to 113 °F)
4. Flow: 30-50 Ulu,40 L/hr- optimal(7.9-13.2 g/hr, 10.6 g/hr- optimal)
C. Storage Requirements
1. Electrolyte: 15 to 25°C(59 to 77°F)
2. Chlorine'sensors: 0 to 50°C(32 to 122°F) dry without electrolyte '
3. Panel: -20 to 60°C(-4 to 149°F)
1.6 WARRANTY
A. The product shall include a one-year warranty in accordance with specification 01 7836.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE •
A. Scheduled maintenance:-
1. Calibration by comparison with lab method: every 1 month or as necessary
2. Replace membrane: every 6 months or as necessary
3. Replace electrolyte: every 3 to 6 months or as necessary
B. Unscheduled maintenance
1. Cleaning as needed based on environmental conditions.
2. Working electrode tip polishing when required.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER ,
A. Hach Company,Loveland,CO •
1. Model CLF l0sc Reagentless Free Chlorine Analyzer
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNIT •
A. The CLF10 sc analyzer consists of:
1. Three-Electrode Amperometric Chlorine sensor
2. Chlorine sensor flow cell with integrated flow sensor
40 7521 / 2 of 5
3. pH flow cell with grab sample port
4. Digital gateway for communication between probes and controller
5. Stainless steel panel
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. The CLF10 sc work with Hach sc model controllers only.
B. The amperometric cell of the sensor consists of:
1. Gold cathode
2. Stainless steel counter electrode
3. Silver/silver chloride reference electrode
4. pH buffered electrolyte
5. Sensor membrane to filter chlorine species selectively and to provide interface
between the electrochemical cell and the sample
C. Wetted materials as follows:
1. Chlorine Measuring Cell: PVC
2. Chlorine Sensor Body:PVC
3. Chlorine Sensor Flow Cell: Acrylic
4. Optional pH Sensor Flow Cell: PVC
D. The sensor interface to the controller is through a digital gateway.
E. The chlorine sensor automatically compensates for temperature utilizing an embedded
temperature sensor.
F. The electrolyte provides internal,buffered pH compensation in the range of 4-9 pH units.
G. The sensor includes proprietary Cal Watch self-diagnostic technology.
H. The panel assembly includes a flow cell that integrates a flow meter and control valve.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Standard equipment:
1. Stainless Steel Mounting Panel
2. Chlorine Sensor with Membrane and Electrolyte
3. Chlorine Sensor flow cell
4. Flow meter with control valve
5. Digital gateway to sc controller with cable
6. User Manual
B. Dimensions
1. Sensor
a. Length: 7.68 in. (195 mm)
b. Diameter: 0.98 in. (25 mm)
40 7521 / 3 of 5
•
2. Panel
a. Length: 19.0 in. (482.6 mm)
b. Width: 19.5 in. (495.3 mm)
c. Depth: 5.95 in. (151.2 mm)
3. Gateway to Controller cable: 3 ft. (1 m)
C. Weight
1. Panel and empty panel-mounted components: approximately 12 lbs. (5.5 kg)
2. Complete panel with pH sensor:approximately 20 lbs. (9.1 kg)
2.5 ACCESSORIES •
A. Required •
1. sc Controller •
2. pH sensor
3. Acidification unit
4. Sample conditioning kit. J
3. EXECUTION
-1
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clearances
1. The pre-assembled analyzer panel must be mounted to allow clearance for sensor
removal and routine maintenance.
'B. Mounting
1. Wall or panel mounted
C. Sample Inlet
1. English Fittings
a. Speed-fit fitting- 'A in OD Tube
D. Sample Outlet(order with English or Metric Fittings)
1. English Fittings
a. Speed-fit fitting- `A in OD f
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor shall install the analyzer in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
and recommendation.
B. Manufacturer's representative shall include a half-day of start-up service by a factory-
trained technician.
1. Contractor shall schedule a date and time for start-up.
2. Contractor shall require the following people to be present during the start-up
procedure.
a. General contractor
40 7521 / 4 of 5
I
b. Electrical contractor
c. Hach Company factory trained representative
d. Owner's personnel
e. Engineer
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE AND START-UP
_
A. Contractor shall include the manufacturer's services to perform start-up on instrument to
r include basic operational training and certification of performance of the instrument.
B. Contractor shall include a manufacturer's Service Agreement that covers all the
manufacturer's recommended preventative maintenance,regularly scheduled calibration and
any necessary repairs beginning from the time of equipment startup through to end user
acceptance/plant turnover and the first 12 months of end-user operation post turnover.
C. Items A and B are to be performed by manufacturer's factory-trained service personnel.
Field service and factory repair by personnel not employed by the manufacturer is not
allowed.
D. Use of manufacturer's service parts and reagents is required. Third-party parts and reagents
are not approved for use.
END OF SECTION
•
40 7521 / 5 of 5
SECTION 40 7522
CHLORINE ANALYZER CONTROLLER
1. GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. A modular single or dual channel controller that works with analog sensor modules and/or
digital sensors.
1.2 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
A. Microprocessor-based sensor controller.
B. Change digital sensors connected to the cdntroller by unplugging and plugging in sensors as
necessary.
C. Change analog sensor modules connected to the controller by unplugging and plugging
analog sensor modules as necessary.
D. The controller accepts 4 different analog sensor modules in any combination to measure the
following:
1. pH/ORP module
a. Combination pH/ORP
2. Conductivity module
a. Contacting conductivity
b. Inductive conductivity
c. Cationic conductivity(Calculated pH)
3. Dissolved Oxygen/Oxygen Scavengers module
a. Amperometric dissolved oxygen
b. Amperometric oxygen scavengers
4. Analog mA IN module
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements
B. pH/ORP sensor module
1. Measurement range:
a. pH: -2.0 to+14.0 or-2.00 to 14.00 pH
b. mV: -2100 to+2100 mV
2. Repeatability: 0.1% of range or better
3. Response time(t90%): 0.5 s
4. Temperature range:
a. PT100/PT1000: -20 to 200 °C
b. Accuracy:+0.05 °C
C. DO sensor module
1. Measurement range:
40 7522/ 1 of 7
a. 0 to 2000 ppb
2. Repeatability:±0.5 ppb or±5%whichever is greater ,
3. Response time(t90%)for step change between 1-40 ppb: <30s
4. Temperature range: 0-45°C(32-113°F)
D. Oxygen Scavengers sensor module
1. Measurement range:
a. 0 to 500 ppb of dissolved N2H4
b. 0 to 100 ppb of carbohydrazide
c. Repeatability: <2% of the measured value or< 1ppb,whichever is greater
d. Response time(t90%):<60 seconds
e. Temperature range: 5-45°C (41-113°F)
E. Contacting conductivity sensor module
1. Measurement range:
a. Conductivity: 0-20,0000S/cm
b. Resistivity: 0-50 f•cm
c. TDS: 0-9999 ppm or 0-9999 ppb
2. Repeatability:
a. ±1%of reading or 0.002 µS/cm below 0.2 µS/cm,whichever is higher
3. Response time(t90%): 0.5 s
4. Temperature range: -20 to 200 °C
a. Accuracy:+0.05 °C
F. Inductive conductivity sensor module
1. Measurement range:
a. Conductivity: 0.5-10,000 mS/cm
b. % concentration: 0-99.99 or 0-200.0%
c. TDS: 0-9999 ppm
2. Repeatability:
a. 0.5-10,000 mS/cm:±2%
3. Response time(t90%): 1 s
4. Temperature range: -2 to 200°C
a. Accuracy:+0.05 °C
1.4 CERTIFICATIONS
A. EMC: CE compliant for conducted and radiated emissions CISPR 11 (Class A limits),EMC
Immunity EN 61326-1 (Industrial limits)
B. Safety: General Purpose UL/CSA 61010-1 with cETLus safety mark
40 7522/ 2 of 7
C. Australian C-TICK and Korean KC Markings
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Operational Criteria
1. Temperature: -4.0 to 140.0°F (-20.0 to 60.0 °C)
2. Relative humidity: 0 to 95%,non-condensing
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranted for two years from date of shipment from manufacturer defects.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Clean controller keypad
B. Calibrate mA output signals.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Hach Company, Loveland, Colorado and Hach Lange GmbH,Berlin, Germany
1. Hach model sc200 Controller
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNIT
A. The controller is available with the following power requirements:
1. AC powered: 100 to 240 Vac f10%, 50/60 Hz; 15 W with 7 W sensor/network card
load,37 W with 25 W sensor/network card load.
2. 24 VDC powered: 24 VDC, -15%,+20%; 16 W with 7 W sensor/network card load,
34 W with 25 W sensor/network card load(optional Modbus RS232/RS485 and
Profibus DPV 1 network connection).
B. The controller uses a menu-driven operation system.
C. The controller display is graphic dot matrix LCD with LED backlighting.
D. The controller is equipped with a real-time clock.
E. The controller is equipped with two security levels.
F. The controller is equipped with a data logger with RS-232 capability.
G. The controller shall have worded operation menus in 19 languages.
H. The controller is equipped with an SD card reader for data download and controller
software upload.
I. Four electromechanical,UL rated, SPDT relays (Form C) are provided for user-
configurable contacts rated 100 to 230 Vac, 5 Amp at 30 VDC resistive maximum.
1. The following can be programmed:
a. Alarm
b. Warning
c. Timer/scheduled cleaning
40 7522/ 3 of 7
d. Feeder control
e. Event control
f. Pulse width modulation
g. Frequency modulation
2. The following can be assigned:
a. Primary value measurement I
b. Secondary value measurement I
c. Tertiary value measurement I
d. Quaternary value measurement I
e. Primary value Measurement II
f. Secondary value measurement II
g. Tertiary value measurement II
h. Quaternary value measurement II
i. Real time clock
j. Calculated values
J. Two analog 0/4-20 mA outputs are provided with a maximum impedance of 500 ohms.
1. The controller can be equipped with three additional 4-20 mA outputs with a
maximum impedance of 500 ohms.
2. The following can be-programmed: .
a. Alarms:
i. Low alarm point
ii. Low alarm point deadband
iii. High alarm point
iv. High alarm point deadband
•
v. Off delay
vi. On delay
b. Controls:
i. Linear
ii. Bi-linear
iii. Logarithmic •
iv. PID
3. The following can be assigned:
a. Primary value measurement I
b. Secondary value measurement I
c. Tertiary value measurement I
40 7522/ 4 of 7
d. Quaternary value measurement I
e. Primary value measurement II
f. Secondary value measurement II
g. Tertiary value measurement II
h. Quaternary value measurement II
i. Calculated values
K. The controller can be equipped with the following forms of communication:
1. MODBUS RS-232
2. MODBUS RS-485
3. Profibus DP
L. All user settings of the controller are retained for 10 years in flash memory.
M. The controller is equipped with a system check for:
1. Power up test(monitoring and shutdown)
2. Total power draw
3. Memory devices
4. Temperature mother board
N. The controller has the option of graphical measurement that tracks measurement values
over lime.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Materials
•
1. Housing:polycarbonate, aluminum(powder coated), and stainless steel
2. Rating:NEMA 4X enclosure,rated IP66
B. Conduit openings: 0.5 in.NPT
2.4 Components
A. Standard equipment
1. Controller
2. Mounting hardware for wall,pipe,and panel mounting
B. Dimensions: 144 x 144 x 180 mm(5.7 x 5.7 x 7.1 in.)
C. Weight: 1.6 kg(3.5 lbs.)
2.5 Accessories
A. Weather protection shield
• B. Sun screen
C. RS-232/RS-485 MODBUS output card
D. PROFIBUS DP output card
E. HART output card
40 7522/ 5 of 7
F. Additional mA input card
•
G. Additional mA output card
3. EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. The sensor may need to be installed with additional accessories depending on its
application.
1. Mount on rail,panel,pipe, or wall.
2. Sensor to analyzer maximum distance: 300 m(985 ft.)
3.2 INSTALLATION 1
A. Contractor shall install the analyzer in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendation...
B. Manufacturer's representative shall include a half-day of start-up service by a factory-
trained technician.
1. Contractor shall schedule a date and time for start-up.
2. Contractor shall require the following people to be present during the start-up
procedure.
a. General contractor
b. Electrical contractor
c. Hach Company factory trained representative
d. Owner's personnel
e. Engineer
3.3 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall coordinate chlorine analyzer controller I/O with the pump control panel,
SCADA RTU,and chemical feed pump control system for automatic operation and
monitoring.
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE AND START-UP
A. Contractor shall include the manufacturer's services to perform start-up on instrument to
include basic operational,training and certification of performance of the instrument.
B. Contractor shall include a manufacturer's Service Agreement that covers all the
manufacturer's recommended preventative maintenance,regularly scheduled calibration
and any necessary repairs beginning from the time of equipment startup through to end user
acceptance/plant turnover and the first 12 months of end-user operation post turnover.
C. Items A and B to be performed by manufacturer's factory-trained service personnel.
Field service and factory repair by personnel not employed by the manufacturer is not
allowed.
D. Use of manufacturer's service parts and'reagents is required. Third-party parts and reagents
are not approved for use.
40 7522/ 6 of 7
END OF SECTION
40 7522/ 7 of 7
SECTION 40 4200
PROCESS PIPING INSULATION
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope
a. This section specifies insulation for exposed piping and related equipment and
appurtenant surfaces.
B. Temperature Classes
a. Insulation for exposed piping and equipment is classified for the following
temperature ranges: low,medium,high, and very high.
b. Low temperature class insulation shall be suitable for an operating temperature range
of minus 100 to plus 100 degrees F.
c. Medium temperature class insulation shall be suitable for an operating temperature
range of 100 to 800 degrees F.
d. High temperature class insulation shall be suitable for an operating temperature range
of 800 to 1200 degrees F.
e. Very high temperature class insulation shall be suitable for an operating temperature
range of 1200 to 1800 degrees F.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section
as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and
those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.
a. ASTM B209-90 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
b. ASTM C533-85 Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation
c. ASTM C534-88 Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in
Sheet and Tubular Form
d. ASTM C552-88 Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation
e. ASTM E96-90 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
£ FEDSPEC Plastic Sheet(Sheeting) "Plastic
g. L-P-535E-79 `Strip"Poly (Vinyl Chloride) and Poly(Vinyl Chloride-
Vinyl Acetate),Rigid
h. FEDSPEC Insulation,Blocks,Boards,
i. HH-I-558B(3)-76 Blankets,Felt Sleeving(Pipe and Tube Covering), and Pipe
Fitting Covering, Thermal(Mineral Fiber,Industrial Type).
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Piping insulation shall be tubular type or the flexible blanket type. Insulation for valves,
strainers, fittings, expansion joints, flanges and other connections shall be segmented
sections,molded, or blanket type coverings of the specified type and thickness of pipe
40 4200/ 1 of 6
insulation, or the flexible blanket type. Equipment insulation shall be flexible blanket type
or rigid board type cut to fit the surface.
2.2 INSULATION
A. General
a. Low temperature class insulation shall be of the unicellular elastomeric thermal,
cellular glass, or fiberglass type.
b. Medium temperature class insulation shall be of the cellular glass or fiberglass type.
c. High temperature class and very high temperature class insulation shall be of the
calcium silicate type or the flexible blanket type. Piping and equipment subjected to
vibration(such as engine exhaust) shall be insulated with flexible blanket type.
B. Unicellular Elastomeric Thermal Type
a. Unicellular elastomeric thermal type insulation shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C534,Type I.
C. Cellular Glass Type
a. Cellular glass type insulation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C552,
Type II.
D. Fiberglass Type
a. Fiberglass type insulation shall conform to the requirements of FEDSPEC HH-I-
558B.
E. Calcium Silicate Type
a. Calcium silicate type insulation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C533,
Type II, Class C.
F. Flexible Blanket Type
a. High Temperature Class: High temperature insulation shall be removable 1-inch or
2-inch thick blanket-type insulation designed for continuous 1200 degree F service.
The blanket shall be a custom sewn, flexible,reusable jacket, custom designed to
closely fit the piping or the equipment housing. Blanket shall be custom fitted to not
restrict access to any instrumentation or equipment. Insulation shall not compact or
shake down in vibrating service. Blanket insulation shall consist of a noncombustible
silica cloth jacket and no asbestos white ceramic fiber insulation. Insulating blanket
shall be Thermazip Hi-Temp blanket Style 2000-60-3000 by Accessible Products
Company, Hitco AIM,Advanced Thermal Products, SEI Temp-Set 1200, or equal.
b. Very High Temperature Class: Very high temperature insulation shall be removable
1-inch or 2-inch thick blanket-type insulation designed for continuous 1800 degree F
service. The blanket shall be a custom sewn,flexible,reusable jacket, custom
designed to closely fit the piping or the equipment housing. Blanket shall be custom-
fitted to not restrict access to any instrumentation or equipment. Insulation shall not
compact or shake down in vibrating service. Blanket insulation shall consist of a
noncombustible silica cloth jacket and high purity alumina and silica no asbestos
white ceramic fiber insulation. Insulating blanket shall be Thermazip Hi-Temp
blanket Style 2000-61-3000 by Accessible Products Company,Hitco AIM,Advanced
Thermal Products, or equal.
2.3 INSULATION JACKETS
40 4200/ 2 of 6
A. Laminated Jackets
a. Laminated jackets shall consist of aluminum and white kraft paper: Jackets shall
have a perm rating for water vapor transmission of not more than 0.02 in accordance
with procedure A of ASTM E96.
B. Aluminum Jackets
( a. Aluminum jackets shall be constructed of smooth finish aluminum sheet conforming
to ASTM B209,alloy 5005,temper H16,with integral vapor bather. Jackets shall be
0.016 inch thick.
b. Sheet metal screws shall be aluminum or stainless steel.
c. Jackets shall be secured with 0.020 by 3/4 inch type 304 stainless steel expansion
bands.
2.4 INSULATION COVERS
A. Polyvinylchloride (PVC) Covers
a. Polyvinylchloride covers shall be one piece,premolded polyvinylchloride
conforming to FEDSPEC L-P-535E, Composition A,Type II, Grade E4.
l
• B. Aluminum Covers
a. - Aluminum covers shall be constructed of smooth fmish aluminum sheet conforming
to ASTM B209, alloy 5005,temper H16,with integral vapor barrier. Covers shall be
0.016 inch thick.
C. Soft Covers
a. Soft covers shall be of the reusable type with TFE-coated fiberglass covers and liner.
Soft covers shall be provided for the following:
2.5 SHIELDS
A. Unless otherwise specified,thermal pipe hanger shields shall be provided at pipe supports.
2.6 FLASHING •
•
A. Flashing shall include aluminum caps,sealant and reinforcing. Aluminum caps shall be 20
gage thick and shall be cut to completely cover the insulation. Sealants shall be as
recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
a. Reinforcement in flashing heated up to 370 degrees F shall be nylon fabric.
Reinforcement in flashing for hotter surfaces shall be wire mesh or as recommended
by the insulation manufacturer.
2.7 PRODUCT DATA
A. The following information shall be provided:
a. Manufacturer and manufacturer's type designation.
b. Descriptive literature and catalog data for materials to be used showing methods of
installation.
c. Certification of ratings for water vapor transmission and puncture and stiffness.
2.8 HEAT TRACING
40 4200/ 3 of 6
A. Heat tracing shall be Cromalox SRL self-regulating heating cable or approved equal.
Output rating at 50 deg F shall be 5 watts per foot.
B. Thermostat shall be a Cromalox model RTAS or approved equal. Unit shall be rated for 22
amps and mounted in a NEMA 4X box.
C. A Cromalox splice and tee kit with signal light model RTST-SL or approved equal shall be
installed on the end of the heat trace wire to indicate operation.
D. All components shall be from one manufacturer.
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
a. Insulation shall be applied over clean,dry surfaces. Double layer insulation,where
specified or required to achieve the specified surface temperature, shall be provided
with staggered section joints.
B. Pipe Supports and Shields
a. Unless otherwise specified,thermal pipe hanger shields shall be provided by the
Contractor and installed during pipe support installation. Where thermal pipe hanger
shields are used, apply the following to all butt joints:
a. On hot pipe systems,the Contractor shall apply 3-inch wide vapor barrier tape or
band over the butt joints.
b. On cold water, chilled water, or refrigerant piping,the Contractor shall apply a wet
coat of vapor barrier lap cement on all butt joints and seal the joints with a
minimum 3-inch wide vapor barrier tape or band.
C. Protection
a. Insulation and jackets shall be protected from crushing, denting,and similar damage
•
during construction. Vapor barriers shall not be penetrated or otherwise damaged.
Insulation,jacket, and vapor barriers damaged during construction shall be removed
and new material shall be installed.
D. Piping Insulation
a. General
a. Pipe: Piping shall be continuously insulated along its entire length including all in-
line devices such as valves, fittings,flanges, couplings, strainers and other piping
appurtenances. Unless otherwise specified,piping insulation shall be provided
with laminated jackets. Insulation shall be butted firmly together and jacket laps
and joint strips provided with lap adhesive. Jackets shall be provided with their
seams located on the underside of pipe.
b. PVC covers shall not be used with medium- or high-temperature class insulation.
Removable flexible blanket-type insulation need not be jacketed.
a. Fittings, Connections,Flanges and Valves: Fitting, connection, flange and valve
insulation shall be provided with covers. Insulation shall be secured in place with
20-gage wire and a coat of insulating cement. Covers shall overlap the adjoining
40 4200/ 4of6
pipe insulation and jackets. Covers shall be provided with their seams located on
the underside of fittings and valves.
c. Low Temperature Class
a. Pipe: Insulation shall have ends sealed off with a vapor barrier coating.
b. Fittings, Connections,Flanges and Valves: Except where soft covers are specified,
insulation for pipe sizes 2 inches and less, shall be provided with rigid PVC
covers. Covers shall be sealed at edges with vapor barrier adhesive. The ends of
covers shall be secured with vinyl tape. The tape shall overlap the jacket and the
cover at least 1 inch. Vapor barrier shall not be penetrated.
c. Except where soft covers are specified, insulation for pipes 2 1/2 inches and larger
shall be provided with rigid aluminum covers. Covers shall be mechanically
secured by corrosion-resistant tacks pushed into the overlapping throat joint.
d. Medium,High, and Very High Temperature Class
a. Pipe: Except for flexible blanket type,insulation shall have ends sealed with end
joint strips and held in place by waterproof adhesive.
b. Fittings,Connections,Flanges and Valves: Except where soft covers are specified,
rigid insulation shall be provided with rigid aluminum covers. Covers shall be
mechanically secured by corrosion-resistant tacks pushed into the overlapping
throat joint. •
e. Outdoor Piping
a. Pipe: Rigid insulation shall be provided with aluminum jackets. Flexible blanket-
type insulation shall be designed for outdoor,weather-exposed service.
b. Fittings,Connections,Flanges and Valves: Rigid insulation shall be provided with
rigid aluminum covers. Flexible blanket type insulation shall be designed for
outdoor,weather-exposed service.
E. Mechanical Equipment Insulation
a. General: Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall fit the contours of equipment
and shall be secured with 1/2 by 0.015 inch-galvanized steel bands. Weld pins or
stick clips with washers may be used for flat surfaces and spaced a maximum 18
inches apart. Joints shall be staggered and voids filled with insulating cement.
Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall be provided with laminated jackets.
b. Unless specifically specified to be uninsulated, equipment connected to insulated
piping shall be insulated.
c. Outdoor Equipment: Insulation shall be provided with a coat of weatherproof mastic
and a layer of open-weave glass cloth embedded into a wet tack coat. Seams shall
overlap at least 2 inches. A finish coat of weatherproof mastic shall be provided.
The total coating thickness shall be a minimum of 1/8 inch.
d. Low Temperature Class: Insulation shall have joints,breaks, and punctures sealed in
facing with fire-retardant vapor barrier adhesive reinforced with 4-inch tape.
a. Insulation shall be provided with a layer of open-weave glass cloth embedded into
a wet coat of fire-retardant adhesive. Seams shall overlap at least 2 inches. A
finish coat of fire-retardant adhesive shall be provided.
40 4200/ 5 of 6
e. Medium Temperature Class: Joints shall be covered and cemented in place with 4-
inch-wide strips of the same material as the laminated jackets.
f. High and Very High Temperature Class: High and very high temperature equipment
shall be covered with custom-fitted removable blanket-type insulation. Blanket-type
insulation shall be secured with stainless steel wire lacing and hooks. Ends of blanket
segments shall overlap to prevent gaps and voids when the piping and equipment is
heated. Blankets shall be snugly secured under nuts and bolt heads to assure
complete coverage during operation and to prevent vibration-induced gaps or voids.
Blankets shall be secured in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instiuctions.
F. Flashing •
a. Flashing shall be provided at jacket penetrations and terminations. Clearance for
flashing shall be provided between insulation system and piping supports.
•
a. A heavy tack coat of sealant shall be troweled over the insulation, extending over
the jacket edge 1 inch and over the pipe or protrusion 2 inches. Reinforcement
shall be stretched over the tack coat after clipping to fit over pipe and jacket.
Clipped reinforcing shall be strapped with a continuous band of reinforcing to
prevent curling. Sealant shall then be troweled over the reinforcement to a
minimum thickness of 1/8 inch.
b. Aluminum caps shall be formed to fit over the adjacent jacketing and to completely
cover coated insulation. Cap shall be held in place with a jacket strap.
END OF SECTION
•
•
•
•
40 4200/ 6 of 6
SECTION 43 4221
WELDED STEEL PRESSURE TANK
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work of this Section includes furnishing and installation of a 6,000 gallon(6' diameter)
hydropneumatic tank.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All work performed under this section shall be in accordance with the Virginia Waterworks
Regulations,latest edition.
B. All work performed under this section shall be in compliance with applicable portions of
International Plumbing Code and local building code pertaining to selection and installation
of potable water system materials and products.
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following.
1. Shop Drawings
a. Scaled drawing of the pressure tank, tank foundation, inlets, and outlets.
b. Scaled drawing or diagram with schedule of water and air piping including valves,
gages,fittings,and appurtenances.
2. Product Data
a. Samples of warranty language for the pressure tank.
3. Certificates
a. Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, systems or
materials attesting that the product, system or material meets specification
requirements for the pressure tank.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
• A. Manufacturer's shall be regularly engaged in manufacturer of potable water systems
materials and products, of types and sizes required,whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.
1.5 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES
A. Provide one-year warranty and guarantee to the Owner that all work is in accordance with
the Contract Documents and will not be defective.
2. PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types,pressure
ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated,provide proper selection as
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes and types
matching piping and equipment connections;provide fittings of materials,which match
pipe materials used in potable water systems.
2.2 PLANT FABRICATED ITEMS
43 4221 / 1 of 3
SECTION 43 4221
WELDED STEEL PRESSURE TANK
-,
A. Tank •
1. Furnish and install one 6,000-gallon horizontal pressure vessel for hydropneumatic
storage. The tank shall be 6' diameter and approximately 30' long,having a
minimum usable capacity of 6,000 gallons.
2. Tank shall be constructed and designed to the latest edition of the ASME Unfired
Pressure Vessel Code and so stamped for 150 psig working pressure for 100F design
temperature.
3. Tanks shall be constructed to be mounted in the horizontal position and shall be
provided with 2 lifting lugs.
4. Tank shall be supplied with the necessary openings as shown in the details on the
drawings
3. EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Tank
1. Mount tank level,bearing evenly on existing concrete supports.
B. Coating Application
1. Tank shall arrive on site with the interior ready for operation and the exterior primed.
2. Materials shall be mixed, thinned;and applied according to the manufacturer's printed
instructions.
3. All materials delivered to job site shall be in original sealed and labeled containers of '
the paint manufacturer. All work shall be implemented in strict accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions and shall be performed in a manner satisfactory to =-I
the architect/engineer.
4. Finish coats shall be uniform in color and sheen without streaks,laps,runs,sags, or
missed areas.
5. Allow a minimum of seven days curing time after application of final coat to tank
surfaces before flushing, sterilizing, or filling with water.
6. Acceptance of Work
a. Inspect each coat before applying next coat.
b. Correct work that is not acceptable.
c. Coordinate inspections with Owner and Engineer.
3.2 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Hydrostatic Testing
1. Hydrostatically test piping systems. Vent or flush air from the piping system.
Pressurize system for 10 minutes with water at one and one-half times design
working pressure or 150 psi (which ever is higher),then reduce to design working
pressure and check for leaks and weeps.
B. Disinfection and Bacteriological Testing
434221/ 2of3
SECTION 43 4221
WELDED STEEL PRESSURE TANK
1. Clean,rinse,disinfect, and perform bacteriological testing in accordance with
AWWA C652 prior to placing into service
END OF SECTION
43 4221 / 3 of 3
SECTION 46 3000
CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT
1. GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Metering Pump-Shall be a positive displacement,peristaltic type tubing pump with a
variable speed DC motor,non-spring-loaded roller assembly located in the pumphead,
integral tube failure detection system, and peristaltic pump tubing assembly with attached
connection fittings.Flex-Pro A2 model shall be capable of output volumes from 0.02 to
19.3 gallons per hour.'
1. There shall be no valves, diaphragms,springs,or dynamic seals in the fluid path.
Process fluid shall contact the pump tubing assembly and connection fittings only.
2. Capable of self-priming at the maximum rated pressure of up to 125 PSI(8.6 bar).
3. Capable of running dry without damage.
4. Pump rollers shall be capable of operating in either direction at the maximum rated
pump pressure.
5. Pump rollers shall be capable of operating in either direction without output variation.
6. Suction lift shall be30 feet of water.
• 7. Pump shall have a two year manufacturer's warranty that includes chemical damage
to the pump head and roller assembly caused by a ruptured pump tube assembly.
B. Pumphead- Shall be a single,unbroken track with a clear removable cover
1. Tube failure detection sensors shall be wholly located in the pumphead. Tube failure
detection system shall not trigger with water contact. Float switch type switches alone
shall not be used.Process fluid waste ports or leak drains alone shall not be provided
as the sole means of protection.
2. Squeeze rollers with encapsulated ball bearings shall be directly coupled to a one
piece thermoplastic rotor. Four Kynar(PVDF)rollers shall be provided;two squeeze
rollers for tubing compression shall be located 180 degrees apart and two guide
rollers that do not compress the tubing shall be located 180 degrees apart. The roller
diameters and occlusion gap shall be factory set to provide the optimum tubing
compression;field adjustment shall not be required. Spring-loaded or hinged rollers
shall not be used.
3. Rotor assembly shall be installed on a D-shaped, chrome plated motor shaft and
removable without tools.
•
4. For tubing installation and removal,rotor assembly shall be rotated by the motor
drive at 6 RPM maximum when the pumphead cover is removed.Hand cranking of
• the rotor assembly shall not be required.
5. Pump head and tubing compression surface shall be corrosion resistant Valox
thermoplastic.
6. The pump head cover shall be clear,polycarbonate thermoplastic with an integral ball
bearing fitted to support the overhung load on the motor shaft. Cover shall include an
imbedded magnetic safety interlock which will limit the motor rotation speed to 6
. RPM when removed.,
7. Cover shall be positively secured to the pump head using four thumb screws. Tools
shall not be required to remove the pump head cover.
46 3000/ 1 of 5
C. Pump Tube Assembly
1. To ensure pump performance and accuracy, only tubing provided by the
manufacturer is acceptable.
2. Pump tube shall be assembled to connection fittings of PVDF material.
3. Connection fittings shall be permanently attached to the tubing at the factory. To
prevent tubing misalignment and ensure accuracy, fittings shall insert into keyed slots
located in the pump head and secured in place by the pump head cover.
4. Connection fittings shall be 1/2"M/NPT.
5. Tube sizes and connections shall be measured in inches.
6. The following tube sizes shall be available:
Model A2 Pump Tubes and Output Ranges
Tube Tube Max Max Output Roller
Material Size Pressure Temp Range Size
Material Code PSI bar F (C) ML/Min Code
_Flex-A-Prene®_ _ ND.. 125 (8.6) 185 (85)_ 1 - 108 _:A2-SND-R:_
Flex-A-Prene® NEE 110 (7.6) 185 (85) 3.6 - 361 A2-SNGG-R
Flex-A-Prene® NGG 110_(7.6). 185 (85) _.12 - 1215 A2-SNGG-R
Flex-A-Prene® NHL 65 (4.5) 185 (85) 9 - 870 A2-SNGG-R
Flex-A:Chem®. TH _50 (3.4) 130_(54)_ 7.4_- 740 A2-STH-R •
Flex-A-Thane GE 65 (4.5) 130 (54) 3 - 253 A2-SGE-R _
Flex-A-Thane __GG- 65.(4.5) -130 (54)-... .6.-586 A2-SGE-R
Flex-A-Thane® G2G 65 (4.5) 130 (54) 9.5 - 945 A2-SGE-R
D. Drive System- Shall be factory installed and totally enclosed in a NEMA 4X, (IP66)wash-
down enclosure. Capable of operating on 110/130VAC 50/60 Hz, or 208/250VAC 50/60
Hz,single phase supply,user configurable via a selection switch located in the junction
box.
1. Motor
a. Reversible, 1/8 HP DC gear motor rated for continuous duty.
b. Motor shall include overload protection.
•
c. The maximum gear motor RPM shall be 130 RPM.
2. Enclosure
a. Pressure cast aluminum with acidic liquid iron phosphate three-stage clean and
coat pretreatment and exterior grade corrosion resistant polyester polyurethane
powder coat.
b. Rated NEMA 4X(IP66).
c. Provided with 316SS floor/shelf level mounting brackets and hardware. Optional:
provide extended height brackets for mounting pump 4.5 inches above grade level.
(Engineer to specify)
46 3000/ 2 of 5
d. A wiring compartment shall be provided for connection of input/output signal
• wires and alarm output loads to un-pluggable type terminal block connectors.
Terminal board shall be positively secured to the rear of the pump housing by two
polymeric screws and fully enclosed by the wiring compartment cover. The
terminal board shall not be disturbed by the removal of the wiring compartment
cover. Ribbon cables shall not be used in the wiring compartment. Conduit hubs,
liquid-tight connectors, connector through holes and tapped holes shall be sized in
U.S. inches.
• 3. Control Circuitry
a. Control circuitry shall be integral to the pump and capable of adjusting the pump
motor speed from 1.0%to 100.00% in 0.1% increments.
b. The pump output shall be capable of being placed in MANUAL control using the
front control panel touchpad. While in manual control, the pump motor speed shall
be adjustable from 1.0%to 100.00%in 0.1%increments using the front control
panel touchpad.
c. The pump output shall be capable of being placed in REMOTE 4-20mA control
using the front control panel touchpad. While in remote control via 4-20mA analog
input,the input resolution shall be 0.1 of input value and capable of adjusting the
pump motor speed from 0%to 100.0%motor speed in 0.1%increments. Four
values shall be user configurable to define the low and high points on the output
slope; a low input value, the required pump percentage of motor speed at the low
input value, a high input value,the required pump percentage of motor speed at the
high input value.
d. The pump output shall be capable of being placed in REMOTE high-speed pulse
input control using the front control panel touchpad.While in remote control via
high-speed TTL/Cmos type digital pulse inputs or AC Sine wave type input pulses,
the frequency resolution shall be 1 Hz and capable of adjusting the pump motor
speed from 0%to 100.0%motor speed in 0.1%increments. Four values shall be
user configurable to define the low and high points on the output slope; a low input
value, the required pump percentage of motor speed at the low input value, a high
input value,the required pump percentage of motor speed at the high input value.
e. The pump output shall be capable of being placed in REMOTE pulse triggered
batch input control using the front control panel touchpad. While in remote control
via pulse triggered batch'input,the pump shall accept a TTL/Cmos digital pulse
type input or a contact closure type pulse input in the range of 1 to 9999 pulses per
batch. The batch time shall be adjustable from 1 to 999.9 seconds or minutes.The
pump motor speed during the batch shall be adjustable from 0%to 100.0%motor
speed in 0.1%increments.
f. The pump shall be capable of being remotely controlled via any of the following
optional communications modules,Profibus DPV1,Modbus RTU,Modbus-TCP,
or EtherNet/IP.The optional communications module hardware shall install into
the junction box of the pump.The pump shall be field upgradable at any time with
any of the communications protocols.
g. The pump operating firmware shall be field upgradable.New firmware shall be
downloadable via the Internet. A serial communications port shall be provided on
the pump terminal board,which when connected to the user's computer,will
permit the uploading of the new firmware into the pump.
46 3000/ 3 of 5
il
' .h. Provide an 8-button front panel user touchpad control for stop/start, configuration
menu access and navigation,operating mode selection,motor reverse,and auto
priming.
•
i. Provide a back-lit LCD display for menu configuration settings, current pump
operating mode,pump output value,tube timer hour counter, tube failure detection
(TFD) system and flow verification system(FVS).alarms status,motor direction
and remote input signal values.
j. Provide for remote stop/start pump via 6-30,VDC powered loop or non-powered
contact closure loop.
k. Provide for an optional 4-20mA output signal which is scalable and proportional to
pump output volume.
1. Provide a contact closure alarm output rated 3A at 250VAC or 3A at 30VDC that
will energize when the TFD (Tube Failure Detection) or FVS (Flow Verification
system)is triggered.
•
m. The pump shall provide a contact closure alarm output rated at lA at 125VAC or
at.8A at 30VDC that will energize when the motor is active.
• n. Provide an auto-prime function that will run the pump at 100%motor speed for 60
seconds maximum when the PRIME button is pressed. --
o. Provide a flow verification system(FVS)with programmable alarm delay time
from 1-255 seconds.FVS system shall monitor the FVS flow sensor while pump is
running only. System shall not monitor pump while,not running.
E. Flow Verification Sensor- Shall output high-speed digital pulse signal or 4-20 mA,while
pump is running only,to verify chemical injection.
1. Flow verification sensor shall be an ultrasonic transit time sensor.
2. Wetted components shall be PVDF (optional PVC),PEEK,and TFE/P (optional EP).
3. ,End fittings shall be PVDF with optional PVC slip fittings. All are included.
4. Sensor operating range shall be as follows:
Code Flow Range(GPH) Flow Range (LPH) Flow Range (mL/min)
A 0.158-79.2. 0.597-299.4 10.0-5,000
B 1.580-158.5 5.970-600.0 100-10,000
5. Shall provide a scalable 4-20 mA sourcing output. -I
6. Shall provide a scalable 0-10,000 Hz open collector frequency output.
7. Shall provide a programmable Form C Solid State Relay rated for a maximum load
capacity of 24 VDC and 100 mA.
a. Programmable for high/low flow rate alarm.
b. Programmable to energize on specified flow total.
8. Power Requirements: 5-24 VDC; 5 Watts maximum. - -'
F: Safety • -i
1. The pump shall be listed to UL standard`778 as a motor operated pump and CSA
standard C22.2 as process control equipment.
46 3000/ 4of5
2. Tube Failure Detection(TFD) system sensors shall be wholly located in the pump
head. The TFD system will stop the pump within three seconds of leak detection. To
prevent false alarms due to rain,wash-down, condensation, etc., sensors shall be
wholly located in the pump head. The tube failure detection system shall not trigger
with water contact.Float switch type switches alone shall not be used.Process fluid
-• waste ports or leak drains alone shall not be provided as the sole means of protection.
3. Pumphead cover shall include an imbedded magnetic safety interlock which will stop
the pump when removed.Pump rotor speed shall be limited to 6 RPM when cover is
• removed
2. PRODUCTS—NOT USED
3. EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURER
A. The pump shall be Blue-White ProSeries Flex-Pro series peristaltic pumps,manufactured in
the U.S.A. by Blue-White Industries.
3.2 SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION
A. The anticipated dosing rate is 0.088 gallons per hour.The Contractor shall make
adjustments in the field as required to achieve the desired chlorine residual at the Owner's
sampling location.
3.3 COORDINATION
A. Contractor shall coordinate chemical feed pump I/O with the pump control panel, SCADA
RTU, and chlorine analyzer controller as required to achieve automatic system operation
and monitoring.
END OF SECTION
46 3000/ 5of5
' Form OW-2 COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA DEQ Well If
Revised 8/19/2016 UNIFORM WATER WELL COMPLETION REPORT USGS Local#
Page 1 of 4 I VDH HDIN#
VDH PWSID# 2003400
*Indicates required field or section
**Indicates required field or section,if applicable
1.Contact Information*
Contact: Name Address _ Phone __
Owner Keswick Utilities Inc 701 Club Drive,Keswick,VA 22947
Driller Foster Well &Pump Co Inc PO Box 260, Earlysville,VA 22936 434-973-9079
System Provider
2. Well Location*
Physical Address: Club Drive County/City: Albemarle
Subdivision Name: Section: Block: Lot
' Tax Map/GPIN#:
Latitude: 37.99956 N Longitude: -78.34454 W
Datum Source Horizontal: 0 WGS84 0 NAD83 0 NAD27
Lat/Long Source(Check One): 0 Map 0 GPS 0 PPDGPS 0 Survey 0 Imagery ❑ WAAS
Location Information Collected By:
Physical Location Description:
3. Facility&Use*
Type of Facility(Check One): Type of Use(Check All That Apply):
❑ Private tEl Drinking/Domestic Use 0 Agricultural 0 Food Processing
® Waterworks 0 Manufacturing 0 Irrigation 0 Injection
❑ Observation/Monitoring Well 0 Geothermal(Cooling/Heating) ❑ Fire Safety
❑Closed
❑Opcn:0 Returned to Surface
j 0 Returned to Aquifer
4. Well Construction*
Well designation,Name or Number: TW 1-26
Date Started: 10/16/2018 Date Completed: 10/18/2018 Type Rig: Air Rotary
Class Well (Check One): ❑ I ❑ IIA ® IIB 0 IIIA 0 IIIB ❑ IIIC 0 IIID 0 IIIE 0 IV
Construction Type(Check One): ® New 0 Existing-Modified: o wen ❑ Pump:Date
Well Depth: 305 ft. I Total Hole(borehole)Depth: 53 ft. Depth to Bedrock: 47 ft.
Hole Size(Include reamed zones): 12 inches from 0 to 53 ft. 8 Inches from 53 to 305 ft.
Height of Casing above Land Surface: 2 ft. 0 inches
Casing Size(I.D.) and Materials: (below) Total Depth of Casing: 55 ft.
8 inches from +2 to 53 ft. o infiued Material Steel .322 wall Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
inches from to ft.o infiued Material Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
inches from to ft. o infiued Material Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
' Screen Size&Mesh:
4 inches from 305 to 285 ft. ❑infilted Mesh Size Type PVC Sch 40 Solid
4 inches from 285 to 225 ft. o infirm Mesh Size Type PVC Sch 40 Screen
4 inches from 225 to 205 ft. o infiued Mesh Size Type PVC Sch 40 Solid
Water Zones: from 62 to 77 ft. from 85 to 93 ft. from to ft.
Gravel Pack:
Size: Type: from to ft. Size: Type: from to ft.
Grout Type: 50 Grouting Method: Type of Seal:
0 Bentonite Slurry y 0 Neat Cement from t0 ft. ❑Poured from surface 0 pitless adapter
❑Bentonite pellets/chips 0 Concrete 13 Poured through tremnuc pipe 0 sanitary seal
i 0 Neat Cement(6%bentonite) from to ft. i Pumped from bottom upward
Camera Survey: ❑ Yes ❑ No I Date Conducted:
i
Additional Well Construction Form Information Attached: 0 Yes 0 No
Form GW-2 COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA , DEQ Well#
Revised 8/19/2016 UNIFORM WATER WELL COMPLETION REPORT USGS Local#
Page 2 of 4 VDH HDIN#
VDH PWSID# 2003400 -1
Well Well designation,Name or Number*: TW 1-26
5. Disinfection
Well Disinfected: 0 Yes 0 No Date:
6. Abandonment(*When abandoning the well, Sections 1 thru 4 must be completed and/or attach original GW-2) [
Date Started: Date Completed:
Static Water Level(unpumped level measured): ft.
Casing Size(LD.)and Materials: Casing Pulled: 0 Yes 0 No 0 Uncased Well 1
Depth of Fill: Type and Source of Fill:
Grout: From to Type: From to Type:
Method of permanently marking location:
7.Pump Test** .
Static Water Level(unpumped level measured): 15 ft.
Date: Method(Check One): 0 Water Tape 0 Airline 0 Transducer 0 Other
Stabilized measured pumping water level: ft.
Date: I Method (Check One): 0 Top of Well 0 Top of Casing 0 Surface Level
Test Pump Intake Depth: ft Stabilized Yield: gpm after hours
Natural Flow: 0 Yes ❑ No Flow Rate 60 gpm
Estimated Well Yield: gpm
8. Pump Data**
Type: 0 submersible 0 Turbine ❑ Shallow Jet 0 Deep Jet 0 Other: Motor HP:
Production Pump Intake Depth: ft Rated Capacity: gpm at ft TDH
9.Geologic Information
Type Logs: Aquifer Test Performed:
Water Quality Results Attached: Yes No
Comments: -
Formation Lilhology Province Geologic Map Used
Elevation
For Office Use
Form GW-2 COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA DEQ Well#
Revised 8/19/2016 UNIFORM WATER WELL COMPLETION REPORT USGS Local#
Page3of4 VDHHDIN#
VDH PWSID#2003400
*Indicates required field or section
**Indicates required field or section,if applicable
10. Driller's Log(Use additional sheets if necessary)*
Well designation,Name or Number: TW 1-26
Depth(feet) Type of Rock or Soil Remarks Drilling Diagram of Well Construction(with
Time dimensions)
(Min.)
From To (Color,material,fossils,hardness,etc.) (Water,caving,
cavities,etc.)
0 47 clay, brown schist, water,
weathered brown schist
stone, broken-up weathered
limestone, gray limestone
47 53 gray limestone set casing
53 62 gray limestone
62 77 broken-up weathered water
limestone, brownstone
77 85 limestone
85 93 broken-up limestone, water
broken-up brownstone
•
93 145 limestone
145 148 soft whitish limestone
148 305 limestone
11.Certification
I cert fy under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in
accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information
submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system or those persons directly responsible for
gathering the information, the information submitted is to the best of my knowledge and belief true, accurate, and
complete.I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information including the possibility offine
_' and imprisonment for knowing violations.
Signature*: L j NNs..l.,) '?- 4- C-f�- , Date: 10/31/2018
License Number: 2719000250/James R Holt
Form GW-2 COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA DEQ Well#
Revised 8/19/2016 UNIFORM WATER WELL COMPLETION REPORT USGS Local#
Page 4 of 4 VDH HDIN#
VDH PWSID# 2003400
*Indicates required field or section
**Indicates required field or section, if applicable
Additional Well Construction Data
(Use and submit only if additional space is needed)
12.Additional Well Construction Data
Well designation,Name or Number: TW 1-26
Physical Location: Date Started: Date Completed:
Hole Size(Include reamed zones):
inches from to ft. inches from to ft. inches from to ft.
inches from to ft. inches from to ft. inches from to ft.
inches from to ft. inches from to ft. inches from to ft.
Casing Size(I.D.) and Materials:
inches from to ft. o infilled Material Weight per ft. or wall thickness in. _,
inches from to ft. 0 infilled Material Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
inches from to ft. 0 infilled Material i Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
inches from to ft. 0 infilled Material Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
inches from to ft. 0 infilled Material , Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
inches from to ft. o infiucd Material Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
inches from to ft. 0 infilled Material Weight per ft. or wall thickness in. i
inches from to ft. 0 infilled Material Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
inches from to ft. 0 infilled Material Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
inches from to ft. 0 infilled Material Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
inches from to ft. o infilled Material Weight per ft. or wall thickness in.
Screen Size&Mesh:
4 inches from 205 to 185 ft. 0 infilled Mesh Size Type PVC Sch 40 Screen
4 inches from 185 to 165 ft. 0 infilled Mesh Size Type PVC Sch 40 Solid
4 inches from 165 to 145 ft. 0 infilled Mesh Size Type PVC Sch 40 Screen
4 inches from 145 to 125 ft. 0 infilled Mesh Size Type PVC Sch 40 Solid
4 inches from 125 to 105 ft. 0 infilled Mesh Size Type PVC Sch 40 Screen
4 inches from 105 to 85 ft. 0 Mulled Mesh Size Type PVC Sch 40 Solid
4 inches from 85 to 65 ft. o Mulled Mesh Size Type PVC Sch 40 Screen
4 inches from 65 to 10 ft. 0 infilled Mesh Size Type PVC Sch 40 Solid
inches from to ft. 0 infilled Mesh Size Type
inches from to ft. 0 infilled Mesh Size Type - ,
inches from to ft. o infillcd Mesh Size Type 1
Water Zones:
From to ft. From to ft. _ From to ft. From to ft.
From to ft. From to ft. From to ft. From to ft.
From to ft. From to ft. From to ft. From to ft. ,
From to ft. From to ft. From to ft. From to ft.
Gravel Pack:
Size: Type: From to ft. Size: Type: From to ft.
Size Type: From to ft. Size: Type: From to ft.
Size: Type: From to ft. Size: Type: From to ft.
Grout Type: from to ft. Grouting Method:
o Bentonite Slurry ❑Neat Cement from to ft. 0 Poured from surface
❑Bentonite pellets/chips 0 Concrete 0 Poured through tremmie pipe
0 Neat Cement(6%bentonite) from to ft. ❑Pumped from bottom upward
System Name: Keswick Hall &Golf Club 'County: Albemarle -
I
Well Location: Helicopter pad at entrance off Rte 616 Well Number: TW1-26/PWSID 7200008
' Class: IIB -15ize: 8" -
Depth: 305' Static Water Level: 17.5'
Test Pump Brand/Model: Franklin Electric 60gpm pumpend Pump HP: Franklin Electric 5 HP
Name and Address of Company Performing Test: Foster Well&Pump Co.,Inc.
PO Box 260, Earlysville,VA 22936
Date &Time Test Started: 11/6/2018 @ 10:00 am
Time Time of Air Line Water Depth to Drawdown Meter Pump Comments
Interval Reading Pressure Above Water Rate Reading Discharge
(psi) Pump(ft) (ft) (ft/ht) (gal) (gpm)
START 10:00 AMA 217.5 17.5 62
5min 10:05 AM 181.9 53.1 58
_ 5 min 10:10 AM 176.1 58.9 5.8 57
I 5 min 10:15 AM 172.7 62.3 3.4 57
5 min 10:20 AM 171.7 63.3 1.0 56
5 min 10:25 AM 170.1 64.9 1.6 56
5 min 10:30 AM 169.0 66.0 1.1 56
15 min 10:45 AM 161.3 73.7 7.7 55
15 min 11:00AM 156.7 78.3 4.6 55
' 15 min 11:15 AM 154.1 80.9 2.6 55
15 min 11:30 AM 152.4 82.6 1.7 54
-- 15 min 11:45AM 149.7 85.3 - 2.7 54 _
' 15 min 12:00 PM 146.5 88.5 3.2 54
1 hr 1:00 PM 130.1 104.9 16.4 52
1 hr 2:00 PM 119.9 115.1 10.2 52
1 hr 3:00 PM 112.8 122.2 7.1 51 PH 7.2
1 hr 4:00 PM 110.2 124.8 2.6 49
1 hr 5:00 PM 107.8 127.2 2.4 48
1 hr 6:00 PM 105.7 129.3 2.1 48
1 hr 7:00 PM 104.2 130.8 1.5 _ 47
1 hr 8:00 PM 102.6 132.4 1.6 47
1 hr 9:00 PM 101.0 134.0 1.6 47
1 hr 10:00 PM 99.3 135.7 1.7 47
1 hr 11:00 PM 97.7 137.3 1.6 47
l hr 12:00 AM 95.8 139.2 1.91 46
1 hr 1:00 AM 94.0 141.0 1.8 46
1hr 2:00AM 92.8 142.2 1.2 46 - - --_
•
Time Time of Air Line Water Depth to Drawdown Meter Pump Comments
Interval Reading Pressure Above Water Rate _Reading Discharge
__ -(psi) Pump (ft) (ft) (ft/ht) (gal) (gPm) - - -
1 hr 3:00 AM 91.7 _ 143.3 1.1 46
1 hr 4:00 AM ---_ ---- 90.5 144.5 1.2 46
1 hr 5:00 AM 89.4 145.6 1.1I 46
1 hr 6:00 AM 88.3 146.7 1.1 46
1 hr 7:00 AM 87.2 147.8 1.1 45
1 hr 8:00AM 85.9 149.1 1.3 45
1 hr 9:00 AM 85.2 149.8 0.7 45
1 hr 10:00 AM 84.4 150.6 0.8 44
1 hr 11:00 AM 84.1 150.9 0.3 44
1hr 12:00 PM 83.8 151.2 0.3 44 PH 7.2 _
1 hr 1:00 PM 83.2 151.8 0.6 44 1
1 hr 2:00 PM 82.4 152.6 0.8 44
1 hr 3:00 PM 81.7 153.3 0.7 44 '
1 hr 4:00 PM 81.0 154.0 0.7 44
1 hr 5:00 PM 80.2 154.8 0.8 44
1 hr 6:00 PM 79.8 155.2 0.4 44
1 hr 7:00PM- 79.2 155.8 0.6 44 --- -
1 hr 8:00 PM 78.6 156.4 0.6 44
1 hr 9:00 PM- 78.2 156.8 0.4 44 I
1 hr 10:00 PM- 77.5 157.5 0.7 44 -
1 hr 11:00 PM 76.8 158.2 0.7 44
1 hr 1:00 AM 74.9 160.1 1.5 _
1 hr 12:00 AM- 76.4 158.6 0.4 44 -_
43
1 hr 2:00 AM 74.6 160.4 0.3 43
--1 hr 3:00 AM 74.2 160.8 0.4 43 ,
1 hr 4:00 AM 73.8 161.2 0.4 43 -
1 hr 5:00AM 73.5 161.5 0.3 43
1 hr 6:00 AM 73.2 161.8 0.3 43
1 hr 7:00 AM -72.9 162.1 _ _ 0.3 -_-- 43 -
1 hr 8:00 AM 72.7 162.3 0.2 _ 43
1 hr 9:00 AM- 72.5 162.5 0.2 43
1 hr 10:00 AM M 72.3 162.7 0.2 NM
- r
RECOVERY TEST
1 hr 11:00 AM 199.8 35.2 +127.5
1 hr 12:00 PM- 203.0 32.0 + 3.2
1 hr 1:25 PM- 205.0 30.0 + 0.2
1 hr
1 hr -- _ -------- -
1 hr
System Name: Keswick Hall &Golf Club 'County: Albemarle
Well.Location:_Well furthest from entrance'
•
_ Name and Address of Company Performing Test: Foster Well&Pump Co., Inc.
PO Box 260,Earlysville,VA 22936
Date&Time Test Started: 11/6/2018 @ 10:00 am
Time of Air Line Water Depth to Drawdown Meter Pump Comments
Reading Pressure Above Water Rate Reading Discharge
(psi) Pump(ft) (ft) (ft/ht) (gal) (gpm)
11/6/2018 9:45 AM 177.5 pump running
11:00 AM 40.1 pump off
12:00 PM 47.5 pump running
1:00 PM 114.1 pump off
2:00 PM 36.2 pump off
3:00 PM 12.9 pump off
• 4:00 PM 50.4 pump running
5:00 PM 118.7 pump off
6:00 PM 31.8 pump off
7:00 PM 12.1 pump off
8:00 PM 88.5 pump running
11/7/2018 2:00 AM 37.2 pump off
8:00 AM 149.9 pump running
2:00 PM 31.1 pump off _
8:00 PM 85.7 pump off
11/8/2018 2:00 AM 85.9 pump off
8:00 AM 154.2 pump running
System Name: Keswick Hall&Golf Club ]County: Albemarle
Well Location:'well'elosest to`piiniphoy'se
•
_+ Name and Address of Company Performing Test: Foster Well&Pump Co., Inc.
PO Box 260, Earlysville,VA 22936
•
Date&Time Test Started: 11/6/2018 @ 10:00 am
Time of Air Line Water Depth to Drawdown Meter Pump Comments
Reading Pressure Above Water Rate Reading Discharge
(psi) Pump(ft) (ft) (ft/ht) (gal) (gpm)
11/6/2018 9:50 AM 44.0 pump cut off just before
reading
11:05 AM 36.8 pump off
12:05 PM 53.9 pump running
1:05 PM 37.1 pump off
2:05 PM 36.4 pump off
3:05 PM 36.1 pump off
4:05 PM 54.1 pump running
5:05 PM 36.6 pump off __
6:05 PM 36.1 pump off
7:05 PM 35.8 pump off
8:05 PM 53.8 pump running
11/7/2018 2:05 AM 35.6 pump off
8:05 AM 54.7 pump running
2:05 PM 35.7 pump off
8:05 PM 35.7 pump off
11/8/2018 2:05 AM 36.2 pump off
8:05 AM 54.4 pump running
Commonwealth of Virginia r
Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services
600 North 5th St. 0
Richmond, 23219
04-648-4480 DCLS
REPORT OF ANALYSIS Report Date: 11/16/2018
DCLS LIMS#: E181005684
Mail To
KESWICK ESTATES-FOSTER WELL&PUMP PWSID 7200008
P O BOX 260 REGION 7
EARLYSVILLE,VA 22936
ATTN:SHANE FOSTER
Sample Information
DATE RECEIVED 11/08/2018 14:56 SAMPLE COMMENTS EVIDENCE OF COOLING
SAMPLING DATE 11/08/2018 09:30 LOCATION PROPOSED WELL 5
COLLECTED BY SHANE FOSTER FACILITY WL005
- SAMPLE MATRIX DRINKING WATER COMPLIANCE N
ORDERED TEST 206-012 CYANIDE TYPE SP
PROJECT NAME DW2018-Q4 CATEGORY GE
ORDER NUMBER 42720
Test Results APPROVED BY: RLEWIS,Scientist Senior DATE APPROVED: 11/16/2018
METHOD PARAMETER RESULT PMCL SMCI, ANALYSIS DATE
SM 4500-CN-C+E
Cyanide <0.01mg/L 0.2 11/09/2018 16:00
Explanation of Terms and Disclaimers
PMCL is defined as the"Primary Maximum Contaminant Lever SMCL is defined as the"Secondary Maximum Contaminant Lever.If blank,level not defined
by EPA.Results denoted with an asterisk(')indicate that the PMCL is exceeded.Test Results meet all requirements of NELAC.Non-NELAC accredited
analyses noted by AA.The results included on this report relate only to this specific sample and not to other samples tested from this sampling location
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE: This report contains PRIVILEGED and CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. This report should not be reproduced,except in full,
without the written approval of DCLS.If you have received this report in error,please notify DCLS immediately at(804)648-4480 Ext.171.
Page 1 of 1 for Sample E181005684 COA_DW.RPT
r Commonwealth of Virginia
Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services
600 North 5th St. �-
Richmond, Virginia 23219
804-648-4480 DCLS
REPORT OF ANALYSIS Report Date: 11/20/2018
DCLS LIMS#: E181005680
Mail To
KESWICK ESTATES-FOSTER WELL&PUMP PWSID 7200008
P O BOX 260 REGION 7
EARLYSVILLE,VA 22936
ATTN:SHANE FOSTER
- Sample Information
DATE RECEIVED 11/08/2018 14:55 LOCATION PROPOSED WELL 5
SAMPLING DATE 11/08/2018 08:00 FACILITY WL005
COLLECTED BY SHANE FOSTER COMPLIANCE N
SAMPLE MATRIX DRINKING WATER TYPE SP
ORDERED TEST 206-095 INORGANICS CATEGORY GE
PROJECT NAME DW2018-Q4 ORDER NUMBER 42720
Test Results APPROVED BY: RMUSTAK,Analyst Senior DATE-APPROVED: 11/20/2018
METHOD PARAMETER RESULT PMCL, SMCL, ANALYSIS DATE
PPA 300.0
Chloride 11.6 mg/L 250 11/10/2018 18:29
Fluoride <0.2 ppm 4 2 11/10/2018 18:29
Sulfate <5.0 mg/L 250 11/10/2018 18:29
Ortho Phosphate as P <0.05 mg/L 11/10/2018 18:29
SM 23208/4500H+B
Alkalinity,Total 161 mg/L 11/13/2018 08:54
pH @20°C 7.58 S.U. 6.5-8.5 11/13/2018 08:54
PARAMETER QUALIFIER:Sample Held Beyond Normal Holding Time
SM 2120 B
Color-PCU @ pH 7.16 <5 PCU 15 11/09/2018 10:00
SM 2510B
Specific Conductance 350 pmhos/cm
ESTM D6919/SM 2340 B
Calcium Hardness 108 mg/L 11/16/2018 01:36
This is a calculated value from methods that are accredited.
'Lab not certified
Hardness-Total 158 mg/L 11/16/2018 01:36
SM 2130E
Turbidity 0.13 NTU 11/09/2018 13:35
SM 2540C
Explanation of Terms and Disclaimers
PMCL is defined as the"Primary Maximum Contaminant Lever SMCL is defined as the"Secondary Maximum Contaminant Level".If blank,level not defined
by EPA.Results denoted with an asterisk(*)indicate that the PMCL is exceeded.Test Results meet all requirements of NELAC.Non-NELAC accredited
analyses noted by".The results included on this report relate only to this specific sample and not to other samples tested from this sampling location.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE: This report contains PRIVILEGED and CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION This report should not be reproduced,except In full,
without the written approval of DCLS.If you have received this report in error,please notify DCLS immediately at(804)648-4480 Ext.171.
Page 1 of 2 for Sample E181005680 COA_DW.RPT
Commonwealth of Virginia
Division of Consolidated Laboratory Serviceseil;%14
600 North 5th St.
Richmond, Virginia 23219
804-648-4480 DCLS
REPORT OF ANALYSIS Report Date: 11/20/2018
- ` DCLS LIMS#: E181005680
Test Results APPROVED BY: RMUSTAK,Analyst Senior DATEAPPROVED: "11/20/2018
METHOD PARAMETER RESULT PMCL SMCL ANALYSIS DATE
SM 2540C
Total Dissolved Solids 184 mg/L 500 11/15/2018 15:49
SM 2330B
Aggressive Index 11.8 Al 11/20/2018 08:38
This is a calculated value from methods that are accredited.
"Lab not certified
Explanation of Terms and Disclaimers
PMCL is defined as the"Primary Maximum Contaminant LeveL" SMCL is defined as the"Secondary Maximum Contaminant Lever'.If blank,level not defined
by EPA.Results denoted with an asterisk(7 indicate that the PMCL is exceeded.Test Results meet all requirements of NELAC.Non-NELAC accredited
analyses noted by".The results included on this report relate only to this specific sample and not to other samples tested from this sampling location.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE: This report contains PRIVILEGED and CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. This report should not be reproduced,except in full,
-- without the written approval of DCLS.If you have received this report in error,please notify DCLS immediately at(804)648-4480 Ext 171
Page 2 of 2 for Sample E181005680 COA_DW.RPT
Commonwealth of Virginia •
Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services
i ' 600 North 5th St.
Richmond,Virginia 23219
804-648-4480 DCLS
REPORT OF ANALYSIS Report Date: 11/26/2018
DCLS LIMS#: E181005683
Mail To
' KESWICK ESTATES-FOSTER WELL 8 PUMP PWSID 7200008
P 0 BOX 260 REGION 7
EARLYSVILLE,VA 22936
ATTN:SHANE FOSTER
- Sample Information
DATE RECEIVED 11/08/2018 12:04 LOCATION PROPOSED WELL 5
- SAMPLING DATE 11/08/2018 09:15 FACILITY WL005
COLLECTED BY SHANE FOSTER COMPLIANCE N
SAMPLE MATRIX DRINKING WATER TYPE SP
ORDERED TEST 206-094 DW-METALS CATEGORY GE
PROJECT NAME DW2018-Q4 ORDER NUMBER 42720
Test Results APPROVED BY: MMOUER, Scientist Senior -DATE APPROVED: 11/2612018
METHOD PARAMETER RESULT PMCL, SMCL, ANALYSIS DATE
EPA 200.7
i Iron <0.05 ppm 0.3 11/19/2018
Sodium 5.61 ppm 11/19/2018
Silver <0.01 ppm 0.10 11/19/2018
__ . EPA 200.8
Beryllium <0.002 ppm 0.004 11/13/2018
Aluminum <0.05 ppm 0.05-0.2 11/13/2018
Chromium <0.01ppm 0.1 11/13/2018
Manganese <0.01 ppm 0.05 11/13/2018
Nickel <0.01 ppm 11/13/2018
Copper <0.010 ppm 1.3 11/13/2018
Zinc 0.115 ppm 5 11/13/2018
Arsenic <0.002ppm 0.010 11/13/2018
Selenium <0.01ppm 0.05 11/13/2018
Cadmium <0.002 ppm 0.005 11/13/2018
Antimony <0.002 ppm 0.006 11/13/2018
Barium 0.047 ppm 2 11/13/2018
Mercury <0.0002 ppm 0.002 11/13/2018
Thallium <0.002 ppm 0.002 11/13/2018
Lead <0.002 ppm 0.015 11/13/2018
Explanation of Terms and Disclaimers
i PMCL is defined as the"Primary Maximum Contaminant Level." SMCL is defined as the"Secondary Maximum Contaminant Level".If blank,level not defined
by EPA.Results denoted with an asterisk(A)indicate that the PMCL is exceeded.Test Results meet all requirements of NELAC.Non-NELAC accredited
analyses noted by AA.The results included on this report relate only to this specific sample and not to other samples tested from this sampling location.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE: This report contains PRIVILEGED and CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. This report should not be reproduced,except In full,
without the written approval of DCLS.If you have received this report in error,please notify DCLS immediately at(804)648-4480 Ext.171.
Page 1 of 1 for Sample E181005683 COA_DW.RPT
- • Commonwealth of Virginia
Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services
600 North 5th St.
Richmond,Virginia 23219
804-648-4480 DCLS
REPORT OF ANALYSIS Report Date: 11/15/2018
DCLS LIMS#: E181005682
Mail To
KESWICK ESTATES-FOSTER WELL&PUMP PWSID 7200008
P O BOX 260 REGION 7
EARLYSVILLE,VA 22936
ATTN:SHANE FOSTER
Sample Information
DATE RECEIVED 11/08/2018 14:56 SAMPLE COMMENTS EVIDENCE OF COOLING'
SAMPLING DATE 11/08/2018 09:30 LOCATION PROPOSED WELL 5
COLLECTED BY SHANE FOSTER FACILITY WL005
SAMPLE MATRIX DRINKING WATER COMPLIANCE N
ORDERED TEST 206-005 NITRITE TYPE SP
PROJECT NAME DW2018-04 CATEGORY GE
ORDER NUMBER 42720
Test Results APPROVED BY: RMUSTAK.Analyst Senior DATE APPROVED: 11/15/2018
METHOD PARAMETER RESULT PMCL SMC4 ANALYSIS DATE
EPA 300.0
Nitrite as N <0.05 mg/L 11/09/2018 10:35
r
Explanation of Terms and Disclaimers
_ PMCL is defined as the"Primary Maximum Contaminant Level" SMCL is defined as the"Secondary Maximum Contaminant Lever'.If blank,level not defined
by EPA.Results denoted with an asterisk(•)indicate that the PMCL is exceeded.Test Results meet all requirements of NELAC.Non-NELAC accredited
analyses noted by".The results included on this report relate only to this specific sample and not to other samples tested from this sampling location.
I CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE: This report contains PRIVILEGED and CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION This report should not be reproduced,except in full,
i___r without the written approval of DCLS.If you have received this report In error,please notify DCLS immediately at(804)648-4480 Ext.171.
Page 1 of 1 for Sample E181005662 COA_DW.RPT
Commonwealth of Virginia
Division of Consolidated Laboratory Servicesce>3?:kli,„
600 North 5th St.
Richmond,Virginia 23219
804-648-4480 DCLS
REPORT OF ANALYSIS I Report Date: 11M5/2018
DCLS LIMS#: E181005679
Mail To
KESWICK ESTATES-FOSTER WELL 8 PUMP PWSID 7200008
P O BOX 260 REGION 7
EARLYSVILLE,VA 22936
ATTN:SHANE FOSTER
Sample Information
DATE RECEIVED 11/08/2018 12:04 LOCATION PROPOSED WELL 5
SAMPLING DATE 11/08/2018 09:00 FACILITY WL005
COLLECTED BY SHANE FOSTER COMPLIANCE N
' SAMPLE MATRIX DRINKING WATER TYPE SP
; ORDERED TEST 206-004 NO2/NO3 CATEGORY GE
PROJECT NAME DW2018-Q4 ORDER NUMBER 42720
Test Results APPROVED BY: RMUSTAK,Analyst Senior DATE APPROVED: 11/15/2018
METHOD PARAMETER RESULT pMCL, SMCL ANALYSIS DATE
EPA 300.0
Nitrate+Nitrite 0.24 mg/L 10 11/09/2018 15:10
Explanation of Terms and Disclaimers
PMCL is defined as the"Primary Maximum Contaminant Level" SMCL is defined as the"Secondary Maximum Contaminant Lever.If blank,level not defined
by EPA.Results denoted with an asterisk(*)indicate that the PMCL is exceeded.Test Results meet all requirements of NELAC.Non-NELAC accredited
, analyses noted by AA.The results included on this report relate only to this specific sample and not to other samples tested from this sampling location.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE: This report contains PRIVILEGED and CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. This report should not be reproduced,except in full,
without the written approval of DCLS.If you have received this report in error,please notify DCLS immediately at(804)648-4480 Ext.171.
Page 1 of 1 for Sample Et81005679 COA_DW.RPT
.• Commonwealth of Virginia
Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services
600 North 5th St.
Richmond,Virginia 23219
804-648-4480 DCLS
REPORT OF ANALYSIS Report Date: 11/30/2018
DCLS LIMS#: E181005681
Mail To
KESWICK ESTATES-FOSTER WELL&PUMP PWSID 7200008
- P 0 BOX 260 REGION 7
EARLYSVILLE,VA 22936
ATTN:SHANE FOSTER
Sample Information
DATE RECEIVED 11/08/2018 12:04 LOCATION PROPOSED WELL 5
SAMPLING DATE 11/08/2018 09:20 FACILITY WL005
COLLECTED BY SHANE FOSTER COMPLIANCE N
" > SAMPLE MATRIX DRINKING WATER TYPE SP
ORDERED TEST 206-074 RADILOGIC CATEGORY GE
PROJECT NAME OW2018-Q4 ORDER NUMBER 42720
Test Results APPROVED BY: MTATUM,'Sdientist Sehlor - DATE APPROVED: 11/30/2018
METHOD PARAMETER RESULT PMCL SMCI, ANALYSIS DATE
,EPA 900.0
Alpha,Gross <0.37 pCi/L 15 11/26/2018
PARAMETER QUALIFIER:Result is below the SDWA detection limit.
Beta,Gross 0.8±0.6 pCi/L 11/26/2018
EPA 904.0
Radium-228 <0.51pCi/L 5 11/28/2018
PARAMETER QUALIFIER:Result is below the SDWA detection limit.
ii
Explanation of Terms and Disclaimers
PMCL is defined as the"Primary Maximum Contaminant Level' SMCL is defined as the"Secondary Maximum Contaminant Lever.If blank,level not defined
by EPA.Results denoted with an asterisk(•)indicate that the PMCL is exceeded.Test Results meet all requirements of NELAC.Non-NELAC accredited
analyses noted by^A.The results included on this report relate only to this specific sample and not to other samples tested from this sampling location
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE: This report contains PRIVILEGED and CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION This report should not be reproduced,except in full,
without the written approval of DCLS.If you have received this report in error,please notify DCLS immediately at(804)648-4480 Ext.17t
Page 1 of 1 for Sample E181005681 COA_DW.RPT
•
Commonwealth of Virginia
te"
Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services
600 North 5th St.
Richmond, Virginia 23219
804-648-4480 DCLS
REPORT OF ANALYSIS Report Date: 11/27/2018
DCLS LIMB#: E181005678
�.. Mail To
KESWICK ESTATES-FOSTER WELLS PUMP PWSID 7200008
P 0 BOX 260 REGION 7
EARLYSVILLE,VA 22936
ATTN:SHANE FOSTER
( Sample Information
DATE RECEIVED 11/08/2018 14:56 SAMPLE COMMENTS EVIDENCE OF COOLING
-' SAMPLING DATE 11/08/2018 08:45 LOCATION PROPOSED WELL 5
COLLECTED BY SHANE FOSTER FACILITY WL005
SAMPLE MATRIX DRINKING WATER COMPLIANCE N
ORDERED TEST 206-101 M524 • TYPE SP
PROJECT NAME DW2018-Q4 CATEGORY GE
ORDER NUMBER 42720
r
' Test Results APPROVED BY: TPAYNE,Scientist Senior • DATE APPROVED:.11/27/2018
-_ METHOD PARAMETER RESULT PMCL SMCL ANALYSIS DATE
gPA 524.g
Vinyl Chloride <0.50 ppb 2 11/08/2018
1,1-Dichloroethene <0.50 ppb 7 11/08/2018
Methylene Chloride <0.50 ppb 5 11/08/2018
trans-1,2-Dichloroethene <0.50 ppb 100 11/08/2018
Methyl tert-Butyl Ether <5.0 ppb 11/08/2018
cis-1,2-Dichloroethene <0.50ppb 70 11/08/2018
Chloroform <0.50 ppb 11/08/2018
1,2-Dichloroethane <0.50 ppb 5 11/08/2018
1,1,1-Trichloroethane <0.50 ppb 200 11/08/2018
Carbon Tetrachloride <0.50 ppb 5 11/08/2018
Benzene <0.50 ppb 5 11/08/2018
—
1,2-Dichloropropane <0.50 ppb 5 11/08/2018
_ Trichloroethene <0.50 ppb 5 11/08/2018
Bromodichloromethane <0.50ppb 11/08/2018
• 1,1,2-Trichloroethane <0.50 ppb 5 11/08/2018
Toluene <0.50 ppb 1000 11/08/2018
Dlbromochloromethane <0.50 ppb 11/08/2018
Tetrachloroethylene <0.50 ppb 5 11/08/2018
Chlorobenzene <0.50 ppb 100 11/08/2018
Ethylbenzene <0.50 ppb 700 11/08/2018
Bromoform <0.50 ppb 11/08/2018
Styrene <0.50 ppb 100 11/08/2018
Explanation of Terms and Disclaimers
PMCL is defined as the"Primary Maximum Contaminant Level." SMCL is defined as the"Secondary Maximum Contaminant Lever".If blank,level not defined
by EPA.Results denoted with an asterisk(•)indicate that the PMCL is exceeded.Test Results meet all requirements of NELAC.Non-NELAC accredited
- analyses noted by A^.The results included on this report relate only to this specific sample and not to other samples tested from this sampling location.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE: This report contains PRIVILEGED and CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. This report should not be reproduced,except In full,
— without the written approval of DCLS.If you have received this report in error,please notify DCLS immediately at(804)648-4460 Ext.171.
Page 1 of 2 for Sample E181005676 COA_DW.RPT
Commonwealth of Virginia o'
Division of Consolidated Laboratory Services
600 North 5th St.
Richmond, Virginia 23219
804-648-4480 DCLS
- REPORT OF ANALYSIS Report Date: 11/27/2018
DCLS LIMS#: E181005678
Test Results APPROVED BY: TPAYNE,Scientist Senior .DATE APPROVED: 11/27/2018 •
METHOD PARAMETER RESULT pMCL SMCL ANALYSIS DATE
EPA 524.2
p-Dichlorobenzene <0.50 ppb 75 11/08/2018
o-Dichlorobenzene <0.50 ppb 600 11/08/2018
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene <0.50ppb 70 11/08/2018
Total Xylenes <0.50ppb 10000 11/08/2018
I
Explanation of Terms and Disclaimers
PMCL is defined as the"Primary Maximum Contaminant Levet" SMCL is defined as the"Secondary Maximum Contaminant Lever.If blank,level not defined
by EPA.Results denoted with an asterisk(")indicate that the PMCL is exceeded.Test Results meet all requirements of NELAC.Non-NELAC accredited
analyses noted by"".The results included on this report relate only to this specific sample and not to other samples tested from this sampling location
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTICE: This report contains PRIVILEGED and CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. This report should not be reproduced,except in full,
without the written approval of DCLS.If you have received this report in error,please notify DCLS immediately at(804)648-4480 Ext.171.
Page 2 of 2 for Sample E181005678 COA_DW.RPT
ra ULNA—A I R 1 Biological, Cheoical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
1 Biological and Chemical Treatability Studies: Flow Measurements
L A S O R A T O R I E S, I NC- I 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
1 Phone 4434)295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID 106015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
r
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65824
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65824
-" DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 72OOOO8,KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 12:O0AM
•
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG-MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING HATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
IRJST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A IBA K. SAMPLE.
i n
AQUA-AIR LABO ATO Itil 'C '
r, REPORTED BY 0/i/'/'VJ
fi
A C U A—A I R 1 Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
1 Biological and Chemical Treatabilit9 Studies; Flow Measurements
INC- I 627 Dice Street i Charlottesville, Va. 222903-0841
I Phone 1434)295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID B 00015
I
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
•
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65824
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65825
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/0S/2018 '
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 72OOOO8, KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 12:3OAM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E.COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG-MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET TWE DRINRINS WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, MERE
4
KIST BE NO COLIFORNS DETECTED IN A 100 I8. SM3LE.
AQUA-AIR LABO AT R NC
REPORTED BY
A GT U A—A I fl I Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
Diolooical and Chemical Treatability Studies. Flow Measurements
I_A 39.11Z1 R A T O R I E S e I IV C_ I 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
1 Phone 14341295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID S 00015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2O18
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
•
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65824
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65826
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 72OOOO8,KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 1 :O0AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG—MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
MUST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 IL SAMPLE.
•
•
•
~ ADUA—AIR LABOR TOR S IN
REPORTED BY
A G?V A—A I F2 I Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Hater, Air, and Solids:
1 Biological and Chemical Treatability Studies; Flow Measurements
L_Pt en IR 1=-1 T O H I CS, I IVC_ 1 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
Phone 1434)295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID 0 00015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65824
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65827
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 720O0O8, KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 1:30AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG—MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET DIE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
MREST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 ML SAMPLE.
AQUA—AIR LABO TO IE ,
REPORTED BY
Ps ICE Li fa—PI I R I Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
I Biological and Chemical Treatability Studies: Flom Measurements
L—A'B O R IPI T O R I ES , 1627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
I Phone C434/295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID $ 00015
II
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 2GO
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65824
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65828
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 72OOOO8,KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 2:O0AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG—MUG PROCEDURE.
•
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE. •
TO MEET THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORN, TFI RE
MUST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 ML SAMPLE.
AQUA—AIR LAB AT R'I 3, C��J�
REPORTED BY
A C,U A—A I R I Biological, Cheoical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
I Biological and Chemical Treatability Studies; Flow Measurements
L_AIEtiOF.ATOR I EE „ I NIC_ 1 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
I Phone (4341295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID 4 00015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65824
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65829
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 7200008, KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 2:3OAM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG—MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE ➢RINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFDRM, MPS
MUST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 ML SAMPLE.
AQUA—AIR LABO T ) INC
REPORTED BY
(7��
A Q L1 A—A I R I Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids)
I Biological and Chemical Treatability Studies: Flow Measurements
L_A Et O R A T O R I E S, I NI C_ 1 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
1 Phone 1434)295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID 9 +"•'d5
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
•
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65824
SAMPLE NUMBER: A6583O
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 72OOOO8, KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 3:O0AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG—MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET TIE DRI)B4IN6 WATER STANDARD FOR COUFORM, TNERE
MUST BE NO COLIFORNS DETECTED IN A 103 ML SAMPLE.
AQUA—AIR LABO i R ES INC
REPORTED BY ((A)
1�
A E2IJ A—A I R I Biological, Cheaical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
I Biological and Chemical Treatability Studies: Flaw Measurements
' L_AF3!D RnTOR I as.„ I NIC_ 1627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
1 Phone 1434)295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID 100015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65824
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65831
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/22O18
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 72OOOO8, KESWICK HALL R GLOF CLUB, 11/8/18 3:3OAM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPS-MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
MUST BE NO COLIFORNS DETECTED IN A 100 ML SAMPLE.
AQUA-AIR LABO AT I S, NCB ��J
REPORTED BY t �i�- -
A O 1_.IA—A I R i Biological, Clinical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
i Biological and Clinical Treatability Studies: Flow Measurements
L.A S O R A T O R I E S : INC- 1 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
I Phone f434)295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID 100015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/06/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65824
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65832
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 7200008, KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 4:00AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG-MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO NEE THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, HERE
MUST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 It SAMPLE.
AQUA-AIR LABOR TO I OC
REPORTED BY
A GILIA—A I R I Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
I Biological and Chemical Treatability Studies: Flow Measurements
L-A)E.6!CI R A T O R I E S v I NI - I 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
I Phone (434)295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID Y 00015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260 •
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65824
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65633
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
•
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 72OOOO8,KESWICI; HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 4:3OAM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COL I BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG—MUG PROCEDURE.
0 PNPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
MOST BE O COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 Kt. SAMPLE.
AQUA—AIR LABO AT I ,C
altAAJ
REPORTED BY
A O U A—A I R I Biological, Cheiical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
Biological and Chesical Treatability Studies: Flom Measurements
L,Ft FS R Pit'DRIES., I NI C- I 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
I Phone C4343295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID I 00015
, FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65834
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65834
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 72OOOO8, KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 5:O0AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG-MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING:WATER STRNDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
MUST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 Pt SAMPLE.
AQUA-AIR LABO AT INC
REPORTED BY s `/
A C V A—A I R 1 Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
1 Biological and Chemical Treatability Studies: Flow Measurements
L_A I3 17 R A T O R I E S ,, INC- 1 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
Phone 14341295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID Y 0001S
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
•
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65834
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65835
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/O9/2O18
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 7200008,KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 5:30AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COL!FORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG-MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
IR1ST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 ML SIIPLE.
AQUA-AIR LAB AT •Im7 1 C
REPORTED BY
A C?UPI—A I R I Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
I $ioleaical and Chemical Treatability Studies: Flow Measurements
R A T U R I ES� I NC- I 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841. 9
I Phone 14341295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID M 00015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65834
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65836
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
1 F
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 7200008,KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 6:O0AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG-MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, DERE
MUST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A l00 ML SAIcLE.
AQUA-AIR LAB011;13111
REPORTED BY
AQUA—PIT R I Biological, Dieucal, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
1 Biological and Chesical Treatability Studies: Flom Measurements
L.A S;O R A T O H I E S m I N C- I 627 Dice Street 1 Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
Phone M3412955-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID 9 08815
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
ERRLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65834
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65837
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 7200008, KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 6:3OAM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG—MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
MUST SE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 ML SAMPLE.
AQUA—AIR LABO ATt I FNC� [��� j REPORTED BY (�J
A O LIA—Pi I R I Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
I Biological and Monica] Treatability Studies: Flom Measurements
L.Po ran Ffif"TOR I , I NI - 1627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22983-0841
I Phone (4341295-1716 1 Virginia Laboratory ID 9 00015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT •
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65834
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65838
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFIL;ATION:
PWS 7200008,KESWICK HALL & GULF CLUB, 11/8/18 7:O0AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
• E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG-MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFDRM, THERE
MUST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 ML SAMPLE.
AQUA-AIR LABOR OR , NC
REPORTED BY ClitAA j
Pb Q Ufa—fl I R 1 Biological, Chetical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
11 Biological and Chemical Treatahility Studies: Flow Measurements
l_ i=t 53flJ R A T O R I E S, I N O S I 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0E41
1 Phone C4341295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID i 00015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65834
SAMPLE NUMBER: A65639
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 7200008,KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 7:3OAM
4 SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG—MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
MUST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 IQ SAMPLE.
AQUA—AIR LABO T , INC
REPORTED BY lelai
A Gl U fa—A I R 1 Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
1 Biolonical and Chemical Treatability Studies: Flow Measurements
L A1,Bt° R A T CI R I ES m I tI C_ 1 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0641
1 Phone 14341295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID 6 00015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/201E1
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65834
SAMPLE NUMBER: A6584O
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/201S
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 7200008,KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 8:O0AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG—MUG PROCEDURE.
@ MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING HATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
KIST BE NO COLIFORMS DETECTED IN A 100 ML SAMPLE.
AQUA—AIR LABOR INC
REPORTED BY IIIt/"///"`���///
A U A—A I F2 1 Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
I Jlioloeical and Chemical Treatability Studies; Flaw Measurements
Lf A Eitp A T U R I E S, I N C_ 1 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
1 Phone (434)295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID I +°•15
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65834
SAMPLE NUMBER: A659O1
DATE RECEIVED: 11/0E1/2018
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 7200008, KESWICK HALL & GLOF CLUB, 11/8/18 8:3OAM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED. •
RUN BY THE ONPG—MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRIMINS WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
MUST BE NO COLIFORKS DETECTED IN A 100 K. SAMPLE.
AQUA—AIR LAB R 0 J NC
REPORTED BY VV
A LJiR—A I R I Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
aiolaaical and Chemical Treatability Studies: Flow Measurements
1_.1=1 R A T co R I E S, I NI C- I 627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
Phone 1434)295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID i 00015
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
•
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65634
SAMPLE NUMBER: A659O2
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/20113
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2012
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 720OOOS,KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 9:O0AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG-MUG PROCEDURE.
•
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORN, THERE
MUST BE NO COLIFODIS DETECTED IN A 100 ML SAMPLE.
AQUA-AIR LABO t�f� , INC
REPORTED BY ������////// LIA j- "'
A Q U A—A I R I Biological, Chemical, and Physical Analysis of Water, Air, and Solids;
1 Aiological and Chemical Treatability Studies: Flow Measurements
L.A.r3 f,F2A'TO R I E S, I NI IC- 1627 Dice Street : Charlottesville, Va. 22903-0841
Phone R34)295-1716 I Virginia Laboratory ID V ^15
FOSTER WELL COMPANY 11/09/2018
BOX 260
EARLYSVILLE, VA. 22936
BACTERIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS REPORT
TOTAL COLIFORM IN DRINKING WATER
JOB NUMBER: A65834
SAMPLE NUMBER: A659O3
DATE RECEIVED: 11/08/201E1
DATE REPORTED: 11/09/2018
IDENTIFICATION:
PWS 7200008,KESWICK HALL & GOLF CLUB, 11/8/18 3:30AM
SAMPLE MEETS STATE STANDARD FOR COLIFORM BACTERIA
IN DRINKING WATER. TOTAL COLIFORMS WERE NOT DETECTED.
E. COLI BACTERIA WERE NOT DETECTED.
RUN BY THE ONPG-MUG PROCEDURE.
0 MPN COLIFORM BACTERIA PER 100 ML SAMPLE.
TO MEET THE DRINKING WATER STANDARD FOR COLIFORM, THERE
MUST BE NO CALIFORNS DETECTED IN A 100 Ml. SPIRE.
r
AQUA-AIR LABO T PINC�
REPORTED BY U /'""�